Home

english - Alive Events

1. Pools Presets Channel Effects Sequence 1 PanfTilt Agenda Playback Chanel Preis Timecode 2 Dimmer Chat Fader Bitmap DMX Forms Views 3 Gobo Clock Fixture Groups Worlds 4 Color r Fixture i Desk Compact paros Eaeeom Status Sequence J Content MAtricks 6 Focus Info impact Sequence Pages Layout Content Channel eae View Sequence Pages s Network Executor Fader Easrapers Dimmer Sequence Pages ee Tracking Button gedeo prear Quikey 10 All Stage 3 Creating a Show 3 1 CREATING A WINDOW Clear the current screen content with Clear View briefly press top and bottom View buttons simultaneously If the two Clear View buttons are held longer than 2 seconds all screens also the external screens are cleared Pressing an empty space on one of the three TFT displays or the external monitors The CREATE A WINDOW menu will open 3 1 1Listing of individual windows and functions Sheets CHANNEL This window will display dimmer channels as figures You have direct access to channels and values here 3 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly EXECUTOR Within this window you will have the option to display a sequence which is assigned to an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button Among other options this is where global times can be changed 5 3 EXECUTOR window FADER Selected dimmer channels can be displayed as either bar or figure within this window Here you will also have direct access to channels and values
2. commandi Command Fix Chon Executor Patch Presets roups Command il Command 2 will always and at once switch to Command 1 Command and switches between the menus will always and at once switch to Select View in the Fixture Command 2 and Command Time menus the key has the function of the NEXT key of the console Depending on the menu the cursor can have different functions but will always have the purpose of moving scrolling or entering values value pressing on the outer edges or confirm or switching over pressing in the middle The key layout is identical for all PocketPCs even if the symbols on the keys differ have other symbols or the keys are arranged differently MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de we Pocket PC each LOOX GMA Remote x 10 21 fok Sort Dir pa Sort By Readout Presets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 FUJITSU SIEMENS LL X Using more than one remotes can cause bad screen display parts of the menue are missing Press REFRESH SCREEN to actuate the screen Besides the label the buttons have depending on their operational task different symbols to make orientation easier w
3. Color alsisisis DMS W OME 27T Dee ee z E ce ace A ce ce cica c f a f a Be A a Enter the desired name and confirm with OK The same name can be used for different fixtures types therefore use unique names Deleting Channel Values press DELETE Press the desired Channel Value button Renaming Channel Values press ASSIGN twice Press the desired Channel Value button Enter the desired name and confirm with OK The same name can be used for different fixtures types therefore use unique names Activating Channel Values Select a new fixture type Select feature and if needed attribute buttons will turn dark green 3 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly in the CHANNEL SHEET The individual dimmer channels can be accessed directly at any time Select the channels which you wish to modify selected channels will be displayed in yellow characters Selection Select a dimmer group 3 3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS Select dimmers via the CHANNEL key and the numeric keypad 10 Command Line With Touchscreenn or a left mouse click on the individual channels Make a left mouse click on the first channel and drag with the mouse holding the left mouse key down creates a Loop all channels in this loop are selected Values can be modified with the encoders Encoder assignment is displayed on the screen above or with the wheel By direct entry into the
4. FACKUP Shows Seiva Status FileServer Setup 11 9 Saving the Current Show to an external Hard Disk In a network envionment you can save shows to an external hard disk and load them from that location In order to do so you have to define the path to this hard disk from the BACKUP menu press BACKUP press File Server setting up the File Server press SERVER SETUP enter IP address FOLDER path USER LOGIN and Server Type Press SAVE to save the settings Saving a show SAVE Show As Enter a name for the show and confirm with ENTER The show will be saved under the new name 11 10 Loading a Show from an external Hard Disk press BACKUP press File Server press LOAD Show click on the desired Show in the list The Show is being loaded The Please Confirm window will open and offer you YES to save the current Show before loading the new one NO to load the new Show without saving the current one CANCEL will abort this process The Show is being loaded 11 11 Deleting a Show from an external Hard Disk press BACKUP press File Server press DELETE Show button In the list click on the Show that is to be deleted the Show will be deleted immediately If you press the Stay button before deleting a Show the Delete menu will not close automatically MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting d
5. FADERBUTTON1 The same as EXEC but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is explicitely pointing to the MIDDLE button ON activate all feature values in programmer OFF deactivate all feature values in programmer and deselect fixture PAUSE PARK all features of fixture GO UNPARK all features of fixture FLASH_DOWN As starting keyword every executor that follows after FLASH_ DOWN reduces its intensity channels to zero with no time FLASH_DOWN executor list ENTER As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS every executor that follows returns its intensity channels to their previous levels FLASH_DOWN executor list UNPRESS ENTER In an assign command this function can NOT be used You have to use the Assign menu for putting it on an executor button It is simply called FLASH there Note It is almost impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line Rather use it when it is assigned to a button or as part of a macro FADERBUTTON2 not Micro The same as EXEC but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is explicitely pointing to the LOWER button FLASH_DOWN_OFF Same as FLASH_DOWN UNPRESS Please look at the FLASH_ DOWN command description FADERBUTTON3 not Micro The same as EXEC but in case of ASSIGNMENTS it is excplicitely pointing to the UPPER button FIX As starting keyword it is used to fix unfix EXECUTORS A fixed executor is physically present on all pages FIX executor list ENTER F
6. MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de UE Herp e Executer Edit CE toggle T B toogle 26 Times Run Run Edit Seq 17 Scroll No Name Trig _ elay ji aaa ad Executor long 2 1 11 3 Cue 3s 3s los Seq 1 f to select the Executor i e3s 3s Os Times Loops Changing values press Edit Cue et mark the relevant value with cursor Center Press on Cursor value input with the Calculator confirm with ENTER Input Default AT Level x lt press Update Input Range 0 00 to 100 00 SETUP DUAL DIGIT VALUE ENTRY Entries performed over the numeric block have to be done in the conventional way entry 2_0 will yield a value of 20 il lt toggle Times Loops 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SINGLE DIGIT VALUE ENTRY Entries performed over the numeric block will be done in factors of ten entry 2 will yield 20 0_5 will become 5 and 1_5 will yield 15 without switching to DUAL Default AT Here enter the percentage value that the selected fixtures or dimmers are to take when the 2x AT command is used HIGHLIGHT NORMAL IS SOLO The function of the button in COMMAND 1 will be set to the respective function IS SOLO has the SOLO function i e all fixtures not selected will be set to the dimmer value 0 except they were set to NO MASTER in SETUP NORMAL The HIGHLIGHT button has the nor
7. 1 10 21 40 Slave Executor Konsole Fader _ Tasten lgrandMA_ 5 grandMaA light ultra light 21 60 grandMA Cd 20 21 60 219 19 mimmo EE EE bai ae ejejej Be ejeje w0 wed ie ma ba ejr WIM te Tre ni hi Sie t t Ne Mo PI cic mye To Ifo NA lt i NIN 1 20 20 20 1 10 granom fr grandMA lig 1 10 Master Executor Konsole Fader Tasten lgrandMA_ id 20 grandMA 198 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHT 16 4 Connecting consoles for a Network Backup system Any True Tracking Backup configuration with grandM A components may only be connected via a EtherNet communications network The grandM A consoles currently support two different hardware types of transmission media T cy 16 4 1 10 Base 2 EtherNet not for grandMA ultra light Z EtherNet with 10 Base 2 connection media also known as Cheapnet has lost its importance in todays i networking technology Nevertheless as 10 Base 2 systems are very easy to configure and they do not require additional networking nodes or hubs they might be used to easily link two or more grandMA consoles As the built in EtherNet card of the grandMA console autosenses the used connection media there is no need to r configure the console s hardware at any time Iaa The connection cable used for 10 Base 2 EtherNet is
8. MAtricks Here you can create save and directly call up different selection groups And you can copy or move values that were set by the Circular Copy function from one fixture to another 3 9 MAtricks Worlds Here you can create call up or manage so called Worlds Worlds are important when you e g want to work in the Multi User Mode or you just want to make some Fixtures invisible 15 7 Worlds Channel Pages In these pools buttons will be displayed for all pages The pages can be called up quickly Fader Pages by just clicking on them Here you can change the names of the pages Button Pages you can copy or delete them 5 5 Managing Pages Bitmap Effects Here you can create call up or manage Bitmap Effects Presets PAN TILT DIMMER GOBO COLOUR BEAM FOCUS CONTROL SHAPERS and ALL Creates new edits and calls up individual PRESETS with name and number 3 7 Creating and Calling up Presets COMMAND LINE Lists executed commands by their names Also to enter commands using the keyboard 10 Command Line CLOCK Display window analog or digital clock Switch by pressing the Analog button AGENDA In this menu you can create automatic controls by time date or sunrise sunset 9 3 Agenda menu DESK STATUS Displays the current software versions VXWORKS Operating system with date GrandM A Main program with date If this line is displayed in green the unit supports 4096 DM X channels
9. Press the DELETE LINE key 6 3 Executing an Effect Group If an Effect has started this will be indicated for the appropriate Scanner and Dimmer channels by a violett bar in the Fixture Channel or Fader Sheets If you want to visualize the changes made to the values the appropriate Sheet has be set to Output Options 3 4 8 or 3 5 7 Options of Fixture Channel and Fader Sheets Select the Effect Group from the Effect Pool The Effect Group will be started automatically Or Thenames and playback keys for the Effect Groups will be displayed in the right TFT display above the Encoders The name of the currently selected Effect Group will appear above the left Encoder Pressing the right arrow will start the complete Effect The selected Fixtures or Dimmers will now form the Effect Pressing the PAUSE key will stop or restart the complete Effect respectively You can switch off the Effect using the STOP key By pressing the left arrow the Effect will run backwards With the left INTENSITY Encoder you can globally adjust the size of the whole Effect Group Pressing the Encoder while turning it will increase or decrease the Encoder s resolution depending on the setup When pressing an Encoder or the key above this will bring up a Fader above the Encoder in the display Now you can also use it to modify the value Use the SPEED encoder to set the speed for the whole Effect Group If you use the Encoder to increa
10. According to manufacturer provisions the battery has to be changed after 5 years at latest Please attach a label on the unit indicating the date of purchase preferably update data etc choose a location where this information can easily be seen This manual was printed in the year 2004 1 5 6 Harddisk During operation do not push or knock the unit The built in notebook harddisk is secured by a rubber upholstery however mechanical stress can still damage the unit and lead to e g a complete loss of data Please read the appropriate notes and warnings given under Autosave and Oops Settings if the unit is to be used in very loud environment Not necessary for the MICRO as a Compact Flash is used 1 5 7 Housing Do not block or cover the ventilation If there is a high ambient temperature the display pannel grandMA only should be at least 5 cm open to ensure sufficient ventilation Do not place any drinks on the unit Do not use excessive force when adjusting the viewing angle of the display panel grandMA only 5 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 1 6 General Safety Instructions 14 If the power cord or the mains plug is damaged let a qualified technician replace it immediately N 15 Only use power cords which are marked as safety proof 1 Read all the instructions in the user s manual especially the safety requirements see 1 5 Safety requi
11. Due Deslau huns Undate Mose S n Snares Trockm pais tr Preset Filter ON Suve os detautt EDIT UPDATE UPDATE e 76 3 7 4 FREEZE Function By activating the FREEZE function called up Presets can be locked As long as the FREEZE Function is switched on the called up preset can not be overwritten by any Cues Sequences or Chasers Press the FREEZE key once LED is on Select a Preset the selected Preset will be activated and can no longer be modified by Cues Sequences or Chasers In order to deactivate the FREEZE function press the FREEZE key once more LED is off 3 7 5 Update Preset In order to change presets Press the EDIT key LED is on Click on or touch one of the Preset Keys the LED will blink the preset key will display EDIT The used fixtures channels are being selected and the values will be activated Make your required modifications Press the UPDATE key A window appears where you can either store the preset by pressing the OK key or cancel the modification by pressing CANCEL If you want to change more than one preset you can select another preset by pressing the EDIT key right after the modification followed by the NEXT key Before the activation of the new selected preset a window will open where you can store the 1st preset by pressing the OK key or where you can cancel the modification by pressing CANCEL The second preset can only be activated after this
12. If acell is selected you can change the function time by pressing the EDIT key All created events will be displayed in this sheet Selecting a cell within a column and pressing the encoder will open a window where you can enter the following Start Absolute The M acro will be started at the set time Dawn The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for dawn Sunrise The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for sunrise Sunset The Macro will be triggered at the calculated time for sunset Dusk The M acro will be triggered at the calculated time for dusk 2 15 Menu TIME amp DATE Time If ABSOLUTE is selected in this line under Start a time can be set for the M acro to start If DAWN SUNRISE SUNSET or DUSK is selected in the start column you can enter between 1 to 1 hour Consequently the M acro will be started either 1 hour earlier or later than the calculated time Duration If the unit is powered up later than the trigger time a setting in this column specifies the amount of time up to 8 hours after the original trigger time that the macro should still be triggered Repeat NONE will execute the event only once Daily weekly monthly yearly daily each month weekly each month daily each year weekly each year mothly each year will execute the event repeataly according to the set frequency Link Here you can specify which M acro is to be triggered by the event You can enter a
13. SL300 4 8 grey background these values were set by the user of another console these values cannot be changed SL300 5 191 2 i sL3006 191 i In order to modify grey i e alien values you have to select them in advance le Han Ea When chaning these values they receive a red background and thus become own values on the other ima consoles of this session these values will then immediately be displayed in grey Comp Fixtures Sheet Values So if fixtures of multiple users are selected the last modification will be assigned to the executing user sorted by Numbers Fi E LTP mode 148 148 jaca Compact Fixture Sheet The Compact Fixture Sheet works in parallel to the Fixture Sheet i e selections and changes are being displayed in both Sheets The difference lies in the arrangement of the fixtures and features as well as the adjustable number of visible fixtures and features on the screen Comp Fixture Sheet Options As opposed to the Fixture Sheet you can here make the following additional selections under OPTIONS SET x a I TNGS i ORIENTATION MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHT Left Right the fixtures will be displayed with ascending ID numbers side by side set the number of columns using COLUMNS Top Bottom The fixtures will be displayed with ascending ID numbers from top to bot
14. Set the starting and finishing radius if the two radi are unequal a spiral will be the result see graphics on the left use POSITION z Single to offset the formation on 3 axes without changing the form itself STRETCH POSITION Select fixtures Use Total Factor to change the magnitude of the complete figure without changing its proportion the value Total Factor 0 will place all fixtures in one point Use Factor X Y and Z to change the figure s proportion on the chosen axis see graphics on the left the circle has been modified to an oval the value 0 will yield a straight line on the respective axis use POSITION P Single to offset the formation on 3 axes without changing the form itself CALCULATE FOLLOW With this function you can transfer the real fixtures positions to the SETUP of the grandMA console The STAGE view will then display the actual position of the fixtures to the stage This light setting procedure should always be performed if it is not clear whether or not fixture positions had been exactly defined in the SETUP eingetragen wurde Important for the FOLLOW FUNCTION Define the light setting frame On the stage mark the corners of a sqaure light setting frame Enter the stage dimensions in SETUP FULL ACCESS STAGE SETUP Enter the dimensions of the light setting frame and its position relatively to the stage as such in the STAGE CALIBRATION menu The frame will
15. switch with Touch active part has a heading with a dark blue background scrolling in the Sheet for the marked cell press center to change the contents of the cell or make entries depending on the cell s contents same function as the Encoder of the console Groupmaster short All Full sets all groupmaster to full Full master is set to full Out master is set to zero scroll the master to the desired value scroll display can show max 12 masters if more masters are created scroll to the next page with also 12 masters 215 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 s T Groups Pocket PC foma Remote toggle Groups Presets toggle Fixture Groups e ar jump to the next Group button 4 gt jump to the next TE Group area same function as P NEXT key on the press OPTIONS will be displayed console J long Presets pull down menu for Prev ALL ODD EVEN pull Dowm menu of the Features toggle Groups Presets toggle Fixture Presets Pool o jump to the next e Preset button e t jump to the next Preset area 216 press OPTIONS will be displayed MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Declaration of Conformit according to directives 89 336 EWG and 92 31 EWG Manufacturer s name MA Lighting Technology GmbH
16. All fixtures and channels can be named individually Free Softpatch with MIN MAX and INVERT of all four DM X lines Definition of new fixture types on screen MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 14 3 8 Display of output and data entry Numeric dimmer channel listing Channel fader symbols Fixture parameter spreadsheets for status report on moving lights and dimmers Different additional options available 14 3 9 Selection and Data Input Selection via Group Keys with M ouse Hold and Move M ode with middle mouse key Align option for proportional change of any group of values Preset softkeys for the moving light features Keys can be freely moved within the window Presets grouped together for the 10 different function types Keys of different preset groups with different colours Free assignment of channels to be controlled in which preset Direct access even during Playback 14 3 10 Automatic effect generator A number of complex effects applicable to any channel Library of all different movements 14 3 11 Store Options Single cues chase effects sequences or effects Selective programming for LTP and tracking mode Basic fade times for fading channels and basic delay for switching parameters Optional individual fade and delay for every single channel Overwrite M erge Insert
17. Effects 4 b Take Selection Ascii Show p Aus With the respective keys the touch screens can be switched on or off It is possible that a fault may cause the mouse to freeze in one position and can no longer be operated In this case the touchscreens can be switched off For this use function key F9 on the keyboard F9 will switch off all three touchscreens emergency switch To switch the touchscreens back on use the mouse To toggle the mouse function on both external monitors on and off In AUTO mode the software will recognize if a monitor is connected or not and will switch the mouse function for the external monitors on or off accordingly OFF will not allow any mouse function while ON will keep the mouse function activated at all times With this key the grandM A s internal speaker be switched on or off not available on older grandM As To set the sensitivity of trackball and the encoders to coarse fine or extra fine 16bit resolution With the PUSH key you can set the Encoder s sensitivity when holding it down and turning Switching between the M otorfader functions Executor Fader Channel Fader not available on the MICRO AUTO Executor Faders When switching between the Pages the M otorfaders will automatically pick up the values stored last Channel Faders Faders adjust to the called up values of the allocated channels MANUAL Executor Faders When switching
18. Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 17 2 2 Port Configuration In this menu you can configure a 2 port node For further information refer to the manual 2_ port Node you can download from our homepage www malighting com MA Network 2 Port Nodes Saving the 2 Port Nodes configuration 492 168 0 103 M Save Node Configuration D Di press TOOLS EE MA SETUP2 l press MA NETWORK CONFIGURATION Local search for node press 2 Port HardDisk gt kan press the SAVE CONFIG button i ze 5 Press OK to load the configuration in the Showfile This will make the configuration part of the Show variances like e g the failure of a 2 Port Node will be displayed in the Desk Status This will automatically bring up the next request if the configuration is to be saved as a backup on the console or to an external disk Press OK and use the Filebrowser to save the configuration on the console or to a floppy disk chose this option by touching HARD DISK Enter the name of the configuration and confirm with ENTER MA Network 2 Port Nodes Loading the 2 Port Nodes configuration press TOOLS press MA NETWORK CONFIGURATION press 2 Port press the LOAD CONFIG button inthe Filebrowser select the source chose this option by touching HARD DISK select the configuration and confirm with ENTER confirm the request Upload with OK This will overwrite the Nodes with the new con
19. LIGHTING rand Ara Full Size Light Ultra Light Micro Replay Unit onPC Offline Version 5 7 January 2007 2 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 1 Introduction 3 1 1 General Information 3 1 2 General Comments 3 1 3 Specifications 4 1 4 Installation 4 1 5 Safety Requirements Important read carefully 5 1 6 General Safety Instructions 6 1 7 Layout and Controls grandMA light 7 1 8 Replay Unit 11 1 9 General Operation 12 1 10 Quick Reference 15 2Setup 18 2 1 Selecting and creating of fixturesanddimmers 18 2 2 Menu Full Access or Live Access 19 2 3 DMX List 26 2 4 ATTRIBUTE SETUP 27 2 5 FIXTURE TYPES 31 2 7 Function Sets 33 2 8 Profiles 34 2 9 DM X Output and Ethernet Configuration 37 2 10 DMX Output Window 41 2 11 Auto Create 41 2 12 Setup menu 43 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS M enu 45 2 14 Setting Sound Signals 47 2 15 TIM E amp DATE M enu 48 2 16 User M anagement 49 3 Creating a Show 53 3 1 CREATING A WINDOW 53 3 2 Storing VIEWS 56 3 3 Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS 57 3 4 FIXTURE SHEET 59 3 5 CHANNEL SHEET 69 3 6 SOLO function 74 3 7 Creating and calling up Presets 74 3 8 Deleting Groups Sequences Views etc 78 3 9 MAtricks 79 3 10 BLIND Modus 82 4 Cues and Sequences 86 4 1 Creating Cues separate memories 87 4 2 Programming Sequences 89 4 3 Editing Sequences 93 4 4 Editing Chasers 99 4 5 Updatings Cues 1
20. press HARD DISK press LOAD Show Press on the desired SHOW in the list This will load the Show The PLEASE CONFIRM window with the following options will open YES To save the current Show before loading the new one NO To load the new Show without saving the current one CANCEL To abort this process The show will be loaded 11 3 Loading a empty Show press BACKUP press HARD DISK press Load Show type the new name and confirm with Enter The PLEASE CONFIRM window with the options will open YES To save the current Show before loading the new one NO To load the new Show without saving the current one A complete new and empty show will opwn Additionally you can save an empty Show to hard disk or floppy so that you can use it later when needed This way you can also transfer demo shows standard settings etc to others 11 4 Deleting the current show The currently loaded Show cannot be deleted In order to delete the currently loaded Show you have to load another Show first 11 5 Deleting a Show from the internal harddisk press BACKUP press HARD DISK press DELETE Show In the list click on the Show that is to be deleted the Show will be deleted immediately If you press the Stay button before deleting a Show the Delete menu will not close automatically 11 6 Saving the Current Show on floppy disk All data necessary for the SHOW can be saved on to floppy disk even
21. www malighting de eMail info malighting de A xi T g f al J Size of Executor B le Default Button and Fader Assignment Load from Save as Apply to 1 default default all Exec Micro Assignment M enu only one button and the fader 1 5 depends on size of executor can assigned here Button and Fader Assignment Size of Executor 1 2 Default Button and Fader Assignment Load from Save as Apply to 3 4 default default all Exec Assignment Menu of a fader button only the button 1 5 depends on size of executor can assigned here previously overriding it LTP Off Switches the Executor off so that it no longer outputting cue data to stage Rate 1 Puts the RATE FADER to 50 position RATE Fader Learn Direct entering of the Chaser speed When pressing this button at least three times the Chaser speed is set lt lt lt Playback of the previous cue without FADE or SNAP times gt gt gt Playback of the next cue without FADE or SNAP times Temp A Cue or chaser plays back as long as the button is pressed Upon releasing the button previous condition will be restored Top Resets the Sequence to the first cue Empty Button has no function Flash Sets the Dimmer channels in the current cue to 100 of their programmed value Starts the sequence if
22. 3 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly FIXTURE Displays all fixtures and their various functions values status etc Here you will have direct access to the fixtures functions and values 3 4 Accessing Fixtures directly TRACKING In this window you can display a Sequence that is assigned to an EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button Here as opposed to the EXECUTOR Sheet all values or times can be displayed separately for an entire sequence Cues are displayed vertically with channel and fixture data displayed horizontally Any value time can be modified separately for any channel 5 4 TRACKING window DMX In this window all DM X output channels are displayed as values as they are actually patched It is also possible to perform drag and drop patching operations from within this window 2 10 DM X Output window CONTENT This window can display a cue of a sequence with all values and times It can display the current cue the subsequent or the previous cue COMPACT CONTENT The content is identical with the CONTENT window more values can be displayed through another mode of distribution Pools GROUPS Displays creates new edits and calls up fixture and dimmer groups 3 3 Creating and Calling up Fixtures and Dimmer groups SEQUENCE In this Pool all the created Sequences are displayed This way assignments to Executors can be made very quickly Sequences can be renamed copied and deleted from within this window as well 5 1 ASSIGN
23. 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de mi 6 Effects Effects lek 6 1 Effect Pool In the Effect Pool you can create up to 900 different Effect groups In the individual Effects groups different Effects and functions can be combined and matched to each other For PAN TILT values self created two dimensional forms can be played back and adjusted 6 7 Creating and storing virtual forms The individual Effect Groups can be subdivided into four different types Effect Group with assigned Fixtures or Dimmers key of the Effect Group is displayed in pink a specific effect Effect Group without assigned Fixtures or Dimmers key of the Effect Group is displayed in red a generic effect Temporary Effect Group keys displayed in blue in the ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu If this Effect Group is not stored after having been created it will automatically be deleted after it is switched off Sequence Effect Group Effect Group key displayed in orange A specific copy of a generic effect that has been created automatically because a generic effect has been used when creating a cue 6 1 1 Creating an Effect Group Create an EFFECT window 3 1 Creating windows Select the Fixtures or Dimmers for which an effect is to be used selected Fixtures Dimmers are indicated by yellow characters Choose an empty Effect Group New keys and Encoder names are displayed above the encoders Pressing the EDIT key for this E
24. DM X Input using the 150 DMX LINES 53 DMX List 26 34 DMX Output Window 41 DMX Pan 24 DM X Hub 40 DM X XLR sockets 37 Dongle 37 Dot Zero 46 Dots in Preset button 74 DOUBLE SPEED 100 Dropout Elimination 142 DUAL DIGIT VALUE ENTRY 45 213 DUMMY Function 32 EDIT 154 166 EDIT EFFECT 124 EDITFORMS 123 130 EDIT menu 93 EDIT PROFILES 35 Editing Macros 153 EFFECT 53 167 Effect creating an automatically 41 Effect deleting individual an 127 Effect editing an 124 Effect Group assigning a 105 Effect Group customizing an 128 Effect Group editing a 124 Effect Group executing an 127 Effect Group switched off 130 Effect groups in Cues 129 Effect Pool 123 124 Effect run backwards 127 Effect Speed 46 EFFECTS 93 100 115 EFFECTS OFF 120 Elimination Dropout 142 Embedded Presets 77 Emergency Backup 5 Emergency Switch 44 Empty 106 107 ENCODER 8 74 Encoder Attribute Grouping 29 Encoder Grouping 29 Encoder labels 63 ENCODER SPEED 154 ENTER 154 EQUALIZE DOTS 131 Equalizer 47 ESC 168 ESCAPE 16 154 Ethernet 37 38 EVEN 42 154 168 EVERYTHING OFF 120 EXEC 168 Exec Sync 195 EXECUTOR 17 53 99 EXECUTOR Assignment to 105 EXECUTOR BUTTON 86 107 executor button assign 106 EXECUTOR Button Page 118 EXECUTOR copying an 113 EXECUTOR Defaults 46 EXECUTOR deleting an 78 113 EXECUTOR FADER 44 93 107 118 Executor Fader 150 EXECUTOR FADER Window 114
25. Dark display background illumination The desk lamp can be switched either on or off with the ON OFF key The brightness of the desk lamp can be changed using a left mouse click on the blue bar or using the touchscreen On the ULTRALIGHT and MICRO you can only switch the brightness of the console lamp from FULL to HALF and vice versa Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Fixture Schedule Adjustments Lights BITMAP01 Touchscreen Calibration Backlight Change Structure OF Show Create or ul Left Middle Right Bright Defaults Delete Fixtures eto mms Pile DA Touchscreen Options Change Patch and z FE hee Fidwa Settings Live Left Middle Right Live On Stage Access p On p on Pon External VGA Options Automatic Creati E Pe Gales Auto Left System Right SOA Create p Auto Of Auto _ I Click amp Beep aes F Version Message Boxes Beep On on one Screen 5 623 2048 Encoder amp Fader Movement Parameters Wide Trackball Encoders Push is Executor Mode Coarse Coarse Fast Screensgfer o Faders Wheel Auto Additive Update Off Software p Setup Menu grandMA Light UltraLight pi x m Fi
26. EXECUTOR 5 on PAGE 3 is to be deleted Entry DELETE key EXECUTOR button 3 5 ENTER Or Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad LED is on Enter the EXECUTOR number via the numeric keypad Press the PAGE key next to the numeric keypad LED is on Enter the PAGE number via the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER Deleting Sequences Press the SEQUENCE key Enter the number of Sequence via the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER Deleting CUES Press the SEQUENCE key Enter the number of Sequence via the numeric keypad Press the CUE key and enter the cue number via numeric keypad confirm with ENTER If no sequence number is entered the Cue of the Master default sequence is deleted Deleting a PAGE Press the PAGE key next to the numeric keypad Enter the PAGE number via the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER The complete PAGE with all EXECUTOR faders and buttons is deleted MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING 2 10 right MA igis Reset Interleave Next Prev Interleave Wings Mirror Wingstyle 3 9 MAtricks 3 9 1 Intelligent Selecting Here you can create store and directly call up different Selection groups Find out what the different combinations and the resulting options can be used for by simply trying them out The listing of the individual
27. FADE times will be displayed Delays DELAY times will be displayed Output The DM X output values are displayed Executor ID The Executor s number and page are displayed only valid for Executor keys Cue ID The Sequence s number and respective Cue are displayed only valid for Executor keys Automatic If this key is pressed the display will automatically swap in this window when using the TIME key Layer Control If On is chosen a control bar appears below the Scanners By pressing on the individual buttons on the control bar the display in the window will be switched accordingly Preset Control If On is chosen a control bar appears below the Scanners For each function there is a se parate button By pressing on the individual buttons on the control bar the appropriate function will be activated and can be modified using the Encoders In the right upper corner of each button you ll find a small square If this square has a black background the respective function has not been modified If the background is red something has been changed in this function The Sorting amp Readout button must be pressed displayed with a green font Sort by With the respective key you can define the channels sorting order in the window Numbers Within the CHANNEL window channels are sorted by numbers Names Channels will be sorted by name Selected The selected channels will be moved to left a
28. If the destination of the store command is not empty you will be asked for confirmation In case of storing over existing cues you will furthermore be asked about the desired store mode e g merge overwrite or remove If you start storing by pressing the STORE hard key a temporary window will appear The settings in this window affect the way the store command is handled Defaults for these store options can be found in SETUP DEFAULTS menu In an assign command this function can be assigned to an executor s button ASSIGN TEMP executor list ENTER Note It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line Rather use it when it is assigned to a button or ina Macro TEMP does not really exist as a function It is always translated into a pair of GO OFF commands You will see that if you record TEMP in a timecode show THRU Views that contain multiple screens will be called back on the original screens Views that contain single screens from external monitors can not be called back on the build in system screens because of higher resolution Views which are called by the command line and not by the push of a VIEWBTN are called back on the original screens SWOP As starting keyword every executor that follows after SWOP increases the intensity of all programmed dimmer channels to 100 while reducing all other executors to 0 as long they are not protected against swop SWO
29. Intern The DM X IN on the backside of the console will be used ARTNET The assigned DM X In of an ARTNET unit will be used Assignment see 2 9 3 ARTNET DM X ETHERNET CONFIGURATION PORTALL Not verified in this software version PATH PORT The assigned DM X In of a PATH PORT unit will be used Assignment see 2 9 4 PATH POT DM X ETHERNET CONFIGURATION next pages By pressing the button below Configuration you can open the appropriate menu below or on the next page DMX Merge By pressing the M erge with button you can define on which internal DM X port A to H the DM X IN signal will bemerged with 37 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 z iiivetwork Connection Setup 192 168 0 4 Available grandMA 3D IP No Name Status Vers Purereeters tor Ethernet DMX Ovtpsi SEET FT R g Cors F F 38 DM XIN can be used to merge the signals of a second console with those of the grandM As M ERGE and pipe them to the stage on the same line If channels from the grandM A and of the second console are triggered in this connection the higher value will be sent HTP The DM X In can be used as an additional remote control channel 8 3 Remote control by DM X IN Attention If you are in a network connection of M aster Slave only the DM X IN of the Master console will be transferred to the internal DM X port The DM X IN of the Slave console can only be used for remote control purp
30. Manufacturer s address Dachdeckerstra amp e 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn Germany declares that the product Product category Control unit Name of product MA grandM A grandM A light grandM A ultra light grandM A RPU grandMA Micro Type MAGM complies with the following product specifications Safety EN60065 EN60950 EMV EMC EN55103 1 E1 EN50081 1 EN55103 2 E2 EN50082 1 Additional information DM X512 and analogue inputs and outputs must be shielded and the shielding must be connected to the earthing resp to the housing of the corresponding plug Dipl Ing Michael Adenau 217 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA FAQ TROUBLE SHOOTING 218 Question Why will my console on which have created a session suddenly become SLAVE after inviting another console Why will the 3D not function Will only boot up to the message COULD NOT FIND ATA blue scree Will boot up to the message screen will remain black will not become blue no system found Features are not assigned correctly e g the wheel changes the PAN setting or the fixture cannot be triggered MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Answer The other console s priority is higher than that of the founder console see chapter 14 1 When working with the 3D Visualizer you have to
31. Or When executing sequences you can modify and store single values of presets directly Play back a cue in which presets are to be modified Now you can modify this cue by direct access the UP DATE key LED is on 3 4 Accessing fixtures directly 3 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly Press the Update key once The UPDATE window will open By pressing this key you can toggle between only original contents and add new contents Only original contents Upon updating the preset only the changes on fixtures channels which have already been used in this preset will be stored Add new contents Upon updating the preset all changes will be stored regardless at to whether those fixtures channels have already been used in this preset Pressing the Update Preset key will update that preset being displayed with a blue background You can select another preset using the encoder Pressing the Update All Presets key will update all presets listed in the chart Pressing the Save as default key will store all pre settings as default e g Only original contents oder Add new contents These settings will be ready the next time you open the Update menu LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 3 7 6 Embedded Presets With this function you can embed preset values into other presets so you can quickly change multiple pres
32. Pressing and turning the encoder allows for fine tuning 1 10 4 Storing Settings The STORE key of the grandMA is very flexible If the STORE key is flashing you can switch it off with a second press or use ESCAPE Example Select some fixtures and set the color wheel STORE one of the buttons above or below an EXECUTOR fader make sure you have toggled back from CHANNEL to EXECUTOR Stores the color setting as a cue on that Executor STORE one of the buttons of an EXECUTOR fader where a cue was already stored gives you the option to overwrite merge information or create a second cue 1 10 7 CREATE LIST STORE a cell in the GROUP window Stores the chosen Fixtures as a new group enter a name via keyboard STORE any cell in the preset COLOUR window Stores the values as a color preset enter name via keyboard STORE one of the VIEW keys on the right hand side of the displays Stores the layout of the screen the mouse position etc as a view enter a name With STORE VIEW key you can store screens individually or all console wide In the ASSIGN menu you can enter names sequences of cues 1 10 5 Selecting and activating channels fixtures and functions Selecting and Activating have different meanings and are important terms and concepts when working with the grandMA Selected fixtures or channels are what you are currently working with you can tell what is selected by their names in fixture channel sheet being ye
33. They can help you e g to easily create circles as effect outputs Procedures as given in chapter 6 Effects and M odulators NOTE you have to enter all 3 parameters for the effect as otherwise no vector can be created and the effect cannot Fixtures Values run Within an effect stage values may not be mixed with other features sorted by Numbers some i When editing the effect enter the attributes X Y and Y STAGE in the PARAM ETER column SL300 1 2 st300 2 J60 5 3 SL300 3 SL300 4 2006 83 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA 84 SL300 20 Arrange in Matrix Arrange in Circle Stretch Positions Calibrate Follow Wizzard ill SETUP mode In this mode you can position fixtures using mouse Encoders or touch screen Changes will automatically be saved to the SETUP menu The SETUP menu may not be opened Open STAGE and choose SETUP mode Select fixtures usingthe mouse or the touch screen adjust the 3 axes using the Encoder die 3 Achsen verstellen or modify the X and Y axes usingthe left mouse button if you hold the left and right mouse button only the Z axis will be modified X Y and Z axes can be modified individually or groupwise see also 2 2 3 after switching from POSITION to ROTATION you can rotated fixtures individually or groupwise on the X Y or Z axis NOTE Perform changes p
34. To receive MSC set the device or the groups into the window Midi IN You can switch between M idi Enabled and Midi via Ethernet via the key below the window M idi IN After pushing the key Store all settings will be stored and the function will be started To send MSC set the device or the group into the window M idi OUT By the key Send you can change between sending Device Group or ALL You can switch between Midi Enabled and Midi via Ethernet via the key below the window Midi OUT After pushing the key Store all settings will be stored and the function will be started 8 4 2 Assigning Playback Buttons Press the TOOLS key once Call up the M IDI REM OTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REM OTE key Press the STORE key once LED is on Select a key in the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu Press the Playback button that you want to assign The selected button will now be assigned The assigned Playback buttons will be displayed on the individual keys of the MIDI REM OTE CONFIGURATION menu EXECUTOR buttons and faders can be assigned to the respective MIDI note 8 4 3 Selecting the MIDI Channel Pressing the Channel key will open a menu in which you can select one of the 16 Midi channels by a mouse click 8 4 4 Assigning the Pitch By pressing the KEY OFFSET key you can transpose the incoming notes by one octave downwards This can be set for up to three octaves 8 4 5 Deleting Assignments To de
35. You can use a search filter Select the manufacturer column on the side of Filter and enter the first character of a manufacturer Now only the models produced by this manufacturer will be displayed t On www ma share net you will find a forum to setup and download self created or altered Fixtures Channel Start Id Here you can set the first ID number of the Dimmers These are then displayed in the Channel and Fader Sheet The Dimmer channel of Scanners could also be used in the Channel and Fader Sheet In order to do so you would have to assign Channel IDs for the Scanners first Fixture Start Id Here you can set the first ID for the Scanners These are then displayed in the Fixture Sheet Dimmer channels can also be used in the Fixture Sheet In order to do so you would have to assign Fixture IDs for the Dimmer channels first Both ID numbers are displayed in the ID column in the fixture sheet separated by a colon Example 3 The lamp has the Channel ID 3 4 The lamp has the FIXTURE ID 4 6 8 The lamp has the FIXTURE ID 6 AND the Channel ID 8 Qty Quantity Finally you have to set the number of selected fixtures under Quantity numeric keypad or keyboard 19 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Fixture s To Patch _ PPPS aa e DDD DDD Hrd Daa Stage Dimensions X Min BAYA X Max SAPAN 20 Autopatch
36. every object that follows after the gt gt gt will try to go forward one step with zero fade time gt gt gt target object list ENTER Target type Operation EXEC Go forward one step with no fade time EFFECT Start running forward without fading in TIM ECODE Jump to the next breakpoint PAGE Does a gt gt gt on executors on that page SPEEDM ASTER Does a gt gt gt on all chases using that speed master executor assigned to a speed master ALL ALL is clearing any sub selection made with ODD EVEN NEXT and PREVOIUS ALL_CHASES ALL_CHASES is an alias for the expression ALL EXECUTORS THATARE ASSIGNED AS CHASES It can be used wherever EXEC could be used Example PAUSE ALL_CHASES ENTER ALL_SEQUENCES ALL SEQUENCES is an alias for the expression ALL EXECUTORS THAT ARE ASSIGNED AS SEQUENCE It can be used wherever EXEC could be used Example OFF ALL_SEQUENCES ENTER ASSIGN ASSIGN source objects destination objects ENTER Source objects a list of objects which are of the same type Destination objects alist of objects which are of the same type Source object type Possible destination object type Executing keyword EXEC FADERBUTTON1 2 3 SEQUENCE EXEC FADERBUTION1 2 3 GROUP EXEC FADERBUTTON1 2 3 163 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 EFFECT EXEC FADERBUTION1 2 3 VIEW VIEWBTN MACRO VIEW BTN Executor buttons and view buttons as hard keys automati
37. get a software update confirm the successful operation on PLEASE CONFIRM After the successful update the console should disappear from the overview Repeat this operation for all consoles Using CHANGE NAME and IP you can change the name and the IP address of a NSP directly on the console The button will only be active if a NSP exists in the overview using SHOW SAME VERSION you can call up all consoles of the session already having the same software version Updating without floppy disks Using the OFFLINE EDITOR you can very quickly update consoles in a network connected with one another and having internet access onthe internet site www malighting de go to SUPPORT SERVICE and download the grandMA OffLine Editor program to your PC start the grandMA OffLine Editor on your PC inthe grandMA OffLine Editor press the SETUP button with UPDATE CONSOLE update the consoles and NSPs see above MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 13 Utility Menu You will need this menu if the main program or the actual show is damaged due to a crash or some other error For the grandMA light and ultra light you MUST have an external keyboard In the Utility M enu you can load or delete an old grandMA operating system You can also delete shows here You can delete the current show this show is automatically loaded upon power up of
38. grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 4 1 2 Store Options Functions available when storing STORE The different settings in this menu have an effect on how Cues but also Presets are stored The settings modified in this menu can be stored as defaults These Pre sets will then be used for storing but can also be adjusted from case to case Press the STORE button and hold it In the right TFT Display the following selection will appear Press the buttons selected button will be backlit in dark grey Store Source Normal Will store all values contained in the Programmer mind the settings under STORE VALUES e Output Will store all values output as displayed in the DM X Sheet i e also the position of the M aster Store Options Save as defaut X Groupmaster will be accounted for Asssignments e g to Presets will be lost as only the output value will be stored not the source es DMX IN DMX Capture With this setting you can store DM X signals coming in via the DM X IN jack e g to store P E a non compatible Show of another console You can also call up individual Cues on other consoles if the SETUP ea Output I in and the patched channels on the grandma are identical and store a new Cue on the grandMA i You can set the DM X IN in the TOOL menu DM X amp NSP configuration Local DM X Input The incoming DM X has to Store Values If not empty be merged with the DM X line on
39. key will update all cues listed in the chart Pressing the Save as default button will save the pre sets as default settings e g Only original contents or Add new contents The next time you open the Update menu these settings will be available LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 4 6 INFO window An information window can be added to every executor Type here information for sequences chasers or effects Additional you can type infomation for every cue in a sequence a chaser or an effect Create Info Window with CREATE A WINDOW and INFO an empty Info Window opens press Select Select Something appears press button or little Executor window of the relevant sequence chaser or effect type Info text close Info Window Create Info for cue press EDIT choose a sequence chaser or effect not Bitmap Effekt press Button INFO type Infotext 4 7 REPORT window Command Line The REPORT function allows you to create a printed overview of sequences An Excel file will contain all fixtures involved with their respective values sorted in amp by Cues You can also create reports for GROUP WORLD and PRESET In these cases the matching fixtures and saved values will also be displayed in tables Open the report from the Command Line enter report_seq_ number or area of the sequence enter r
40. or via network Expansion M ode activated For shows with more than 4 096 displayed in red the NSP is temporarily overloaded This will channels the Expansion M ode will switch on automatically somehow decrease the normal DM X repeat rate of approx 30 Hz This SOFTWARE UPDATE can be disturbing e g with moving lamps or stroboscopes For updating purposes the NSPs must not be set to ARTNET set them to M Anet 202 Update the NSP like the other consoles in SETUP using UPDATE SOFTWARE and UPDATE CONSOLE Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Is Menu Tool Y Current User is edi Network MIDI Show Control gt MA Network gt emote Control n Network gt User Administration F LOGIN F d Change current User Setup User amp Profiles 4 Current User Profile Load User Profile VIDEO from Show gt re gt Save to Global ageso from User Profile Gla User Profile Network Dimmer Processor Configuration NDPs found in Network n MAC Name IP 192 168 0 113 00 02b3 31 0912 00 e0 4b 06 bc 35 dimMA 192 168 0 77 My NDP Network Settings Show Errors Confirm Errors e Rack 1 Crate 1 Module 3 l Dimmer 1 DHX 0007 Vier 2 Viuuiet 3 Vint st Not Present o m
41. press STORE red LED is on Preset 3 press the button of the Preset and confirm with OVERWRITE The black frame around the Preset will vanish and the link to the Embedded Preset will be cancelled Example Activate and save Preset 3 The link to value 1 will be cancelled value 1 will be entered in Preset 4 the black frame in the Preset Pool will vanish If you now change Preset 1 Preset 3 will remain unchanged Copying an Embedded Preset press COPY press on the Preset press on a free button to which the Preset is to be copied Link zu Example value 1 copy press on Preset 2 Preset 3 press on a free button and rename the new preset to Preset 3 Important The link to Preset 1 will be kept in Preset 3 even if you delete Preset 2 after the copying 77 process see graphics on the left grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 ASSIGN HELP ALIGN PREVIEW OOPS DELETE COPY MOVE l as Command Line a Working with Command Line press DELETE pres button Preset Page Group View Executor or select Sequenz type in number on the numeric block e g 1 16 for Executor 16 on Page 1 confirm with ENTER writings in red are not possible if no page number is typed the elements of the current page will be deleted 78 3 8 Deleting Groups Sequences Views etc For all following Deletions the DELETE key has to be pressed in
42. 03 BPI 7 03 BPI 7 03 BPI Presets amp Values Fade Delay Pan Tilt Dyin Gobol Pan Wile Gl G1 Ro q kiah SC300 1 00 2 F SC30 E SC30 Presets Modulator Modulator Wouiator amp Values Table Size Speed Fade Single Single For Active Feature Feature For Active All All For Active Defined Defined For Active in i Jia Feature t L p Values Fades Delays S e e Modulator Size Modulator Speed F Modulator Phase Pan SIN 132 6 8 Modulators INDEX While the modulators that are used for the effects will only influence the whole effect it is now possible for each feature to use a modulator for effects and for the speed size and shifting of effects within the modulators of the Fixture and Channel Sheets The modulators run within the Programmer i e they are not permanent You can only save changes as Cues effects transferred with the TOP button to the modulators will remain unchanged For each attribute of a fixture four modulator settings are available each of them being individual Assigning modulators to a fixture select fixtures here the fixtures 3 5 from the Channel Sheet open FIXTURE or CHANNEL SHEET in OPTIONS press the LAYER CONTROL button it has a violet background and shows which values are displayed in the Sheet in the SPEED graphics of the Channel Sheet and in PHASE in the FI
43. 11 13 p 23 114 02 23 04 16 55 02 23 04 13 30 02 20 04 12 48 02 18 04 16 31 02 18 04 12 12 02 06 04 14 46 02 06 04 09 33 11 Saving and loading a SHOW A unnamed show will always saves as NEW SHOW rename it immediatelley for the next show will saved with this nameand will overwrite the previous show Write protection is noct possible Please make sure to frequently save the current show on harddisk during the programming procedure A good idea is to change the name of your show on a regular basis so that you can go back to previous days programing A back up on floppy disk is always a good idea Automatic save With the AUTOSAVE key you can set an automatic save according to the time displayed on the key Avoid using this during a live Show or in very loud environments When using the AUTOSAVE function a BACKUP of the Show will be made with each saving operation max 10 These backups can be used to restore previously saved Shows You can display these backups using the SHOW BACKUP key press BACKUP press AUTOSAVE until the desired time is set With OFF you switch off Autosave select your Archive Medium hard disk on the console file server external memory to be set using FileServer in Archive M edia When Autosave is active the time to the next saving point will be indicated on the bottom margin Quick save press twice BACKUP the fastest way to save the show select Enumerate set Enumerate t
44. 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH grand MA An expanded track is marked with a in front of it a collapsed track indicated by a Click on this mark to change the expand collapse status of the track The TRACK FUNCTIONS menu contains functions to expand collapse all tracks simultaneously Selecting Tracks Tracks can be SELECTED individually A selected track is displayed in a darker colour Only selected tracks are shown in TEXT display mode For some functions it is important whether a track is selected or not For normal operations however in graphic display mode you do not have to worry about this Click on the track name cell you may have to do this twice because the first click is chooses the current track or press the track encoder within the bar to change the selection status of a track The TRACK FUNCTIONS menu contains functions to select deselect all tracks simultaneously These functions are also available as direct R Reset all tracks to unselected and S Set all tracks to selected keys At the moment selecting tracks does not affect the playback functionality it is only a display and edit function For future versions however we plan to have that as a special playback mode to enable playback output for selected tracks Sorting Tracks Perhaps you have a large number of tracks in your show but currently you are only interested in some of the
45. 360 into the Rotation column ROTATE LEFT will insert 360 into the Rotation column SCROLL LEFT will insert 5 0 5 0 into the OFFSET X column SCROLL RIGHT will insert 5 0 5 0 into the OFFSET X column ZOOM IN will insert the 100 50 into the SCALE X and SCALE Y columns ZOOM OUT will insert the 100 200 into the SCALE X and SCALE Y columns or Enter individual values click on the cell in the respective column and open it by pressing on the Encoder enter values and confirm with ENTER TABLE here you can select the effect FROM TO here you can enter the starting and end points PHASE here you can enter the angle to shift the effect RATE stands for the ratio d set ACT ON depending on the setting and type of BITM AP the buttons below are active bright values can be entered or inactive dark no modifications possible The values allocated to the bitmap are marked by a violet bar over the respective column in the Fixture or Channel Sheet GREY dimmer values are assigned to the graphics element TRIGGER presets are assigned to the graphics element Preset 1 the preset is assigned to the graphics background Preset 2 the preset is assigned to the graphics Background the preset is assigned to the matrix outside the graphics COLOR color values are assigned to the graphics element define the order using the 4 Encoders MASTER here you can set the dimm
46. 82 83 86 Separate M emories 87 SEQU 174 SEQUENCE 53 114 Sequence assigning a 105 Sequence calling a Playback 92 Sequence copying a 90 Sequence deleting a 78 Sequence editing a 93 Sequence executing a 105 Sequence Names changing 105 Sequence programming a 90 Sequence triggering a 47 SEQUENCES 86 SEQUENCES OFF 120 Sequenz sichern 92 SERVICE TIMETABLE 222 Service Work 6 Session 192 SESSION Collision 194 SET 58 setting speed 207 Settings current 107 110 Settings in the Setup M enu 43 SETUP 18 154 Setup M enu Settings in the 43 SETUP Mode im STAGE Fenster 83 Sheet 46 Short cuts 157 Shortcut 157 Shortcuts im Remote PDA 209 Show deleting from harddisk 178 Show Import 43 Show loading from harddisk 178 Show saving on floppy disk 178 Show saving the current on harddisk 177 Show speichern auf Festplatte 19 Shuffle select order 81 Shuffle value 81 shuffle value 81 SIN 123 Single 63 SINGLE DIGIT VALUE ENTRY 45 213 Size 125 Size of EXECUTOR buttons 107 SMART 54 SMART Window 68 SMPTE 140 SNAP 93 99 SNAP DELAY 17 87 SOFT 94 100 SOFT Keyboard 7 14 SOFTNESS 127 Software Crash 6 Software Update 183 185 Software Version 54 SOLO function 74 SOUND 47 100 Sound Signal 95 Sound Signal Setting of a 47 Special functions 223 Special M asters assigning 112 SPEED 94 100 106 127 128 Speed Group 112 128 SPEED INDV 100 SPEED
47. A executor fader The middle button of an executor column The lower button of an executor column The upper button of an executor column A complex light that has more than just a dimmer channel A feature inside a fixture like PAN or IRIS A 1 or 2 dimensional path used by effects A collection of fixtures and channels Can do complex command line operations A Remote triggered by incoming MIDI signals A page is one set of visible executors A memory that can be used indirectly as a placeholder A sequence consists of one or more cues A timecode show consists of many timed playback instructions for executors Can be synchronised with incoming SMPTE or MIDI signals A Remote triggered by hardwired analogue 0 10 V inputs Stores a display arrangement A physical button that can call views and macros PN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Helping keywords Helping keywords are context sensitive and thus have different functions depending on where they are used and what they are used with Keyword Used Everywhere Everywhere AT helping form by COPY M OVE etc DELAY In executing commands AT STORE etc FADE In executing commands AT STORE etc FULL As value 100 IF In selections THRU In ranges UNPRESS After executing keywords Immediate Keywords These keywords expect no additional parameters Keyword Operatio
48. Automatic was not selected the display will not switch over The currently selected function of the FADE or DELAY Command Line will be displayed only for the Encoder labels 3 5 7 Options within the CHANNEL window Now you can modify the IND FADE or IND DELAY time for the selected dimmer channels using the left encoder Individual Fade Delay Time When carrying out modifications different options can be used These options can be necessary when times for Scanners and Dimmers are changed simultaneously Selecting options Above the left decoder a second additional button will be displayed showing the currently selected option By pressing this button you can select the next option available Or Pressing on the right arrow will open a menu in which all options are displayed and can be selected directly Single For Active The time can be adjusted for each individual Function Attribute If Single For Active is chosen only times for activated values can be changed Feature For Active The time can be adjusted for the chosen Feature e g Gobo1 containing e g Gobo1 and Gobo1 Rotation If Feature For Active is chosen only times for activated values can be changed All For Active All times for all Attributes are adjusted If All For Active is chosen only times for activated values can be changed Defined For Active The time can be adjusted for the fixed Attributes Pressing the left arrow
49. Closed Closed Closed Oper Closed Closed Closed Closed Closed Additionally Wings Allows you to split and mirror the whole selection E g When you have a setting of 2 the complete selection of fixtures will be split in the middle The set selection will now be executed in the first half from the first fixture to the middle and in the second half from the last fixture backwards to the middle 3 9 2 Mirroring when Entering Pan Tilt values Mirror Wingstyle When entereing values for PAN TILT these can be mirrored individually or together E g Take 10 Scanners mounted in a row from left to right and select them 1 10 Now set Wings on 2 digits and Mirror Wingstyle on Pan Now when you modify the Pan value the first 5 Scanners move in one direction and the others into the other one 3 9 3 Storing settings The modified settings can be stored individually or together In the MAtricks Setup you ll find a Store button next to each function If a function has been changed this buttons will automatically be activated dark green background By shortly pressing the button you can switch on activated or off deactivated the storing function When storing only the activated functions will be stored To store press the STORE key LED in on Now choose the desired button in the MAtricks pool Directly after storing you can assign a name for the stored setting By ck
50. EXECUTOR moving an 113 EXECUTOR pages 109 EXECUTOR SETTINGS 46 Executor sheet 114 EXECUTOR Window 114 Export Effect 43 Export Effects 43 Export Show ASCII 43 Export show ASCII 43 Extra 33 extra fine 44 F F Fade 94 100 F9 44 FADE 17 B BB 16 54 18 Fade Time individual 63 FADE timesin Profiles 95 FADE times in the CHANNEL window 71 FADE times in the FIXTURE window 63 FADE Basic 87 FADE SNAP 30 FADER 53 169 Fader button assignment 107 Fader changing a 106 Fader Page 118 Fader Pages 54 FADER window colors used for the screen display 224 225 228 FADERS OFF 120 FAQ 218 Feature 28 Figures red 59 70 Filter 124 FIX 116 169 FIXTURE 53 169 FIXTURE accessing directly 59 FIXTURE calling up a 57 lll FIXTURE creating a 18 57 111 FIXTURE editing a 18 Fixture Layer 19 22 FIXTURE odd numbered or even numbered 124 FIXTURE OPTION 65 FIXTURE patching a 18 FIXTURE SCHEDULE 18 FIXTURE selected 63 FIXTURE selecting a 18 Fixture Start Id 19 FIXTURE TYPES 29 FIXTURE window 59 Fixtures Defining DM X Addresses 53 Fixtures Inserting deleting ormoving 24 Fixtures Library Updating 31 FIXTURES TYPES 31 FIXTURES window colors used for the screen displa 224 226 228 Flash 107 FLASH_DOWN 169 Flashdisc 3 Flightcase 5 FLIP 154 Flip Stage 86 Floppy 179 FOLLOW 95 FOLLOW mode 83 FONT SIZE 66 73 114 FORM 130 169 FORWARD 100 FREEZE 9 76
51. Fixture Layer it is not possible to select fixtures from the small Stage window To gain a better control click on the small STAGE window title bar turns dark blue and change the stage view using the Encoder right of the Display turn or turn and press the Encoder in the FIXTURE LAYER select the fixture type inthe FIXTURES AND CHANNELS IN LAYER select one or more fixtures set the positions and targets of the fixtures using the 3 Encoders shift linear on the x y and z axis or rotation around the x y and z axis check out results in the STAGE window The values set will be displayed in the back part of the table Press and simultaneously turn the Encoder right of the Display to change the table view Turn it until the columns for Position X Y Z and Rotation X Y Z are displayed or highlight a value directly press on the right Encoder enter the value using the Calculator confirm with ENTER Shift linear S Gs have no importance select one or more fixtures select the Linear icon select the space axis icon shift the fixtures along the space axes using the Encoder Shift linear tilted S Gs have no importance Only for rotated fixtures if the fixtures were not rotated before this function is equal to the one described above select one or more fixtures select the Linear icon select the Axis icon shift the fixtures along the fixtures axes using the Encoder 21 Hotline 49 525
52. For chaser the editor never predicts GOTOs instead it uses conventional Gos The editor is also assumes that you only want to switch the chase on and then off again regardless of how many steps the chase has 145 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Attention mouse users Please be aware that if you have chosen the ADD mouse tool this tool stays active So wherever you click with the mouse something will be added If you switch on always reset mouse tool in the options menu the risk of accidentally adding something is reduced Selecting Events Events can be SELECTED individually A selected event is displayed in red All selected events together are called the selection You can MOVE DELETE or COPY this selection Selecting with the mouse in graphic mode Choose the SELECT mouse tool The cursor will show a selection frame Left mouse click somewhere in a track keep mouse key pressed and drag a frame Upon release of the mouse key all events inside the frame are selected Selection with the mouse in text mode Left mouse click somewhere in the list keep mouse key pressed and drag vertically a frame Upon release of the mouse key all text lines events inside the frame are selected With the CREATE SELECTION function Press the CREATE SELECTION key the CREATE SELECTION menu appears Choose to either make a selection on the current green track only or on all select
53. From 125 FTP File Transport Protocol access 104 FULL 170 FULLACCESS 215 Full Access 31 Full Tracking 194 Full Tracking Backup 197 Full World 195 Function Pan 24 Function Sets 33 Functions 26 Functions mathematical 131 G GAIN 47 Global User Profile 52 GMA REMOTE 206 GO 170 Go 95 106 Go fast backwards 163 Go fast forward 163 Gobos 33 GOTO 170 GOTO ENTER 157 GPS 48 grandMA 3D 33 grandMA 3d 31 grandM A light 7 13 114 185 grandMA replay unit 186 grandM A ultra light 5 7 49 114 185 grandMA 3D 191 GRANDM ASTER 17 46 65 73 86 GRANDM ASTER FADER 24 Graphic parameters 33 GROUP 170 Group Button creating a automatically 41 Group calling up a 57 Group deleting a 78 Group M aster assigning a 111 Group moving a 58 Group Name changing a 111 Group Overview 111 GROUPS 53 Grp Group 126 H HALF SPEED 100 Hard Disk 3 177 Hard key 157 Hardware 4 HIGHLIGHT 26 170 Highlight 30 46 170 Highlight is SOLO 46 Highlight Normal 46 HIGHLITE 26 History 97 156 HOLD OFF 47 HOTLINE 15 Hz 34 46 DELAY 93 100 IFADE 93 100 ID session number 192 IF 170 IFOUTPUT 171 Illumination 44 Import Effect 43 Import Show 43 Incremental 44 INFO 103 INSERT 171 Installation 4 INTENS 94 100 INTENSITY 127 Inv 30 INVERT 154 171 IP address 39 205 K Keep Activation 74 KEYBOARD GERM AN ENGLISH 46 Keyword 157 Kill 107 Kill Protect 110 L LABEL 171 Lasso Function 117
54. ID number starting point to the left right margin BOTTOM TOP TOP BOTTOM places the ID number starting point to the bottom top margin Horizontal first arranges the fixtures horizontally in an ascending order of their ID numbers Vertical first arranges the fixtures vertically in an ascending order of their ID numbers If a Bitmap effect runs on the same fixture matrix but with differently filled layout this will produce mirrored representations see example on the left Using the default setting will take the stage output as displayed in the Preview window if LEFT and RIGHT are exchanged the stage output will be displayed mirrored You can save both layouts under different names and allocate them to the effect FILL all fixtures taken over into the layout will be placed in it using the selected settings as far as there is enough space available fixtures in excess will be spared in a red square adjacent to the grid or o position each fixture individually in order to do so click mouse or finger on the red square and draw it on a free cell in the grid Press X to leave the SETUP menu leave the LAYOUT VIEW menu using OPTIONS and DELETE WINDOW Use DRAW to switch over to the drawing mode In this menu you can create a graphics in a selected layout by hand or mouse or you can modify already created graphics Besides changing the layout you can also change all values of the fixtures involve
55. Lasso function 12 Layer 42 Layer Control 66 Layer Display 65 LAYER TO DISPLAY 65 72 LEARN 107 171 LI DEL 93 100 Library 18 LN 123 line command 156 LINK 93 99 100 LINK DEFAULT 115 Link Fader Function in the CHANNEL window 72 LIST 7 55 118 Live Access 18 27 LOAD 172 Location Auto 48 Locking the Desk 49 LOOP 93 100 LOOP COUNT 98 LOOP TIM ED 98 LOOPDELAY 93 98 100 LOOPS 98 110 115 Loss of Data 5 LTP Dimmer 109 LTP principle 109 Lumen 30 M MACRO 172 MACRO button 8 Macro creating a 152 MACRO deleting a 78 Macro editinga 153 MACRO inserting a in a Cue 98 MACRO TIMED 153 MACROS 53 113 152 Manufacturer 30 Mask 122 MASTER 106 Master Priorities 193 Master priority 192 MASTER Sequence 91 MASTER START 109 MASTER STOP 109 Mathematical Functions 131 MAtricks 54 79 MAtricks Interleave 79 MAtricks Mirror 80 MAtricks Next Prev 79 MAtricks Wings 80 maximal cue number 165 MIB 31 MIB Fade 30 MIDI Channel selecting the 151 MIDI Control 152 MIDIIN 151 MIDI Input 151 MIDI Note 152 MIDI note 151 MIDI Programm 152 MIDI Remote Control by 151 Midi Show Control 151 Midi Timecode 141 MIDI_BTN 172 MIDIOUT 152 MIRROR 131 Mode 33 Monitor external 44 Motorfader 44 mouse 35 Mouse Button middle 69 74 Mouse Function 44 MOVE 96 154 172 MOVEIN BLACK 93 Moving path 95 MSC Midi Show Control 151 MTC M idi Timecode 14
56. Open edit menu for form INSERT M OVE Change visible number of form FULL Full is an alias for 100 dimmer value open As starting keyword it is immediate opening all dimmers of the current selection FULL After the AT command in value ranges like AT FULL ENTER AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER FULL 2x FULL will transfer the Highlight value into the Programmer GO As starting keyword every object that follows after the GO will try to go forward one step GO target object list FADE X DELAY Y ENTER If fade or delay are given they overwrite the pre programmed times Target type Operation EXEC Go forward one step EFFECT Start running forward TIMECODE Start playing forward PAGE GO on all its executors SPEEDM ASTER GO on all chasers using this speed master executor assigned to a speed master SUBM ASTER Unpark all channels involved in this group CHANNEL FIXTURE GROUP Unpark devices PRESET X Preset Type Unpark all channels of current selection of that preset type GO As starting keyword every object that follows after the GO will try to go backwards one step GO target object list FADE X DELAY Y ENTER If fade or delay are given they overwrite the default GO times The default GO times can be changed in the SETUP DEFAULTS menu Target type Operation EXEC Go backwards one step 170 EFFECT Start running backwards PAGE GO on all its executors SPEEDM ASTER GO on all programs using this spee
57. Reset Presets References you can delete all self created preset references and the presets created from the function sets from library To save self created Presets of a Reference Scanner select the appropriate Scanner in the Fixture Sheet Press the Create Preset Preference button The Presets will now be saved to the Fixture in the USER Library in this Show same name can only be distinguished by its version number If you sign on further Fixtures of this type same version you can load the created Presets with CREATE NEW PRESETS see item 3 To use this Fixture with the self created Presets in other Shows or on other consoles too you have to save this Fixture in the USER Library on disk or floppy 2 5 Updating the Fixture Library USER Library By pressing the Create Dimmer Presets button you can creatPresets in differently adjustable levels for each Dimmer channel The Presets can bei adjusted in 4 levels 5 10 20 or 25 by pressing the button on the right 2 11 2 Creating groups automatically f the Groups button is pressed green background you are in the Auto Create Groups menu In the upper table all Scanner and Dimmers are displayed that are used in the current Show In the lower table all Fixture Layer are displayed that are used in the current Show On the right of each Scanner and Dimmer you ll find the Select column By choosing a cell and pressing the Encoder on the right of the Display these are
58. SOUND signal No Automatically according to set time e g if the set time is 1 5 this Cue will be called up after 1 5 seconds automatically 4 3 3 Changing the FADE or DELAY times of individual steps within the Sequence Select the respective cue red cell Here the duration for this cue can be changed with the In Fade In Delay or Snap encoder Pressing the Basics button above the right Encoder will switch this button to Out Now you can modify this time with the Encoder Out Fade If no FADE or DELAY times are indicated none are stored in this CUE Changing all times of one or more Cues CUE TIME SCALING Changing all times of one or more Cues CUE TIME SCALING With this function you can scale or compress all Fade Delay and Trigger times select one ore more Cues red cell click on the Cue s number using the right mouse button or the Encoder on the side of the monitor der rechten M austaste oder dem Encoder neben dem Monitor Inthe EDIT CUE NUMBER menu select a percentage or absolute change Scale Timing All times of the marked Cue will be changed to the entered value When entering 100 all values remain unchanged Scale Timing sec The total time of the marked Cues will be changed to the entered time all times will change proportionally For the example on the left For the 4 marked Cues 6 seconds were entered DELAY and FADE were increased to 6 seconds in total the trigger time in
59. Session s 194 displayed i e the set priority of the RPU is low i e lower as that of the Master As soon as the connection is established the normal operation of the units can start Differences between Full Tracking Multi User and Playback next page The Session will be kept if not interrupted manually by pulling the EtherNet cable or deactivating the EtherNet converter terminated automatically due to of a detected communication problem terminated due to a hardware problem either on the M aster or on the Slave Master unit You can resolve the complete Session by pressing the Leave Session button on the Master You can also exclude a unit from a Session to do so click on this unit in the right table blue background By pressing the Disconnect Station button it will be excluded Slave unit When pressing the Leave Session button this unit will leave the Session You can also exclude a unit from a Session to do so click on this unit in the right table blue background By pressing the Disconnect Station button it will be excluded 15 4 Full Tracking When a Session is in Full Tracking all data relevant for the Show plus the operations will be executed simultaneously on all units except when currently working with Worlds next page 15 5 Multi User No Pages on other units will be switched over no Selections of Fixtures transferred and no View switchings transferred Using Worls will have a major effe
60. The EDIT PROFILES menu will open Additionally a window will open where you can enter a name for the profile and have to confirm it with Enter To change a profile select it using the Encoder and press the Edit button The EDIT PROFILES menu will open with the selected profile At first when creating a new profile a lineary profile is displayed that can then be modified If an existing profile is selected this will now be displayed The y axis gives the value set on the grandMA whereas the x axis gives the DM X value that will be output By pressing the PERCENT key you can switch the scaling from percent to decimal or when pressing the key once more to hexadecimal Clicking on a desired point in the diagram will bring up cross wires Above the diagram the value of the current position is displayed The value after IN is the set value on the grandM A the one after OUT is the DM X value that will be put out Add Point The profile line will automatically be connected with the new point This way you can set as many points as you wish Delete Point To delete a point select one and press the Delete Point button Toggle Curve will create a wave form PREDEFINED opens a menue with predefined profiles these profiles can altered and stored with a new name MIRROR displays a selection to mirror the profile Using the mouse you can move points M ake a left mouse click on the point draw it to the desired position and let the
61. Then click CD Player visible and switch on the ecoder bar yN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Tools Menu Current User is Administrator a lt lt 8 2 Remote Control via Touchboard On the rear of the grandM A there is a 25 pin SUB D socket DC REM OTE CONTROL to connect a standard Touchboard with up to 16 channels PIN 1 16 Input Channels 1 to 16 tema A twork PIN 21 22 5 Volt max 100 mA Output lone e gt PIN 17 18 und 24425 Earthing Re The Touchboard input sockets only function as switches ail j 0 bis 2 Volt off A ae 5 to 15 Volt On Touchboa aL 2 1Assigning Playback keys Remote Touctbaard Configuration press TOOLS press TOUCHBOARD REM OTE STORE te to ie te te ow ow The menu REM OTE TOUCHBOARD CONFIGURATION displays the commands Empty means that there is no ue Ge Ga Ba to m command assingned to this button wy Ta ae i Ta ar T T Press the STORE key once LED is on Press a key on the Touchboard where a Playback key is to be assigned to once Se ee ee ee A Select a key in the REM OTE CONFIGURATION menu Press the Playback button that you want to assign The selected button will now be assigned Remote Off Touchboard in the TOOLS menu you can switch the Touchboard function on or off using the ON OFF key DELETE Deletin
62. a blue background in the Channel Sheet These modifications can also be defined while patching Dimmer channels 2 2 2 Selecting DM X addresses for Dimmers With the lt lt lt key you can switch to the previous Dimmer channel With the gt gt gt key you can switch to the next Dimmer channel With the X key you can close the window 73 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 etait eer mmm Pictures of the gobos are displayed only if they are stored in library Preset Options STORE PRESET OPTIONS Button KEEP CLEAR ACTIVATION button Will keep or delete the Fixture activation after saving Presets F 1 Pan Tilt 74 sd 3 6 SOLO function The SOLO function is so to say the counterpart of the Highlight function SOLO will bring all dimmers not selected to a vlaue of 0 l e sequences effects etc will still run but are no longer visible This does not apply to Fixtures that had activated the NO MASTER function in SETUP FIXTURE PATCH and whose dimmer values will not be modified The SOLO function can be activated as Quikey see 9 2 or by using the HIGHLIGHT hardkey In SETUP DEFAULTS set the Button to HIGHLIGHT IS SOLO The Hardkey will then have the SOLO function LED is on or no function at all LED is off The HIGHLIGHT Quikey will then also behave like the HIGHLIGHT hardkey If the Button is on HIGHLIGHT NORMAL the Highlight Hardkey will execu
63. advance LED is on Deleting Groups Select the respective Group by touch or left mouse click or Press the GROUP key Enter a Group number using the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER Deleting Presets Select Preset in the respective window by touch or left mouse click or Press the PRESET key Enter a Preset Function number e g 3 for Gobo followed by and the Preset number confirm with ENTER Deleting VIEW Assignments Select a VIEW with the VIEW key on the side of the numeric keypad via the Touchscreen or a left mouse click Deleting a VIEW Press the VIEW key LED is on The SELECT VIEW window appears now select the window to be deleted The VIEW Name will be maintained but without any contents All assignments to VIEW keys are now deleted Deleting a MACRO Press the MACRO key LED is on The SELECT MACRO window appears now select the macro to be deleted The MACRO Name will be maintained but witout any contents All assignments to MACRO keys are now deleted Deleting an EXECUTOR Press the desired EXECUTOR key or Deleting the EXECUTOR on the current page Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad LED is on Enter the EXECUTOR number via the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER Deleting the EXECUTOR on another page Press the EXECUTOR button next to the numeric keypad LED is on Now enter the PAGE number Then press the full stop key and the number of the EXECUTOR and confirm with ENTER Example
64. after switching pages If the faders are not located at the actual value the respective LEDs within the buttons will flash until the value has been reached by moving the fader Channel faders are not available Executor Fader Button Three Executor Buttons are available for each Executor Fader as on the grandMA These 15 Executor Fader But tons correspond with the Fader Buttons no 1 to 5 on the grandM A Fader Button no 6 to 20 Fader Button no 6 to 10 on the grandMA light are not available This becomes particularly important when programming the show on the grandMA and running the show afterwards on the Replay Unit LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Mode Key Has no function yet This key is being reserved for possible special functions in the future Reset Key a This key stands for a hard reset This key is only required in the unlikley event of the console freezing or O Mie e O crashing The same key is located once again on the rear panel 1 10 1 Basics i aE E Executor Buttons There are 5 Executor Buttons no 6 to 10 available as on the grandM A These buttons correspond with the I 3 H Executor Buttons no 21 to 25 on the grandM A Buttons no 26 to 40 no 16 to 20 on the grandMA light are not aH p a Hm mlS available This becomes particularly important when programming the show on the grandM A and runni
65. all Fixtures to be used in the show and all users with all settings for this show Thus you can transfer the whole show to another grandM A console or for archive storage The current Show will be saved including its name press BACKUP press Floppy DISK Format the floppy disk LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de a Backup Menu Floppy Disk LOAD Show Display Show Info Partial Show Read SAVE Show SAVE Show As EF Coment gt FORMAT Disk end Content gt Initialise gt Floppy Disk Demo Shows read only p Backup Manu I loppy Disk LOAD Show SAVE Show FORMAT Disk QUFRTIAN A Floppy arene r ra ia rania LA niana Mew Hars H jat ahould Wy Mcroc 2 Siow Caner nemes peno Backup Menu LOAD Show gt Partial Show Read Pa Merge Content Append Content p Initialise gt press FORMAT to make sure that the show will be saved safely Saving a show press Save Show confirm with OK or cancel the operation with Cancel press Save Show enter anew name for the show and confirm with ENTER insert an empty IBM PC formatted 3 5 floppy disk remove the write protection small opening on the floppy must be closed confirm with OK The SHOW will be saved after the wi
66. all active applications will restart after a reboot After switching on the UltraLight will possibly try to access the BIOS and not boot correctly In general it is advisable to let the console switched on and have the show run via the AGENDA menu In the Command line you can patch fixtures or change the patch number without disturbing the show Same applies to the DM X sheet when using the mouse In the sequence start the cue in the LINK column with gt GOTO x cue no EXECUTOR x xx Executor no All shows will run on all grandMA consoles only exception with the Micro the show may only have 1 024 channels when loading a bigger show the channels in excess have to be deleted as the performance would not be able to handle it and only 2 DMX universes could be output In a session only the M aster should have AUTOBACKUP Slaves with AUTOBACHUP will cause problems with the performance If the ENUM ERATE button is on ON in the BACKUP menu under QUICK SAVE every saving procedure saves a new copy of the show with AUTO SAVE this happens automatically In this way several 100 versions of the show can quickly burden the hard disk Delete superfluous show versions and set the button to ENUM ERATE OFF Store backup copies on floppy disc This may mean that free memory is less than 50 Delete shows or backups to create free memory space Networking in the UltraLight does not work any more when more than 50 of memory is alread
67. as basic setting Preset and Values The FIXTURE window will show presets or values if no presets are used Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Fades FADE times will be displayed Delays DELAY times will be displayed Sat Direction NIBepiay Modulator Table Size Speed Phase All modulators are shown Layer Values Only Only values without presets will be displayed but no effects and profiles Fixture Sheet Options Output The DM X output values will be displayed but without taking any profiles into account Executor ID The Executor s number and page will be displayed Cue ID The sequence s number and the respective Cue will be displayed St Automatic If this key is pressed the display will automatically toggle between the different options when l Display toggling with the TIM E key Layer Control If On is chosen a control bar appears below the Scanners By pressing on the individual buttons on the control bar the display in the window will be switched accordingly Preset Control If On is chosen a control bar appears below the Scanners For each function there is a separa te button By pressing on the individual buttons on the control bar the appropriate function will be activated and m can be modified using the Encoders f Display In the right upper corner of each button you ll find a small square If this square has a black bac
68. based on complex software and as you probably know from your own computer experience software crashes can occur on occasion But be assured that we will do our best to keep them rare exceptions CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN ATTENTION 12 Do not place any objects on the power cord Protect it from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs and the point where they exit from the apparatus RISQUE DE CHOC LECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR 13 If using an extension cord make sure the rated output of all units connected in aggregate does not exceed the maximum rated output of the extension cord The rated output of the units plugged into the socket should in aggregate not exceed 10 amperes opening and or removing coverings besides others you run the risk of suffering an electric shock MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH 1 7 1 Layout and Controls grandMA light grandMA ultra light Items 7 and 17 do not apply keys inexistent Item 22 Wheel does not apply can be controlled by Trackball item 25 and Wheel key item 24 T Power switch 16 List keys 2 Blackout key for Dimmer channels Faders will bring up small Executor windows for the EXECUTOR 3 Grand Master for Dimmer channels FADERS 2 4 TFT Display touch screen Buttons will bring up small Executor 5 View Macro keys windows for the EXECUTOR
69. be deleted If you switch on always reset mouse tool in the options menu the risk of 146 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de accidentally deleting something is reduced Moving Events Graphically with the mouse Choose the M OVE mouse tool The cursor will show a hand with a little arrow The corner of the arrow is the hot spot of the cursor Left click INSIDE the selection or on an event and keep mouse key pressed Drag the mouse horizontally The selection current event will follow With encoder within the bar Make a selection or select the current event Turn the MOVE encoder furthest to the right For every click of the encoder you will move the selection current event by one frame If you press and turn the encoder for every click you will move one second If you press it without turning you can enter a new start time for your selection current event This input can be a relative movement if you use signs 1 5 will move your selection 1 5 seconds backwards in time In text mode Edit the Time column by right clicking with the mouse or press the XY encoder The movement will be relative if you use the signs otherwise it will be absolute Editing an Event You can only edit an already existing event see Adding Events Editing an event means to change its data If you want to change its t
70. between the Pages the stored values will be called up but the Faders will not follow To change a stored value you have to use the Fader to manually set it to a higher or lower value Channel Faders Faders do not adjust automatically to the called up values of the assigned channels To change a stored value you have to use the Fader to manually set it to a higher or lower value DISABLED Faders without function Executor Faders When switching between the Pages the stored values will be called up but the Faders will not follow Channel Faders Faders do not adjust automatically to the called up values of the assigned channels After switching from MANUAL to AUTO you have to change the PageNo once so that the motor fader work again The wheel s functions for the dimmers Additiv All dimmer values will be changed simultaneously If they reach O or FF they will be aligned Incremental All dimmer values will be changed simultaneously If they reach O or FF the respective intervals will be maintained Prop All dimmer values will be changed in percentages and will reach O simultaneously Prop All dimmer values will be changed in percentages and will reach FF simultaneously Please note that with PROP a change of the value 0 is not considered a change Please note that with PROP a change of the value FF is not considered a change Switch between Light and
71. button go The modifications made will be saved to this profile directly The table will show all existing profiles that can also be accessed and modified directly To create an additional profile press the Add Profile button name it and repeat the steps above To delete a profile in the table select it and press the Delete Profile button Deleting a profile is only possible when the profile is already deleted from the fixture in Full Access Fixture Types Profiles Pressing the X button will save the ot and you leave the menu 8 2 Embedding self created Gobos2 8 2 Embedding self created Gobos 35 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 When using self created Gobos these graphics can be collected in a Gobo library the Visualizer will however show the real Gobos In stage view on the console the light is indicated in a very simplified form i e as a color line and the Gobos do not appear Saving a self created Bitmap graphics create a graphics and save it as a BMP file to a floppy FULLACCESS FIXTURE TYPES activate the FIXTURETYPE menu dark blue title bar and the line of the fixture type activate the CHANNELS of FIXTURETYPE menu dark blue title bar waar use the Encoder to jump to the attribute cell GOBO FUNCTION SETS the FUNCTION SETS menu of the respective fixture type Gobo 1 or Gobo 2 will appear inthe empty bottom line enter a name
72. cells are dimmer values Display can be adjusted over an option Sequence name in title bar green Figures are Fader times press TIME 1x Sequence name in title bar orange Figures are Fader times press TIME 2x Colors used for the screen display in EFFECT POOL Fffects Di Color or symbol Pinkbutton Effect groupwithassignedscanners7dimmers SSS TT Redbutton Effectgroupwithoutassignedscanners dimmers SSS nnna Green bN Se ue button in the menu Temporary Effect group will be deleted after switch off if not saved before Circufatngwhitedot theeffectisunninn Seea flashing greendot EDI menuisstiton S Colors used for the CONTENT COMPACT CONTENT SHEET color or icons entical WI e Iracking onee Colors used for the screen display in SMART Window PanTilt Color or symbol Buttonyellow Ihe Channel Value button can only be used for some of the Selected fixtures Button green SIhe Channel value button can be used forall selectedfixtures Red square he Feature or Attribute has been activated and the values have been entered in the 228 Fixture or Fader Sheet MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH Symbole lt lt lt 107 11 10 Loading a Show from an external Hard Disk 180 11 10 PARTIAL SHOW READ loading parts of a Show 181 11 11 Deleting a Show from an external Hard Disk 180 11 7 Loading a Show
73. comment using the keyboard First If an event is displayed with black background in the sheet this Event will be repeated on the current day This cell shows the date on which the Event was first executed Last Here you can enter that last date that the Event will be executed If an event is displayed with black background in the sheet this event will be repeated on the current day This cell shows the date on which the event was last executed Agenda Options Touch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar Or With a right click using the mouse on the title bar you can open the Agenda Options window The table will show all created events By clicking with the mouse or the encoder you can select and edit Peris events grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 10 Command line 10 1 Introduction The following chapter describes the functionality of the grandMA family of consoles that can be achieved using the command line Command line operation means using physical keys or the keyboard as opposed to using the mouse or touchscreen s 10 1 2 Quikeys On some grandMA consoles particularly the grandM A replay unit you may not find all of the described hard keys In spite of this small disadvantage you can create a QUIKEY pool window on the screen and arrange the missing functions there Then simply use these soft keys instead of the hard keys 10 1 3 Double function
74. for the Gobo the line will be numbered automatically enter a range environment in which the Gobo should completely be visible depends on the fixture type Visualize using the Encoder choose the Visulize Effect fro the menu in this case Gobo 1 or Gobo 2 mes position the frame in the EXTRA column using the Encoder the CHANGE GOBO menu will appear Eie use the arrow to open the folder overview SELFCREATI use the Encoder to choose and open the folder in which you want to save the bitmap Make Folder COPy the bitmap into the folder by using IMPORT IMAGE FROM DISK on Disk Or nena create a new folder using MAKE FOLDER ON DISK enter a name and confirm from Floppy copy the bitmap into the folder by using IMPORT IMAGE FROM DISK AMA Ginn PULA Teles Partynactiqht Miu Hn Rex Wudi ACL PCREATT inserting an already saved Gobo in a fixture When Gobos were exchanged within a fixture you have to do the same for the equipment in the library so that the 3D Visualizer can give a real representation of the Show z open the FUNCTION SETS menu of the respective fixture type Gobo 1 or Gobo 2 see above _ Delete use the Encoder to go to the EXTRA cell and open the CHANGE GOBO menu a mn use the arrow to open the menus of different manufacturers on Dick per choose a manufacturer and a Gobo and confirm using the Encoder the chosen Go
75. from Floppy disk 179 11 8 Loading a Demo Show 179 11 9 Saving the Current Show to an external Hard D 180 16 5 Channel extension with the NSP NETWORK SIGNAL 202 2 Port 204 2 Port Nodes configuration 204 2xGOTO ENTER 157 3D stage display 20 5 1 7 Assigning effects 112 5 1 8 Assigning BITM AP EFFECTS 113 6 8 Modulators INDEX 132 7 BITMAP Effects 134 7 1 Creating a Layout fora BITM Ap Effect 134 7 3 Starting the Effect 139 A ACTION 94 100 Activating 16 Active 63 Active Values 66 87 88 Add Point 35 Additiv 44 ADMIN 50 After Roll 142 ALIGN 12 125 126 ALIGN Function 61 ALIGN OFF 154 ALL 17 87 88 154 163 All for Selected Devices 87 88 ALL FULL 111 ALL OFF 130 ALLSCREENS 56 ALLOW EMBEDDED 75 ALWAYS 127 ANGLE 131 ARC 131 ARRANGEIN CIRCLE 85 ARROW 131 Artistic Licence 39 ARTNET 37 AS Adaptive Speed 127 ASCII 43 Ascii 43 ASCII Format 43 ASSIGN 17 154 164 Assign Fader Button 107 ASSIGN menu 17 105 ASSIGN TIME 164 Assignments deleting 150 151 AT 164 Attribut 30 ATTRIBUTE GROUPING 27 ATTRIBUTE MASK 61 ATTRIBUTE SETUP 27 Attribute Setup 27 ATTRIBUTE SORT 61 Attributes 28 AUTO 66 Auto Create 41 Auto Create Effects 43 AUTO FIX 109 AUTO GAIN 48 AUTO LOOP 100 Auto PrePos 110 AUTO SCROLL 115 117 AUTO SCROLL button 94 AUTO STOP 47 AUTO SORT Function 72 AUTO SORT Funktion im FIXTURE Fenster 65 AUTO WRAP 73 AUTOBACKUP in a session 221 Autosave 45 Bac
76. functions e g GOBO so called Channel Values can be created These will then be displayed in the Fixture Sheet You can switch to the menu by using the Function Sets button 2 7 Function Sets You can leave this menu by using the X button You could now use the created fixture in this Show The settings will only take effect and be saved after leaving the Full Access menu and pressing the SAVE button Momentarily the created fixture can only be used for this Show If you want to have this fixture available in the general Library on harddisk or floppy too you have to UPDATE them save to disk or floppy 2 5 Updating the Scanner Library USER Library Delete self created fixtures Inthe Tools menu you can delete permanent self created or varied fixtures from the library You can not delete fixtures from factory desk library Inthe menu Tools press the button Manage Fixture Library Select the fixture and press Delete Entry With the filters you can display fixtures of the desired manufacturer or names With Harddisk Floppy choose store medium mostly its Harddisk Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de MAC 2000 WASH 21CH Function Sets of Channel DIM KK No Name Range Visualize Range Extra Mode Range Closed 0 0 Dimmer pma Always 2 Open 255 255 Dimmer Always New MAC 2000 WASH 21CH Function Sets of Channel
77. functions will only contain and explain a few of the many options Proceed as follows In order to reate groups open the MAtricks SETUP choose function and value STORE button lights green press STORE LED lightsred press empty button in MAtrickspool and insert name In order to apply groups select lamps the order of selection is the same order the Next Prev buttons are working press button in MATricksPool press NEXT PREV to select lamps and set values In the Matrix pool press the SETUP button The M Atricks Settings menu will open Next Prev M ove individual or several selected fixtures within the whole selection E g select fixtures When pressing the Next Prev lt or gt key for the first time the first last fixture remains selected When pressing the key once more the next will be selected and so forth This function can also be operated by using the NEXT PREV keys Groups Here you can define the number of fixtures that are to be moved simultaneously within the selection E g Press the Groups gt key until a 3 appears Now each time you press the Next key the next 3 fixtures of the whole selection will always be selected Interleave To divide the whole selection into groups e g If you select a 3 under Interleave the next 6 fixtures 3 groups of 3 fixtures each will be skipped when pressing the Next key To select the skipped fi
78. has only the function of a switch that will release at approx 10 8 3 1 Assigning Playback Keys Press the TOOLS key once Call up the DM X IN REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu using the REM OTE key Press the STORE key once LED is on Select a key in the DM X IN REM OTE CONFIGURATION menu Press the Playback button that you want to assign The selected button will now be assigned or Enter the Executor Fader to be assigned using the Command Line e g Executor Executor 1 5 means Exe Fa der 5 on Page 1 and confirm with Enter The assigned Playback buttons Fader will be displayed on the individual keys Only EXECUTOR buttons and faders can be assigned to the respective DM X channel 8 3 2 Assigning DMX Channels Make a right mouse click on the key A menu will open in which you can assign one of the 512 DMX channels to this key Identical DM X channels can be assigned to more than one key By pressing the PAGE 1 key you can open another page PAGE 2 with keys 8 3 3 Deleting Assignments To delete an assigned Playback key press the DELETE key once LED is on Press the respective DM X IN key once 8 3 4 Using the DMX Input In the TOOLS menu you can switch the DM X input function on or off using the ON OFF key If the DM X input is activated you can use the assigned keys by switching on the respective DM X input For clarity when looking at this window the keys in the DM X IN REM OTE CONFIGURATION menu will
79. having no delay time at all CUE 1 AT FULL ENTER This will set the dimmer of all devices contained in CUE 1 of the default executor to 100 164 AT TYPE 2 Copying values with filtering destination objects AT set AT filtering source objects ENTER Destination objects Same as above Source objects A list of objects that can supply values Usable keywords are CHANNEL FIXTURE GROUP SEQU CUE PRESET Set AT filtering Keep AT pressed After half a second the AT filter menu will appear Change the filtering while you keep AT pressed If the source objects are CHANNEL FIXTURE or GROUP the operation will be a FILTERED COPY INSIDE THE PROGRAMMER All values except default values will be copied if they pass the filter Examples FIXTURE 2 THRU 10 AT select CMY colour mixing FIXTURE 1 ENTER This command will copy the CMY colour of fixture 1 to fixtures 2 THRU 10 You can copy patterns Set fixture 1 to BLUE and fixture 2 to GREEN FIXTURE 3 THRU 10 AT select colour FIXTURE 1 THRU 2 ENTER Fixture 3 will be BLUE 4 is GREEN 5 is BLUE 6 is GREEN Source and destination devices can overlap FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 AT select all features FIXTURE 2 THRU 10 1 ENTER This will perform a circular copy shifting the values from device to device If the source objects are SEQU CUE or PRESET the operation will bea FILTERED EXTRACTION TO THE PROGRAM MER All values that exist in the source for the destination devices will be copied if t
80. height 6 depth 26 1200 x 150 x 670 mm Weight 104 Ib 47 kg without flightcase grandMA light Width 29 height 5 depth 20 730 x 120 x 510 mm 1 4 Weight 46 Ib 21 kg without flightcase grandMA ultra light Width 29 Height 5 Depth 20 635 x 157 x 490mm Weight 28 Ib 12 8 kg without flightcase grandMA replay unit see 14 Layout and Controls grandMA replay unit grandMA MICRO Width 482mm height 146mm depth 438mm Weight 9 0 kg without flightcase Installation 90 230 Volt 40 60 Hz via Euro plug No switching of voltage necessary DMX output Complies with USITT DMX 512 1990 protocol The output is opto insulated and exceeding RS 485 or RS 422 The pins in the 5 pin XLR plug are Pin 1 ground Pin 2 Data Pin 3 Data pins 4 and 5 not used MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 1 5 Safety Requirements Important read carefully 1 5 1 Touchscreen Never use any sharp items when operating the touchscreens Deep scratches will damage the screen During operation due to temperature fluctuations the calibration of the touchscreens may change so an adjustment may be necessary see 2 12 Settings in the Setup M enu point 1 1 5 2 Sockets for keyboard and mouse These sockets are located on the rear of the unit and are very delicate especially during transport take care that these par
81. in when playing back Cues using the EXECUTOR buttons Press the key above the Fader once red LED is on Set the desired fade time using the Fader When selecting the Sequence using the EXECUTOR buttons only the fade time set here will be used this also applies to SNAPDELAY times Press the key above the Fader again green LED is on Select the sequence using the EXECUTOR button Using the Fader you can now fade in the selected sequence Default setting for the Fader can be changed to fade just upwards or in both directions 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu below the Executor Defaults Crossfade With the PREVIEW function Cues can be displayed in the FIXTURE SHEET or CHANNEL SHEET without being output to stage Press the PREVIEW key once and playback the desired Cue using the EXECUTOR button 4 2 6 Saving a sequence To protect a sequence or Cues of a sequence against unintended modifications you can lock them Playback is possible the Edit mode cannot be activated however OntheCommandLine enter lock_seq_ number or area of the sequences lock_seq_ number of the sequence cue number or area of the Cue In the sequence pool the locked sequences are identifiable by their yellow key symbol in the Assign menu all values are displayed in red If only some part individual Cues of the sequence are saved this will not be displayed in the sequence pool If you want to re edit the sequence OntheCommandLine enter unlock_seq_ number of the
82. jumps to the last cue again 121 rd MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Show Tracking Auto Sort Contant 2 Cue Dimmer Manual showin ii Dim 1 Open 2 Dim2 Open Open Dim 3 Dim 4 Open Included Excluded Display Name Name Layer Pan y z Tilt _ Sorting amp Settings Mas Last Show Cue Readout Eea MAN SCROLL Is activated when the backgroung is dark The buttons NEXT and LAST CUE disappear Select the required sequence with the encoder Click on the title bar gets a light grey background when activated Select the cue with the encoder The title bar showst MANUAL showing x Cue For scrolling within the sheet if not all rows and columns are visible click on the sheet the title bar has now dark backgroung again Turn the pressed encoder for horizontal movement and turn the encoder for vertical movement The colored frame shows the actuell position SHOW SKIP TRACKING SHOW TRACKING shows tracked values SKIP TRACKING doesn t show tracked values Mask only in COM PACT CONTENT When MASK is activated button has dark blue background all attributes in the Excluded column in Options Attribute M ask will disappear from the display CONTENT SHEET OPTIONS Configurating the layout in the display The Content Sheet can personalized and stored in Users profile Press EDIT and the yellow bar in
83. key 2 Enter OFFkey PAGE key 3 TIME key 2 Enter Fixtures or Groups can be released knocked out from direct access e g OFF key FIXTURE key 3 Enter OFF key GROUP key 3 Enter For quick switch off Keep OFF button pressed then press GO switches off everything compare with EVERTHING OFF EXECUTOR all executors are switched off EFFECT all running effects are switched off MACRO all running macros are switched off 120 MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING 7 Auto Cue Tracking Sort Scroll 2 Cue Dimmer Type No Page Name Typ a Seg T Fader 14 1 Seq 2 Fader 16 1 Seq 1 Select Segence Last Show Auto Link Auta Cue Tracking Sort Last Gos Scroll Dimmer 5 7 CONTENT menu and COMPRESSED CONTENT These sheet i sa special version of the Tracking Sheet Not only the values for the running cue ca be displayed but also the values for the next or the previous The colors of the values are the same as in the Tracking Sheet see COLOR CODE in the appendix of this manual The COM PRESSED CONTENT menu offers the same contents but is structured more compactly up to 19 columns and gives the practiced user a more extensive overview Open the sheet Click a blank screen Select CONTENT or COMPRESSED CONTENT in the overview
84. key you can designate a SPEED Group Using the Fader of the assigned SPEED Group you can now adjust the speed for this Effect Group 5 1 6 Assigning Special Masters If INDIVIDUAL is selected default setting you can adjust the speed only by using the SPEED encoder Bounce If this key is pressed dark background the whole Effect Group will first run forwards and then backwards etc BPM If this key is pressed dark background the speed of the whole Effect Group will be controlled by the automatic measure recognition 2 14 Setting Sound signals Start Speed Pressing this key once will store the currently set speed The key will display the stored speed From now on this Effect Group will be started with this speed even if the speed was changed during the execution To delete the stored speed use the Encoder to set the SPEED to STOP and press the START SPEED key once Now no speed is stored and the key will display NONE Off On Overwritten This Effect Group will be switched off when the OFF ON OVERWRITTEN key is pressed dark background and another Effect Group is started in which the same Fixtures Dimmers are to be used default setting If this function is disabled the Effect Group will not be switched off It is still active but does affect any Fix ture Dimmer The key of this Effect Group in the Effect Pool will display a white red flashing 2 The number indicates at what position this Group will be in relation to th
85. keyword is GROUP Then you are typing in DELETE 1 ENTER Asa result GROUP 1 will be deleted An exception to this are the keywords CHANNEL and FIXTURE If they are the default keywords operational keywords will use CUE as the default keyword If CHANNEL is the default keyword STORE 5 ENTER will do STORE CUE5 162 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH 10 3 2 Ranges and Range Lists Many commands are able to operate on a list of objects Instead of typing DELETE SEQU 1 ENTER DELETE SEQU 2 ENTER DELETE SEQU 10 ENTER you can write DELETE SEQU 1 THRU 2 10 ENTER A range can have the following formats X only object X X THRU Y from object X to object Y X THRU from object X to the last object very dangerous THRU Y from the first object to object Y very dangerous THRU all objects very dangerous Please note that ranges have a direction This is particularly important when creating selection FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 is very different than FIXTURE 10 THRU 1 Ranges can be combined to Range Lists OBJ ECT_ KEYWORD Rangel OB ECT_ KEYWORD Rangez It is not necessary to repeat the OBJ ECT KEYWORD in the range list 10 3 3 Detailed keyword list Plus As starting keyword enlarges the current selection Everything that follows after the plus will be interpreted as a selection CHANNEL FIXTURE GROUP SEQU CUE EXEC PRESET E
86. left mouse key you can select values or times durations also by using the lasso function Values and times durations can be modified using the middle mouse key If you click and drag with the left mouse key Clenr and then click with the middle button on the selected values a window will open where you can enter values Betas directly To modify presets must make a middle mouse click on the preset A window will open where you can enter values or load other presets direclty This is one of the few menus where using the mouse is the only method that makes sense Vard The following window will open if you make a right mouse click on a selected value Use this window in the following manor 1 Select one or more cells in the Tracking Sheet 2 Choose the DELETE CUE ONLY UNBLOCK or BLOCK command 3 Execute the command by choosing the source Selection All Channels of Selected Cues Complete or Selected Channels for All Cues DELETE Will remove all values CUE ONLY Will copy the values of the previous step into the following step that step must be empty BLOCK With BLOCK tracking values magenta can be converted into stored values Theses values will be displayed in red UNBLOCK Converts blocked stored values to tracking values magenta REMOVE MODULATORS Deletes the modulators in the selected sequences 117 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 CHANNEL EX
87. malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING grand MA 5 5 4 Edit PAGE Name Press the EDIT key once Select the PAGE key on the display The EDIT NAME window will open Enter a name using the keyboard and confirm with ENTER 5 5 5 Copying moving and deleting Pages Copy or move a Page containing the Executor faders or buttons Press the COPY key once to copy Pages LED is on Or Press the MOVE key once to move Pages LED is on Press the PAGE key once LED is on 2 for Executor fader or 3 for Executor buttons enter via numeric keypad Press the dot key and then enter the page number Press the AT key LED is on enter the number of the target Page and confirm with ENTER Copy or move complete Pages with Executor Faders and buttons Press the COPY key once to copy Pages LED is on Or Press the MOVE key once to move Pages LED is on Press the PAGE key once LED is on Enter the page number Press the AT key LED is on enter the number of the target Page and confirm with ENTER Delete Pages with Executor faders or buttons Press the DELETE key once to delete Pages LED is on Press the PAGE key once LED is on 2 for Executor fader or 3 for Executor buttons enter via numeric keypad Press the dot key and then the page number confirm with ENTER A window will open here confirm the deleting operation with the DELETE key Deleting Pages with Executor fade
88. master if the yellow bar is on yero only the black background can be seen Colors used for the SEQUENCE POOL Yellow Key Ssymbo Sequence is Ocked and cannot be edited merme egies Selected al Number top left Displays how often this sequence is assigned this means for example sequence 1 is assigned to 3 executor fader or executor buttons 226 T When the letter Tis displayed these sequence is in Tracking M ode MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Lie Colors used for the screen display in the Worlds Sheet Color or symbol red triangle in the upper left corner This world does not contain all attributes of the World button of the fixtures co LOR co DE a ee Plon being used by another Colors used for the screen display in PRESET POOL Redtriange mhepresetcanolnybeusedtorthosefixtures twas n a created and saved for D T ext very fain e preset was deleted in and cannot be applied any more Pan Til E T Gobo Color Bluefame Presetisselectted 1 1 3 Open 4 Geena ooo mee presets CaN be applied to the selected ixtures thenhigner f 2i 3 figure shows the number of fixtures on which the preset is applied to e vt omen Gobo1 1 sae Gobo1 th small figure is the button number ellow area ese presets can be applied to the selected fixtures the higher figure shows the nu
89. menu EFFECTS Displaying and Calling up Effects 6 Effects FORMS In this POOL all created forms will be displayed Here you can rename copy or delete forms 6 7 Creating and Storing Virtual Forms EDIT FORM S 53 MACROS In this Pool all the created M acros are displayed It is also possible to store new macros and edit Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 At the bottom of Desk Status M enu the NETWORK MASTER shows all stations in the network Numbers show the stations in this session numbers in show the stations in this session prior to a change failure the buttons are always red or yellow Colors Green OK number of stations within the session is displayed Yellow a new station has joined the session After confirming touch on this button this button changes into green color OK Red Failure After confirming touch on this button this button changes into green color OK or this button changes into grey color and displays 0 no station of this type is in this session or this button stays red the station is still misssing 54 existing ones from within this window 9 Macros and QUIKEY VIEWS Displaying and Calling up Views 3 2 2 View Pool QUIKEY Displaying and creating soft versions of existing console keys and commands 9 Macros and QUIKEY TIMECODE Recording Playing back Editing and Storing SM PTE LTC Timecode controlled operations 8 Timecode
90. menu 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu By pressing this key you will enter the DATE and TIME menu 2 15 DATE and TIME By pressing this key you can change the display language Change dimensions Meter Decimeter Millimeter Feet Inch Switch On OFF the OOPS function To switch the screen saver off an on By pressing the key briefly a window will appear where you can select the ime after which the screen saver will activate By pressing this key you will reach the UPDATE SOFTWARE menu The operating system the operating software as well as the console software and the fixtures can be updated from this menu 12 Software Update Close menu with X 2 12 1 OOPS Function Options If the OOPS function is activated the will be able undo commands or values that you set This function requires a large amount of system resources This requires a lot of processor power what could slow down the console performance This could interfere the execution of programs that is why you can switch it of completely or for in dividual functions 1 9 OOPS function General Enabled If this key is set to Enabled all OOPS functions are available except for VIEWS commands and entries in the PROGRAM M ER both of which can be switched off separately for further information see below General Disabled Pressing the Enabled key next to General will toggle it over to Disabled and all OOPS functions will be switched off Oops for Views If t
91. not already activated Out Sets the Dimmer channels in the current cue to 0 of their programmed value Starts the sequence if not already activated Toggle To switch on and off the Sequence or Chaser Fix Will fix sequence or chaser on this executor even when switching PAGES here this will be displayed by an orange background in the small EXECUTOR window Load Pressing the button on the right TFT display will open a chart for this sequence where you can select and directly load the next cue to be played back in the sequence LOAD CUE Start the cue using the GO button Select M akes this executor the Selected Sequence Swop As long as the button is pushed all other dimmer channels are faded out except with executors where Swop Protected has been activated Kill Has the same function as GO but will switch off all running Executors With the Size of Executor buttons 1 5 you can define how many faders and buttons are available for controlling your sequence on EXECUTOR FADERS and whether one to five buttons could be used for EXECUTOR BUTTONS The respective titles will be displayed on the TFT display above the EXECUTOR FADERS When the LIST function is active the function of the EXECUTOR buttons will be displayed above these buttons press LIST key Default Button and Fader Assignment Pressing the Save as default key will store the current settings as default settings in the Default Button Fa der menu Fo
92. not selected but grey blue green yellow last fade on master starting value sequence has not changed the value Dimmer not selected not selected but grey green yellow last fade on master starting value 0 sequence has reduced the value DOWN Dimmer not selected not selected but grey magenta yellow last fade on master starting value 0 sequence has increased the value UP Not selected not selected but grey white on dark white on dark Tast change was manual changed manually red background red background Manual selection selected yellow grey grey but not active New manual active yellow white on red white on red activation or background background Fader Encoder movement Selection by CLEAR not selected but grey white on dark white on dark deleted changed manually red background red background Activation by CLEAR not selected but grey white white deleted changed manually Not selected but only starting value grey yellow yellow value of any Executor except master Not selected but not selected grey turquoise on dark white on dark preset activated value of preset red background red background Selected after preset selected yellow Turquoise onred white on red already active value of preset background background MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Activation by CLEAR not selected grey
93. numbers Cue names and numbers are displayed in the timecode show All kinds of executor fader movements are recordable So you can now record the change of a chaser speed or a manual crossfade Automatic fader data reduction reducing the amount of recorded fader movements dramatically and allowing easier manual editing afterwards Free choice of editing in graphic or text mode Text mode supports filtering so that you can watch only the executors that you want to Blind programming No restrictions to the number of timecode shows running at one time memory permiting of course No restrictions for no mouse please users The timecode show can be fully edited with the encoders and or the touchscreens Timecode shows can be write protected So if you only want to watch your show running you will not accidentally change something Copy Paste functions between different timecode shows is now possible Timecode shows can be merged together Autostart feature for timecode shows e g the show will automatically load and run upon detection of the correct SM PTE signal 140 Repeat function with definable number of repeats for timecode shows with internal synchronisation MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH grand MA 8 1 2 Creating a Timecode Show Graphically with the touch screens or mouse Open a timeco
94. on the side of the Defined button will open the Define Attributes to Set Time menu Selecting individual Attributes In this menu all Attributes are displayed with a green selected or black deselected background Pressing on one of the functions will select or deselect it respectively 71 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 3 5 5 Link Fader Function in the CHANNEL window If the Link Fader function is activated paging through in CHANNEL M ode will keep the current fader range in the Channel Fader sheet 3 5 6 AUTO SORT Function in the CHANNEL window If the AUTO SORT function is activated key has a black background the selected channels in the CHANNEL window will automatically be moved to the left and upwards Using AUTO SORTin conjunction with Link Fader allows channel selections to be transferred to the faders when in channel mode CHANNEL mode 3 5 7 Options within the CHANNEL or Fader window Touch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar yellow dot Or With a right mouse click on top line the CHANNEL SHEET OPTIONS window will open The Channel or Fader Sheet Options window will open The Display button must be pressed displayed with green font Layer Display only Values and Outputs in the FADER CHANNEL window possible By pressing the respective keys the following basic values will be displayed Values only Values are displayed Fades
95. or even better from the 3D VISUALIZER delete the settings by pressing 3x CLEAR all effects will be deleted from the Programmer immediately or Save setting as Cue press STORE press on an empty cell in the small Executor window or an empty Executor button The effect will be saved as a Cue in the Sheets the white text on a violet background will change to yellow on a dark background If PROGRAM M ER ONLY had been activated all features will disappear from the Sheet This Cue can now be executed or edited like a normal sequence Applying EFFECTS to the Modulators By transferring effects to modulators you are enabled to execute changes very rapidly As the effect will be permanent you can delete a temporary change after its execution or save It as a Cue start the Effect button in the Effect pool press TOP press the Effect button of the currently running effect in the Effect pool The effect stops disappears from the ALL RUNNING PROGRAMS menu and its settings can now be seen in the modulators All fixtures involved are marked by a red bar all settings taken from the effect have a dark violet background in the modulators all changed modulators havea violet background 133 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA Rows Width Cols mT 1 3 281 3 281 Height Orientation Left gt Right Horizontal first Top gt
96. profile Select an existing profile with SELECT PROFILE and press EDIT to change it oder Click NEW in SELECT PROFILE press rigth encoder type in a name and confirm with OK Change create a profile Touching the screen will create a reticule ADD POINT creates a new point in the center of the reticule DELETE POINT delets the point With the encoder POINT you can jump to the next point the encoders In X and Out Y adjusts the reticule Move a point with a touch on the screen or with grabbing with the left button of the mouse When a red point is in the center of the reticule the button TOGGLE CURVE tranfer the straight line into a curve between 2 points The point changes from red to yellow some predefined profiles are stoed in the menu PREDEFINED the MIRROR function inverts input and output With leaving the EDIT menuthe profile is stored automatically DELETE PROFILE will delete a profile from the overview You can t delete a Fade Path and you can not create a new Fade Path If all Fade pathes are used you must change the profile in this path ATTENTION all cues which uses this path will get the new profile too 4 3 4 Moving Cues Press the M OVE Key once LED is on Press the SEQUENCE Key once LED is on Using the keypad enter the number of the Sequence in which Cues are to be moved Lt MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de e
97. sHows_04 2 F G Dim Pan Tilt Dim Pan Tilt 1 Cue 3s 3s Os Os 42 19 16 80 6 25 100 00 42 19 16 80 6 25 100 00 2 Cue 3s 3s Os Os 77 34 16 80 6 25 77 34 16 80 6 25 3 4 4 Cue 5 Cue 3s 3s Os Os Os Os 100 00 72 66 88 67 30 08 30 08 100 00 72 66 88 67 30 08 30 08 Setting up a FTP File Transport Protocol access Via this access you can transfer data from the console to a PC This way you can take over the report on your PC and open it as an Excel table The easiest way to save and print out reports is also via the PC In order to do so PC and console have to be connected to the same network i e the first 3 number groups or the IP number have to be identical e g 192 168 177 xxx and the last number group has to be unique for each device logged on this network Saving and printing reports Create the desired report see above Connect PC and console via FTP Cut out the file xx CSV in the REPORT folder of the console and paste it into a folder of on the PC In the graphics on the left the folder overview of the console having the IP 192 168 177 114 Start the application MICROSOFT EXCEL and open the report file Printing saving sending the report etc is as usual with Excel files fo Create the desired report see above Store the REPORT file on a floppy with SAVE all created reports will be stored
98. setup of the current show ADD UNMATCHED DEVICES Harmless here only those parts of the imported show will be transferred that do not overlap with the current setup i e the current setup will not be changed but only extended No risk of ruining the current show USE OLD DEVICES Dangerous here the complete setup of the imported show will overwrite the setup of the current show Only those parts that do not overlap will be kept confirm with OK NEXT confirm PLEASE CONFIRM with OK confirm WARNING After opening the files the BACKUP menu will open again press MERGE CONTENTS select the desired show elements will receive a dark green background move the blinking frame using the Encoder Using the Encoder open or close the sub folders marked with a or sign or select individual elements the text note has changed It is older in red This element is older than that having the same name in the current show the creation date of this element is added in brackets the text note has changed It is newer in green This element is newer than that having the same name in the current show the creation date of this element is added in brackets MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING User User Data le Merged Into The Original Profile 5 User User Data Is Merged Into MY Profil
99. software simulates the dimmer function The user only has to choose this function and can operate these lamps as any other dimmer type lamp Sign on the new lamp in FULL ACCESS 2 2 If no lamp of this type isin the library create your own lamp 2 6 n CHANNELS of FIXTURE TYPES create 3 channels with attribut COLORM IX and switch the column INV to YES Create another channel with attribute DIM and select Virtual in the SELECT ATRIBUTE menu Confirm with OK In the Fixture Sheet the dimmer channel and the 3 colour channels are displayed and can be operated although only 3 DM X channels are covered the virtual dimmer channel does not cover an own physical channel f other channels than Colormix 1 3 should be affected b y the dimmer set collumn REACT on DIMMER to linear or invers 25 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 DMX Id Ch Id Fix Fixture Attribute Profile Inv Default Highlight Stage Snap SL300 1 COLORI w SL300 1 GOBO1 Ri SL300 1 GOBOT SL300 1 DIM slow01 SL300 1 PAN SL300 1 TILT SL300 1 FROST SI gt PS RAWWWUWWWWWNNNNNNNNGSoo5555 o s W S Dmx List Fixture Patch Patci gt i ag Fixture Patch DMX Id Fix Id Ch Fixture Type Name Al 1 Te NoMaster Pan Tilt Sw st est A20 2 MINISCAN HPE MINISCAN HPE 1 A2 3 MAC 2000 WASH 2 MAC 2000 WASH 21CH AAB 4 MAC 2000 PERFORI MAC 2000 PERFORM 3 26 This can only be don
100. the Executor Faders simultaneously the display will show a summary of the Executor Fader Pages Or If in EXECUTOR FADER M ode you can call up the summary for all EXECUTOR FADER Pages by pressing the PAGE Keys in the display By clicking on a PAGE Key you can call up the respective PAGE The individual Faders are indicated by symbols in the respective PAGE Keys The yellow bar graph will give you the currently set value for the respective Fader If there is a green square above the Fader symbol a Sequence a Group or a Special M aster is allocated to this Executor Fader If this square is yellow the Sequence or Chaser is active 5 5 3 Executor Button Page When pressing both PAGE keys for the Executor Buttons simultaneously the display will show a summary of the EXECUTOR BUT TON Pages Or After pressing the LIST key once the TFT display will show a listing of the Sequences assigned to the Buttons and in the middle a PAGE Key with the currently called up EXECUTOR Page You can call up the summary for all EXECUTOR BUTTON Pages by pressing the PAGE keys in the display By clicking on a PAGE key you can call up the respective PAGE The keys are indicated by symbols in the respective PAGE keys If there is a green square a Sequence a Group or a Special M aster is allocated to this Executor Button If this square is yellow the Sequence or Chaser is active Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www
101. the Feature is to be moved Select the position in the Features table by clicking on it The Feature will now be displayed in this Preset group Some Features cannot be moved e g Color Mix This is indicated by the words Fixed Attributes in the table on the right of the respective Feature The changes will take effect and wiil be saved only after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the SAVE button Moving Attributes to another Feature or Preset group Click on an Attribute e g Shutter Press the Moves Lines button will be displayed in red Select a Preset group to which the Attribute is to be moved e g Control MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING All Encoder Groups No Name QTY x 2 PAN TILT 4 3 COLOR 4 Add 4 SHAPERS 8 Group Delete Group Attributes in Selected Group Ungrouped Attributes Attribute Feature Preset Attribute Feature Preset PAN PAN TILT PAN TI PT MODE PAN TILT PAN TI TILT PAN TILT PAN TI PANO PT ROT PANXTI TILT lt gt PT ROT PAN TI TILT lt PT ROT PAN TI TILT gt PT ROT PAN TI Fixture Types No Qty Name Shortname Manufacturer Comment Date Type MIB Delay MIB x 1 10 MINISCAN I CLAYPAKY Origini Mirror Default Defa 2 120 DIMS NONE Origin Mirror Default Defa maa 3 10 MARTIN Origin Head Default Defa New Lin
102. the Options Sone Pages zora zA To change a TYPE or PAGE select the cell by a finger touch or using the Encoder and press the Encoder to open racking utton the Options menu Depending on the monitor 2 or 6 units each with 6 Faders or 20 Buttons can be displayed Quikey 10 All Stage Playback TYPE EEEN EEE E Faders 1 5 Will display the Executor Faders 1 to 5 z a a a Faders 6 10 Will display the Executor Faders 6 to 10 Faders 11 15 Will display the Executor Faders 11 to 15 On agrandMA Light and Ultra Light switch on the WIDE EXECUTOR mode in the SETUP Faders 16 20 Will display the Executor Fadersi 16 to 20 On agrandMA Light and Ultra Light switch on the WIDE EXECUTOR mode in the SETUP Buttons left On a grandM A Light and Ultra Light the Executor Buttons will be displayed On a grandM A the left Buttons block will be displayed Buttons right identical to Buttons left except On a grandM A Light and Ultra Light switch on the WIDE EXECUTOR mode in the SETUP PAGE Auto Will display the Faders or Buttons of the current page i e will update what is being displayed when Scrolling with PAGE or Page Select Page Input Range 1 to 64 Page No 1 128 The Faders or Buttons of the set page will be displayed and will not change when scrolling with PAGE or PAGE The Display units can have individual settings so that one may be fixed and another may show the Faders or But
103. the Range of this function has been set condition Range Mode Value for the indicated function mode Functions of the individual buttons By pressing the button Add Line you can insert a new name above the selected line Delete Line you can delete the selected name i e the complete line Percent Values you can display the table values as percentages By pressing the button you can switch to decimal or hexadecimal display to leave this menu The settings will only take effect and be saved after leaving the Full Access menu and pressing the SAVE button 33 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Select Fade Path Name NL Normal Low NO Normal Over HN High Normal HH High High HL High Low HO High Over LN Low Normal LH Low High LL Low Low LO Low Over In 0 gt Out 0 Entering Names and Values The Attribute for which names and values can be entered is displayed in the title bar or above the right Encoder below the Display To select another one rotate the Encoder until the desired Attribute is displayed The first column contains the name for Color e g Color1 Click on this name and change it if needed e g Close Red In the Range column 0 00 100 00 is displayed Using the second and third Encoder you can enter the starting and end values for this name Channel Values By pressing the Percent Values buttons you can switch
104. the console You can renew the Firm ware for the second built in Computer Motorola and you can also renew the grandM A operating system via floppy disk During the Boot up process you will see all loaded program segments blue background on the right TFT display In order to access the Utility Menu you have to push any key as soon as the message TO ENTER UTILITY MENU PRESS ANY KEY is displayed with red background during the boot up process The menu will open after approx 10 20 seconds Press 1 Restore grandMA operating system If you press the 1 key on the keyboard you will see a list with all systems existing on the harddisk By pressing one of the displayed keys a b c the respective system will be installed You have to confirm installation by pressing o VERY IMPORTANT this is the letter o not the number 0 As soon as the installation is completed the display will show UPDATE DONE next to STATUS You can start the console by pressing the ESC key twice Press 2 Delete grandMA operating system Upon every update a safety copy of the system will be automatically created on harddisk In order to delete an older system from harddisk press 2 on the keyboard You will see a list with all systems existing on the harddisk By pressing one of the displayed keys a b c the respective system will be deleted You have to confirm the delete process by pressing o VERY IMPORTANT
105. the store and assign process 3 2 1 Assigning VIEWS All created views can by assigned to any view key Click on the view key with the right mouse key The window SELECT VIEW will appear In this window make a left click on the VIEW you require Select View The table shows all created VIEWS The QTY column shows the number of stored displays and external monitors for the individual VIEWs Scrolling is possible by dragging the scrollbar on the right side Selecting a VIEW in the table will assign this view to the chosen key aE Fe mx 3 2 2View Pool Lt EA In the View Pool all created Views are displayed and can be called up directly by selection 5 6 T ea miT GOBO COLOR 13 sen cr eres se 56 Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Fixtures Values Auto Auto sorted by Numbers _Cols_ Rows Fix Ch Name Frost Focus Programmer Only Only Sequence Veses amp Values Pan Tilt Modulator Modulator Modulator Modulator Table Size Speed Phase Gobo Fade Executor D Sequence D Delay Auto Output Focus FIXTURE Groups Group 1 l o B 20 z1 Ze bacl F al 3 3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS Important and frequently used combinations of fixt
106. value these cells will be kept grey scale according to dimmer value and you can select the next cells Each selected cell will immediately loose its dimmer value this way you can delete individual cells from the graphics And this is also how to create a graphics with different dimmer values COPY SELECTION only the selected cells yellow frame will be copied TOTAL all active cells will be copied MOVE using the arrow keys you can move the graphics in the desired direction MIRROR using the arrow keys you can mirror the graphics saving or deleting settings using SAVE you can save the graphics as sequence to a free Encoder or using BITMAP WIZARD to switch to the WIZARD menu using SAVE BITMAP you can save the created bitmap or the other way round load a bitmap graphics in the Wizard return to the Draw mode and go on processing the graphics there or delete all selections and setting pressing CLEAR 3 times Press X to leave the SETUP menu leave the LAYOUT VIEW menu using OPTIONS and DELETE WINDOW MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING kdt Bitmap Ettect 4 Brimap Eftcct tala 3 a askusl C Pies i hes l i 1 SIN Preset 1 None 7 2 Creating Changing BitMap effects press EDIT and an empty button in the BITMAP EFFECTS window using CHOOSE LAYOUT select a previously
107. which the fixtures of the imported Show were patched F iF EE F F F F Al f Acti r rr All for i Merge ig IRewmave fRelease Filter aid cai ae Define Will open the Attribute filter all attributes having a green background will be saved The settings in this Preset Options filter will only be active for the following STORE process afterwards the filter will be reset to default again CO en re Store Values r rita Selective Only Keep I Active Values Will store only the active values all values that have a red background in the FIXTURE leo J Peet Aeration For CHANNEL window All Will store all current settings all values of all Scanner and Dimmer channels Very memory demanding problems when saving presets only recommendable for special cases All for Selected Devices Will store all values of the selected Scanners and Dimmers the Scanners or Dimmers are indicated by yellow names If not empty Merge When expanding Cues all settings already stored will be kept The newly set values will be stored to the Cue as additions already existing ones will be overwritten Overwrite Cue will be overwritten completely Remove When removing only those parts of the Cue will be cut deleted out of the existing Cue that are active red Realease This option no matter which settings are done will store no values for the selected channles RELEASE outputs no values and enables other playbacks to use this ch
108. will assign the Grandmaster function to this Fader MASTER EXEC FADE this will assign the Executor Fader function to this Fader MASTER PRESET FADE this will assign the Preset Fader function to this Fader Executor Fader having these 3 functions will always run synchronized to the console faders The BLACKOUT SET TIME and MANUAL FADE buttons will also affect all Faders having these functions 5 1 7Assigning effects press ASSIGN press on the small Executor window press FUNCTION press EFFECT use the Encoder to select the effect and confirm by pressing on the Encoder 112 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH DOUBLE Exec 1 1 Seq 1 Seq 1 Button and Fader Assignment A B Xfade trigger dimmer _ Playback Options Auto Swop Fix Protect Normal HTP Kill Protect Move in Black Options Cuelist MB always Restart Options MIB never Auto PrePos Size of Executor first cue Restart with Track From Last Priority Options Dae Default Button and Fader Assignment Private Effects Default Options Load from Save as Apply to default all Exec default Load from 5 1 8 Assigning BITMAP EFFECTS press ASSI
109. will be displayed Icons small The icons will be displayed next to the name Icons big Only the icons will be displayed the Preset name will not appear Use the right mouse button to click on the blue window and open the Options menu 3 7 3 Selecting Presets Select the Fixtures or Dimmers for which you want to call up a preset Fixtures Dimmers have to be displayed in yellow Now the individual presets can be called up for the selected Fixtures The called up presets and their names will be displayed in the FIXTURE windows If you select a preset directly without having selected Fixtures or Dimmer channels all Fixtures and Dimmers for which presets had been created will be selected The preset can now be called up by pressing the respective key Using the Fader next to the right display you can either define Preset Fade times or fade over presets manually Press the key above the Fader once red LED is on Select the desired Fade time using the Fader The selected Fade time will be used when presets are being called up Press the key above the Fader once more green LED is on Select your Presets With the Fader you can now fade over towards the selected Preset Default setting for the Fader to fade just upwards or in both directions 2 13 Set tings in the DEFAULTS menu below the Executor Defaults Crossfade Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 FREEZE UPNATT marqa rari liiis inte dastinatinn
110. within the Setup menu such as selecting fixtures and dimmer channels with DM X address modifications etc Chapter 3 is dedicated to the practical aspects of setting up a Show while Chapter 4 will show you how to create and edit Cues and Sequences Moving on to Chapter 5 you will learn how to execute Cues Sequences and Chasers In Chapter 6 you will learn how to create store and execute effects chapter 7 with creating bitmap effects Chapter 8 is dedicated to the Remote Control abbreviated as Remote and Timecode while Chapter 9 explains the function of Macros and the Quikey Chapter 10 deals with the Command Line Saving and loading your show is described in chapter 11 Chapter 12 explains the updating of the operational software as well as the fixture library while chapter 14 is dedicated to the operation of the grandMA replay unit Chapter 15 deals with True Tracking Backup and Playback Functions the options in a network environment in chapter 16 Full Tracking Backup in chapter 17 how to use the Remote Control with PocketPCs in chapter 18 you ll find notes on the 3D Visualizer Different usage of the MICRO is marked by or and you can have a reference manual for the MICRO too Weare sure that you will enjoy working with the grandM A and we wish your show every success 3 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 1 3 Specifications 1 3 1 Capacities 2048 control paramet
111. yellow characters turn grey The modified active values will be kept and displayed with red background Press the CLEAR key again When pressing the CLEAR key the second time the activation of modified values will be canceled they will no longer have a red background Press the CLEAR key one more time When pressing the CLEAR key the third time all modified values will be reset default or to their original setting prior to the activation After pressing the CLEAR key for the first time the yellow LED in this key will flash This means that only the selection was deleted When you select other fixtures or dimmer channels now the yellow LED will no longer flash Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING 3 5 4 FADE and DELAY times in the CHANNEL window In addition to the standard basic FADE times individual durations can also be set for the individual functions in the CHANNEL window not in the FADER CHANNEL window These settings are needed when creating Cues so that you can work with different FADE or DELAY times for indi vidual channels Open CHANNEL Window Press Values so that the button displays Fades or Delays TIME Or When pressing the TIME key once this will switch the channel sheet to the FADE time mode The second time re h this will switch the channel sheet to the DELAY time mode C If in the Window options
112. 02 4 6 INFO Window 4 7 REPORT Window 5 Cues Sequences and Chasers 5 1 ASSIGN menu 5 2 Small EXECUTOR Window 5 3 EXECUTOR Sheet 5 4 TRACKING Sheet 5 5 Page Administration 5 6 OFF menu RUNNING PROGRAM S 5 7 CONTENT Menu 6 Effects 6 1 Effect Pool 6 2 Editing Effect Groups 6 3 Executing an Effect Group 6 4 Customizing an Effect Group 6 5 Effect Groups in Cues 6 6 View ALLRUNNING EFFECTS menu 6 7 Virtual Forms EDIT FORM S 6 8 Modulators 7 BITMAP Effects 7 1 Creating a Layout for a BITM Ap Effect 7 2 Creating Changing BitM ap effects 7 3 Starting the Effect 8 Remote Control 8 1 Timecode 8 2 Remote Control via Touchboard 8 3 Remote Control by DM X IN 9 Macros und QUIKEYS 9 1 Creating Macros 9 2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS 9 3 Agenda Menu 10 Command line 10 1 Introduction 10 2 Command Overview 10 3 Command Reference 11 Saving and loading a SHOW 11 1 Saving the Current Show on harddisk 11 2 Loading a Show from the harddisk 11 3 Loading a empty Show 11 4 Deleting the current show 1 5 Deleting a Show from harddisk 103 103 105 105 114 114 116 118 120 121 123 123 124 127 128 129 130 130 132 134 134 137 139 140 140 149 150 152 152 154 155 156 156 157 159 177 177 178 178 178 178 11 6 Saving the Current Show on floppy disk178 11 7 Loading a Show from Floppy disk 11 8 Loading a Demo Show 179 179 11 12 PARTIAL SHOW READ 12 Update Software 13 Utili
113. 1 Multi User 18 194 Multipatch 23 NAME 93 99 NAME Field 73 NDP Configuration 203 204 Network Configuration 191 Network connections 191 NETWORK DIMMER 54 NETWORK MASTER 54 NEW START 98 New Timecode 140 NEXT 9 58 154 172 NMEA 48 No 30 NO MASTER 73 NO SWAP 65 No 93 99 NoMaster 27 NON TRACKING 17 0 ODD 42 154 172 OFF 17 107 172 OFF button keep pressed 120 OFF button keep pressed 120 OFF menu RUNNING PROGRAMMS 120 Off On Overwritten 128 Off Overwritten 110 OFF Time 46 OFF EXECUTOR 120 OFF PAGE 120 ON 106 173 On Overwritten 110 One Shot 128 ONLY DIRECT 75 ONLY DIRECT 75 OOPS 13 173 OOPS settings 45 Oops Settings 5 Out 107 Outdelay 93 OUTFADE 93 OUTFADE TIME 87 Output Window DMX 41 Overview Command 157 P PAGE 109 118 173 PAGE Administration 118 PAGE copying a 119 PAGE deleting a 78 119 PAGE moving a 119 PAGE Name 119 Pages change within a cue 99 PAN NORMAL 65 PAN to TILT changing 24 Pan Tilt Swap 27 Panel mechanical parts of the 5 Param Parameter 124 PARK PAUSE Function 62 Part Partly 127 Patch Sheets 34 PAUSE 106 127 173 PAUSE PARK Function 62 Phase 126 PHASE1 PHASE2 PHASE3 123 Pitch assigning the 151 Playback Buttons assigning 149 151 PLAYBACK Master 113 Playback Timing 46 Playback Tasten zuordnen 149 Plug In Card 37 PocketPC 205 PORTALL 37 Position X Y Z 21 POSITIVE ENABLE 111 Power 30 Powe
114. 1 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Rotation S ingle select one or more fixtures select the Circle icon select the S rotate each single lamp by turning the encoder Rotation G roup select multiple fixtures select the Circle icon select the G otate the fixtures in traverse around their virtual traverse using the Encoder Press X to leave the menu Press Save to save the settings Press Don t Save to discard the settings Fixture Layer Name Qty front01 10 1 dimmer01 2 blinder dimmerneu New ID Cha ID Fix Fixtures and Channels in Layer Press Cancel to stay in this menu The ALIGN function will be of great help and save you quite some time X 1al Add 2 2 4 Adjusting the Fixture Layer 12 z 3 3 Line 5 103 ete ee a PERE i jii Fixture Layer must be active By shortly clicking on the title bar it will be displayed in dark blue A Roa Select group of Fixtures Layer Lines Add Line A new group can be inserted in front of the selected group Proceed like indicated 3 pages earlier Name Type 1D Ch ID Fix Patch Mas Func Pan Func Till Swap DMX Pan DMX Tilt Line s3001 S300 11 AON Invert 1300 2 SL300 12 A11 Invert Create Delete SL300 3 SL300 13 A121 Invert i S300 4 S0 14 A ae oich Lines SL3005 SL300 15 AIM Invert Move Lines 22 MIA MA Lightin
115. 1 Preparing the Network settings Download the REM OTE X X software from our website and connect the PocketPC via COM or USB interface with a PC The program ACTIVE SYNC must be installed Start the SETUP EXE file the software for remote controlling the grandMA console will be installed on the PocketPC The software will recognize the operating systems Pocket pc Windows Mobile pocketpc 2002 Windows Mobile pocketpc 2003 Windows Mobile pocketpc 2003 SE Second Edition an Windows Mobile 5 0 and will automatically install the respective modules 205 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 206 LIGHTING When all software and hardware requirements are met the PocketPC is operational Switch on the console Switch on the PocketPC Call up the GM A REM OTE program Select the desired console Log in with a user name and password has to be registered in the console it is not possible to log in as an administrator On the grandM A M ICRO without user management the login will be skipped and the user be logged in with administrator rights You can connect up to 6 remote controls ATTENTION selected fixtures apply for all LOOX connected units and for the console Faa 4 lt 10 20 ok The flow chart shows the Views available in the PocketPC On the following pages you ll find a description of atypical console operation Start mit Username Password press E
116. 10 66 Fader Sheet Values sorted by Numbers 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 117 127 13 66 22 132 44 110 199 221 155 177 88 MATECK SCANT Nest amp Previnus firin Copy ______ be Filly a aa ri interleave Random Functions Next Prev Shaul fhe Bhulth Subechun Valu Sullinys Groups J Fader Sheet Values sorted by Numbers 7 1 12 13 14 15 67 67 115 115 115 115 115 198 198 198 198 198 67 67 67 Setting Filters to just copy move individual Functions Example You have set different positions for 10 Scanners Now you want to just copy move the PAN value from one fixture to the others Pressing the Filter button will open AT Filter Option menu In this menu you ll find all functions available The functions are all displayed with a green background Pressing on a function will deactivate it will be displayed in black then If you just want to copy move the PAN value deactivate TILT and leave the menu by pressing the X key Now only the PAN value will be changed when you copy move 3 9 5 Shuffle select order and shuffle value Using these two functions you can randomly change the selection sequence SHUFFLE SELECT ORDER and the assignment of the values in respect to the selected fixtures SHUFFLE VALUE Using SELECT ORDER will only change the selection sequence i e the change will only be visible if you
117. 10 2 Setup and start The easiest way is to use the BACKUP key and load a demo show or start show Alternatively 1 SETUP key Will allow you to select and patch the number of dimmers and fixtures create presets groups and effects 2 Right click or touch in any empty display creates moves and resizes a FADER or CHANNEL window for dimmer control and FIXTURE GROUP and different Preset windows PAN TILT GOBO for fixtures 1 10 3 Direct access The grandM A offers many different ways of controlling dimmer values and fixture attributes For speed we give you only one example for each of them Setting values for dimmers CHANNEL FADER or key toggles the motorised faders to control single dimmer channels and scrolls in blocks of 20 10 on the grandM A light dimmers 15 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 The set fader values are shown in the dimmer display Channels can also be selected and modified by the mouse wheel encoder and the keypad With the LINK function right on top of channel and fader sheets the window will automatically scroll to show the channels set for the faders Controlling Fixture attributes GROUP window Select a fixture by its key or click on the name of a fixture in the fixture sheet GOBO COLOUR window Open a preset for the selected unit if no presets are displayed run the selected function via an encoder
118. 10 SUBSYSTEM Program for the second built in computer Motorola Internas system load etc Chat For communication Chat with other grandMA users in the network Stage To display a simplified stage model with all fixtures In this window the beam of light will only be displayed as a line For Scanners having a color mixing unit or Dimmer channels to which a color has been assigned this beam of light represents the chosen color and its position Additionally fixtures can be selected directly by clicking on them 2 2 3 Position of Fixtures and 2 2 5 Adjusting individual Fixture Groups Assigning Colors for Dimmer channels SMART This window is used to call up change and store presets NETWORK DIMMER Use this window to configure and operate MA dimmer modules and the NETWORK DIMMER PROCESSOR Clear Screen Will delete all windows on this display monitor but not the saved views Will close this window discarding all changes Select the window to be created with a left mouse click LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de grand MA MACRO VIEW HUR o 2 E aly If you wish to move the newly created window click and drag the window border There are 3 ways to enlarge or reduce a window Move the cursor carefully to the lower or right border or corner until you will siehe a small double arrow next to t
119. 19 Numeric keypad 20 intensity wheel 21 Cursor keys NEXT PREV Choosing Fixtures or Channels one by one within Groups 22 Trackball for Pan Tilt or mouse function 23 Trackball ON If the LED in the key is on the trackball can be used to modify the PAN TILT value if the LED is off you can use the mouse cursor arrow if the LED blinks the mouse function can also be controlled using the PREV SET NEXT keys The functions can be switched on off in the Default menu see 2 13 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 1 7 2 Layout and Controls Micro MASTER of Tlo ofz o 8 o I BET MAK FA n aE sE 5 8 vat LIGHTIN SHB STORE Ei UPDATE ww l oLa lo a 9 F t e id bf 28 28 zo r uig r 2 a E 4 ES EL UTOR iry ER BUTT a 1 2 2 4 a 7 2 8 0 00 65 65 Go 6 05 60 oo oo EXEC FADERS EXECUTOR BUTTONS An additional e
120. 2 Encoder Activation Grouping In order to split the activation for a function press Edit key and touch on the set activation red background before storing it press EDIT choose function in Fixture Sheet This will open the input window The title bar will display the chosen function Attribute Pressing the Deactivate button will cancel the activation of this function Sa PN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING grand MA 3 4 6 FIXTURE OPTION In the Fixture Sheet you can adapt different basic settings for each individual Fixture press EDIT touch on a Fixture and the FIXTURE OPTION window will open The Fixture can be renamed using the keyboard Next to Type the type of Fixture is displayed next to ID the corresponding number and next to Patch the start address for this Fixture Pressing the PAN NORMAL key display changes to PAN INVERSE will invert the output of the PAN parameter Pressing the TILT NORMAL key display changes to TILTINVERSE will invert the output of the TILT parameter Pressing the NO SWAP key display changes to SWAPPED will swap the output of the PAN and TILT parameters so that the Pan parameter on the console controls the tilt of the fixture and vice versa Pressing the WITH MASTER key display changes to NO MASTER will be indicated by a dark blue background the Dimmer va
121. 2 x GOTO Load lt Cue gt MACRO M MACRO Macro MIDI_BTN MI CONSOLE Remote M idi Button MOVE MO MOVE Move lt source gt at lt destination gt NEXT N NEXT Next device of current selection ODD OD QUIKEY ODD selection with ALL EVEN OFF OF OFF Off switch something off ON ON ON On switch something on OOPS 0 OOPS Oops made a mistake gt Undo PAGE PA PAGE Page PAUSE PAU PAUSE Pause something PRESET PR PRESET Preset type or Preset PREVIEW PREV PREVIEW Preview something PREVIOUS P PREVIOUS Previous device of current selection SELECT SE SELECT Select lt executor gt select default executor SEQU S SEQU Sequence Cuelist STORE ST STORE Store SWOP SW CONSOLE Swop executor SW OP_OFF SWOP_O CONSOLE End of swop TEMP TE TEMP Temporary run executor THRU T THRU Through to enter ranges TIMECODE T CONSOLE Timecode show TOGGLE TOG CONSOLE Toggle running status of executor TOP TOP TOP Call first cue of executor TOUCH_BTN TO CONSOLE Remote Analog input button UNPRESS UN CONSOLE Release of command UPDATE U UPDATE Update VALUE VA 3xTIME return to value mode VIEW V VIEW View contents of one or multiple screens 158 VIEWBTN VIEWB 2 x VIEW Viewbutton hardkey beside screens MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH grand MA 10 3 Command Reference In this chapter all commands are explained along with their syntax demonstrating
122. 21 Invert Invert Invert 5L300 14 A131 Yes Invert 5L300 15 A141 Invert 5L300 16 A151 Invert 5L300 17 A161 Invert SL300 18 AI71 Invert L300 19 A181 Invert TIP If you want to multipatch fixtures with different addresses set on the fixture itself you can enter these after the M ultipatch in the Layer Sheet of course only if not used by other fixtures Inserting deleting or moving fixtures Select Fixture Layer Select a fixture Pressing one of the buttons will have the following effects Add Line Inserts a new fixture in front of the selected fixture Delete Line Deletes the selected fixture And all settings for this fixtures are deleted too M oves Lines Moves the selected fixtures to another position in the table If using the M oves Lines key this key will be displayed in red By selecting a new position in the table the fixture will be moved to that new position Assigning fixture names Click on the fixture s name enter a name directly and confirm with Enter If a space and a number is added an automaticly enumerate of the names is made Adjusting ID Cha and Fix Select one or more cells under ID Cha or Fix and press the Encoder A window will open in which you can enter the IDs that will then be accepted when Enter is pressed Pressing None will delete them Please avoid any overlappings Switching the Master GRANDMASTER FADER off Select one or more cells under Mas
123. 3 RIGHT TOUCH SCREEN TO RIGHT EXTERNAL SCREEN not on the MICRO To transfer the contents of the right screen to an external monitor Some menus e g SETUP will only be displayed on the right screen lt if this screen fails you can use F3 to switch to an external monitor You can then operate the menus using the mouse F4 UPDATE To update the software if the SETUP menu cannot be accessed e g after a cancelled update Here you can update the software of the console the library and the processor not for MICRO F7 COMMAND WINDOW Here you find the most important buttons as softkeys Will especially be useful e g when operating the ReplayUnit F9 SWITCH OFF ALL TOUCHSCREENS To switch off all touch screens if e g a screen is blocked by a failure so that you can make no entries After switching off you can only proceed using the mouse 223 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 COLOR CODE A Fixture Sheet Yalues amp Preset Pan Tilt Pan Tilt 255 128 255 128 255 128 224 Colors in the FIXTURE CHANNEL and FADER window Entry or function Status Channel Dimmer Scanner number channel value attribute values attribute Channel or attribute not selected grey grey grey not used or released no value by 3x CLEAR not selected not selected but grey yellow yellow but value of starting value gt 0 any Executor Dimmer not selected
124. 8865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Colors used for the screen display in the Tracking Sheet Color or symbol Co LOR co DE Dash No value entered the default value will be output Dimmer value cyan Entered value or value that has been changed in this cue P Tracking 1 1 Sequ Dimmer value magenta Tracked value is defined by the previous Cyam colored value s and is not saved i e if you change the cyan colored value in a cue No Name 1 htp 2 dim 10 SL above all magenta colored values following will also change Dim Dim Dim Note The tracked values will only be executed within the sequence if the Tracking option had been selected in Cue the Assign menu lt otherwise the values will not be executed although they appear in the Sheet If only some of 2 Cue the fixtures are to be tracked you have to block those values not to be tracked and have to set them to 0 3 cue Dimmer value green value has been reduced 5 a Dimmer value red Blocked value the value that was defined by the previous cyan 6 Cus colored value will be saved Changes on the 7 Cue previous cyan colored value will no longer affect the value the first upper tracked value will turn from red to 8 Cue cyan a Background red with blinking frame this value is selected Fixture name yellow header bar this fixture is selected in the Fixture Sheet Manual OFF Sequence name in title bar white Figures in the
125. A Version 5 7 J Fader Sheet Values sorted by Numbers Lent 67 67 67 67 67 115 115 115 115 115 198 198 198 198 198 e Fader Sheet Values sorted by Numbers Ae ee ae _67 198 198 _67 _67 115 115 115 115 115 198 67 198 19867 82 As the dimmers were selected in ascending order the groups will be formed in this order too 1 group n 1 5 2 4 group n 6 10 3 group n 11 15 Using the SHUFFLE SELECT ORDER you can change the selection order i e that will also change the group assignment Press SHUFFLE SEL ORDER once Now the first group will consist of the n s 1 2 3 12 and 15 With each NEXT command you can call up the next group and the new assignment of the respective group will be kept only when using the SHUFFLE SEL ORDER command the next time will the assignment be changed You can also combine the SHUFFLE SEL ORDER with SHUFFLE VALUE Press SHUFFLE VALUE once This will exchange the values n s 1 2 3 12 and 15 randomly within the group 3 10 Blind Modus The Blind mode will separate the stage output from the programmer i e when changing values being in the Blind mode the values of the stage output will remain as they are You can program shows without changing the current stage lighting by simply switching over using the BLIND key you gain a quick access to the stage lights Hold the BLIND key until you hear the beep and the key LED starts to blink The title bar of all
126. A service By electronic specialist having appropriate tools or MA service By electronic specialist having appropriate tools or MA service By electronic specialist having appropriate tools or MA service or your local distributor LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Task Display toc Pause Reset CLOS Please Confirm This will switch the Right Touch Screen to the Right External Screen ey Ee fe Update Change Show Same Console Name ani d IP Version Update Motorola Desk Processor 1 50 Update from Floppy Version Info Floppy Info Update Library Morsi CLOSE Command Window EEE E E E E pme E oA Align Provi EEEE Re EE ef 7 8 l 9 F Escape aveckepace ES ue Be he al f 2 3 Up sale To RRR gt gt ae Please Confirm a Do You Want To Switch Off All Touchscreens Pe C _ Special functions Some function keys of the external keyboard are reserved for special functions You will only need these functions when components malfunction lt you would not use them during normal operation F1 SCREENSHOT without figure To transfer screeshots to a PC using FTP F2 TASKDISPLAY Here important operational data are displayed for service engineers F
127. AUSE Pause playback keep output OFF Switch off release output gt gt Jump forward to next breakpoint in show lt lt Jump backwards to last breakpoint in show TOGGLE As starting keyword every executor that follows after TOGGLE performs a GO if it wasn t running or an OFF if it was running TOGGLE executor list ENTER As starting keyword every executor that follows after TOP is performing a GOTO FIRST STEP TOP executor list ENTER Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 TOUCH_BTN A TOUCH_BTN touch button is a remote function triggert by incoming 0 10V signals The TOUCH BTN simulates an executor keypress therefore it is working only in combination with an assigned executor TOUCH_BTNs can be seen under TOOLS REMOTE TOUCH menu Calling a TOUCH_BTN manually TOUCH_BTN X ENTER Linking a TOUCH_BTN to an executor STORE TOUCH_BTN X EXEC FADEREBUTTON1 2 3 Y Z ENTER Using EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor button X must be in the range from 1 to 16 UNPRESS UNPRESS is used only in combination with functions of executor s buttons that cause an action upon unpress These functions are FLASH_UP FLASH_DOWN SWOP and TEMP Please look at these commands for details about UNPRESS UPDATE UPDATE does the following things sorted by priority If the UPDATE dialog is open it closes the UPDATE dialog If the EDIT UPDATE procedure is active the e
128. Bottom OK Layout V fixtures 1 No Name Joi fixtures n ki OONAN D WN ey wWwNao New Device Layer 85 SL300 99 Manipulate Setup Layout Select Choose Vertical Layout Baise Label dimmer Take Selection Add Selection Clean Frame Remove Frame Wizard Column Left gt Right Top gt Bottom Horizontal first 7 BITMAP Effects Besides the effects mentioned in chapter 6 you can use the Bitpmap Effects function to run graphics in a fixture matrix You can either create Bitmap graphics on a PC and then import them or directly create them in the DRAW mode With CREATE TEXT you can also create texts as Bitmap graphics The setting for the effects is a fixture matrix to be created in SETUP In the Editor you can assign effects e g rotation zoom etc and a layout to the fixture layout Bitmap effects can be assigned to Executors and be controlled very easily just like normal effects TAKE CARE THAT THE FIXTURE TYPE USED HAS THE FUNCTIONS TO BE USED IN THE EFFECT 7 1 Creating a Layout for a BITMAP Effect Arranging the matrix Open STAGE window activate SETUP button on right top and open the WIZZARD ARRANGE IN MATRIX Select those fixtures to be embedded into the matrix the number should be the sum from horizontal and vertical lines as otherwise no complete square will result Enter the number of horizontal R
129. CLEAR and RELEASE functions UPDATE function for fast correction of programs EDIT function for direct modification of playback parameters 14 3 18 Adjustment of Hardware Software Equalizer for Audio Input Preselection of certain settings Defaults Free grouping of functions for selective programming Preselection of save mode times and the standard operation of playback functions 14 3 19 Connectivity 4 DMX 512 1990 Output Lines via 5 pin XLR Sockets DM X Input with 5 pin XLR Socket and DM X Thru 189 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Audio Input Line for Mono Audio Signals gt 20 mV with 6 3mm socket SMPTE Timecode Entry for LTC Timecode gt 200 mV with 6 3mm socket MIDI Interface with IN OUT THRU External control input for direct voltage signals via 25 pin SUB D socket 2 SVGA Output Lines for one colour monitor and a service monitor via 15 pin sockets Parallel printer port Centronic via 25 pin SUB D socket Ethernet Interface for networking Backup DM X transmission and Remote Control with RJ 45 socket 10 100 Base T according IEEE 802 4 2 serial interfaces RS 232C for future extensions only for GPS receiver 9 pin SUB D sockets USB Port not active Connections for external Keyboard Mini D PS2 Type and Mouse Mini D PS2 Type Power Supply via IEC CEE 22 Inlet Mains Supply Plug 90 230V autoselecti
130. Chaser or effect will continue with the latest BPM value grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Sec Mision E Time amp Date Setup ia x be Time g Date Location Manual J i Timezone 7 16 Day 3 GTM 0 10 East J Expositive 58 Month December Werte 995 East positive 12 Year 2002 Latitude 49 80 North Nepositive gt m Input Range 180 00 to 180 00 Longitude 1 0 East 9 95 East 49 80 North 48 LIGHT 1 0 East 9 95 East 43 80 North o measured The AUTO GAIN function can be used for grandM As from serial no 0055 and later key will turn dark grey key HARDWARE modification grandM A ultra light allows nly Auto Gain For grandMAs with serial no up to 0054 this key can not be used You can leave this menu by pressing the X key all settings will be stored 2 15 TIME amp DATE Menu Pressing the TIME and DATE key in the SETUP M enu will open the following menu You can set TIME and DATE with the encoders below the display You can switch encoder functions by pressing the button Time Manual or automatic positioning via GPS The times of sunrise and sunset change according to your geogra
131. Command Line AT functions you can also enter dimmer values 10 Command Line Select channels with a left mouse click and hold middle the mouse key down and drag the value will be modified 69 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 CHANNEL FADER TEET 70 3 5 1CHANNEL Mode Activate the CHANNEL M ode with the CHANNEL FADER keys this will toggle your executor faders so that they are now channel faders The assignment of Channels and Faders can be changed via the CHANNEL FADER Keys for example 1 20 21 40 etc The assignment of a channel number to a Fader is listed on the TFT displays above the faders By pressing the indiviual CLEAR keys above each fader on the touch screen individual channels which have been modified manually can be deselected and deactivated The respective channel can be selected using the physical key above the Fader In the TFT displays above the Faders the assignment of channel numbers and Faders will be displayed along with any names that have been given to individual channels In CHANNEL mode the individual channel values can be set with the Faders The respective channel can be hidden using the physical key under the Fader In order to modify the selection or the active values of dimmer channels Press the CLEAR key When pressing the CLEAR key the first time the selection of dimmer channels will be deselected from the OUT PUT window
132. E List of Cues DELAY X Y ENTER The given cues will be stored with a snap delay default of X Y seconds for all snap channels Switching to delay display mode DELAY ENTER All sheets wich are set to AUTO display mode will display delays instead of values This effect is only temporary All sheets will switch back to value mode upon ending of the next command line operation DELETE DELETE object list ENTER Some forms of delete will need no ENTER in the end DELETE hit key in a pool DELETE CUE X hit executor button DELETE hit viewkey All objects in the list must be of the same type You can not delete a preset and a cue at the same time Deleting an object that is assigned to an executor will also delete the executor Deleting an object that is assigned to a viewkey will also delete the viewkey Object Comment CUE If no sequence or executor is specified the sequence of the default executor is used If the last cue of a sequence is deleted the whole sequence is deleted DMX_BTN EFFECT Do not delete effects which are used by sequences EXEC Deleting an executor does not delete the sequence group etc assigned to it FORM Do not delete forms which are still in use byeffects GROUP Deleting a group will also delete its submaster functionality MACRO You can not delete a macro that is currently recording MIDI_BTN PAGE Deleting a page will delete all executors on that page PRESET Deleting single presets
133. ECTS Display of the Effect calls A second sheet will appear in the lower part of the display No Number of the Effect Group NAME Name of the Effect Group ACTION Type of Effect call ed om ee OX a INTENS Display of the defined size of the Effect Group Fadu Chiles uiap Oide Suet irian Sat B te tte 2 F Fade If Y YES is displayed the size will be faded in with the set fade time a iz a EI SPEED Display of the defined speed of the Effect Group 5 Dn o E ma Sot F Fade If Y YES is displayed the speed will be faded in with the set fade time 7 TOs ad to t SOFT Display of the set softness softer fade in of the effects 3 9 te a k F Fade If Y YES is displayed the softness will be faded in with the set fade time 1111 Go w te te te The chart shows all Cues in the Chaser Sequence i 12 Coe w tk te te 13 13 ces a te te te With the help of these keys you can define the various functions for the Chaser RUN Chaser runs with the set speed Fade and Delay times will be adjusted in terms of percentage SOUND Triggering of the steps cues via a sound signal Fade and Delay times will be executed with the set time BPM Playback of the steps cues via automatic recognition of Beats Per Minute Fade and Delay times will be adjusted in terms of percentage FORWARD Chaser runs forward REVERS Chaser runs backwards BOUNCE Chaser runs forward then backw
134. ECUTOR FADER FADER BUTTON PAGE 118 5 5 Page Administration If you are in Channel Mode the name of the currently accessible PAGE of channel faders appears on the touchscreens between the small channel windows above your faders 3 5 1 CHANNEL Mode If you are in Executor Mode the name of the currently accessible PAGE of executor faders appears on the touchscreens between the small executor windows above your faders After pressing the LIST key once the currently accessible PAGE of EXECUTOR BUTTONS appears at the bottom of the right display including the name between the small executor windows Using the PAGE amp keys you can open the access PAGES Remember all pages output at once so changing page so no effect on playback only on what you currently have access to Or Hold a PAGE button down for which another is to be called up While holding down a button the EXECUTOR Button LEDs will indicate the current PAGE you are on Example If LED 28 is flashing PAGE 8 is selected By pressing another button you can switch to a different PAGE 5 5 1 Channel Page When pressing both PAGE keys of the Channel M ode simultaneously the display will show a summary of the CHANNEL PAGES Or If in Channel Mode you can call up the summary for all Channel Pages by pressing the PAGE Keys in the display By clicking on the respective PAGE Keys you can call up the PAGE 5 5 2 Executor Fader Page When pressing both PAGE keys for
135. ENTER or EDIT hit executor EDIT FORM X ENTER or EDIT hit key in form pool EDIT M ACRO X ENTER or EDIT hit key in macro pool EDITTIM ECODE X ENTER or EDIT hit key in timecode pool EFFECT As starting keyword EFFECT ENTER EFFECT becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD EFFECT range list ENTER Start effects in range list Effect numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 999 Effects are numbered in a certain way Range Meaning 1 upwards User created effects 899 downwards Automatic created effects used by cuelists 900 upwards Temporary effects created from preset effects These effects are not visible in pools As target for the following operational keywords ASSIGN Assign an effect to an executor COPY Copy one effect to another DELETE Delete an effect EDIT Open edit menu for effect IF Deselect devices that are not included in effect IFOUTPUT Select devices that have stage output from the effect INSERT M OVE Change visible number of effect LABEL Change name of effect As target for the following executing commands GO Run forward start with fade in 167 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 GO Run backwards start with fade in gt gt gt Run forward no fade in lt lt lt Run backwards no fade in PAUSE Pause stand still OFF Switch off fading out ESC ESC Escape will progressively perform the following actions a Is there something
136. ER Using EXEC in this command will always link the remote to the middle executor button X must be in the range from 1 to 72 ODD is creating a sub selection from the current selection If you have selected 10 fixtures and the say ODD only the 1 3 5 7 and 9 fixture in this selection stays Selected The others become Temporarily deselected waiting to be fully selected again by the ALL command WOyE OFF As starting keyword every object that follows after the OFF will be switched MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de OFF OFF target object list FADE X DELAY Y ENTER If fade or delay are given they overwrite the default OFF time The default OFF times can be changed in the SETUP DEFAULTS menu Target type Operation EXEC Switch off executor EFFECT Switch off effect fading out TIMECODE Stop timecode show PAGE Does OFF on all its executors SPEEDM ASTER Does OFF on all programs using this speed master executor assigned to a speedmaster SUBMASTER Knock out all channels involved in this group CHANNEL FIXTURE and GROUP Knock out all given devices PRESET X Preset Type Knock out all channels of current selection of that preset type Knock out means to clear the programmer completely for a channel go back 10 undos Nevertheless a command like DELETE SEQU 1 THRU 10 deletes 10 seque
137. Examples Create the report of Cue No 2 3 4 and 5 of sequence 24 Enter the following on the CommandLine report_sequ_24 cue_2_thru_5 confirm with ENTER the report will appear on the right display the Cue values are arranged in columns the parameters of individual fixtures in rows To create the reports for sequences 1 2 and 3 enter the following on the CommandLine report_sequ_1_thru_3 confirm with ENTER the report for sequence 1 will appear on the right display the Cue values are arranged in columns the parameters of individual fixtures in rows With the arrow buttons you can switch to the next or previous report In the report folder you find the 3 files containing the reports To create the Report PRESET 1 PAN TILT enter the following on the CommandLine report_preset_1 1 confirm with ENTER the report for Preset 1 PAN TILT will appear on the right display the columns will display the names of the involved fixtures and the respective percentage value of PAN and TILT Use the Encoder to scroll down if not all rows are visible on the display To create the report WORLD 3 containing the names of all fixtures in World 3 enter the following on the CommandLine report_world_3 confirm with ENTER the report for sequence 1 will appear on the right display the Cue values are arranged in columns the parameters of individual fixtures in rows Use the Encoder to scroll down if not all rows are visible on the disp
138. FFECT In object lists it is including objects OBJECT 1 OBJECT2 In front of values it is changing the value to a positive relative value CHANNEL1 AT 10 ENTER will increase the dimmer value by 10 As a starting keyword and repeated is increasing the dimmer values of the current selection by 10 every time you press Minus As starting keyword reduces the current selection Everything that follows after the minus will be interpreted as a selection CHANNEL FIXTURE GROUP SEQU CUE EXEC PRESET EFFECT In object lists it is excluding objects OBJECT 1 THRU 10 OBJECT 2 In front of values it is changing the value to a negative relative value CHANNEL1 AT 10 ENTER will decrease the dimmer value by 10 As a starting keyword and repeated is decreasing the dimmer values of the current selection by 10 every time you press lt lt lt Go backwards with no time As starting keyword every object that follows after the lt lt lt will try to go back one step with zero fade time lt lt lt target object list ENTER Target type Operation EXEC Go backwards one step with no fade time EFFECT Start running backwards without fading in TIM ECODE Jump to the previous breakpoint PAGE Does a lt lt lt on all executors on that page SPEEDM ASTER Does a lt lt lt on all chases using that speed master executor assigned to a speed master gt gt gt Go forward with no time As starting keyword
139. GN press on the small Executor window press FUNCTION press BITM AP EFFECTS use the Encoder to select the effect and confirm by pressing on the Encoder if needed set the button and fader functions 5 1 3 Moving copying or deleting Executors Press the M OVE key once to move Executors LED is on Or Press the COPY key once to copy Executors LED is on Press the DELETE key once to delete Executors LED is on To move or copy an Executor button or a window above the Executor press or click on it once Pressing another Executor button or window above the Executor will set the new position Press an Executor button or on a window above the Executor once If there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows in which the moved or deleted Executors were to be used these assignments may no longer work PLAYBACK Master As the Groupmaster affects the assigned Groups the Playback M aster will have an effect on all assigned and active Playbacks The displayed value refers to the output Playback values This does not affect the AUTOSTART AUTOSTOP functions of the Sequences Creating and saving a Playback Master Click on an empty Executor Fader cell Press the Function button and in this menu the Special Master button Click on a Playback Master 1 8 Assigning a Sequence to a Playback M aster Open the Assign menu of the Sequence Press the MASTER button default is NONE Click on a Playback M ast
140. IXTURE As starting keyword FIXTURE ENTER FIXTURE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD FIXTURE range list ENTER Select fixtures in range list FIXTURE range list AT see AT Apply values to fixtures in range list Fixture numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 9999 as target for the following executing commands FLASH_UP As starting keyword every executor that follows after FLASH UP outputs all intensity channels of the current cue to 100 of their programmed value FLASH_UP executor list ENTER As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS every executor that follows after FLASH_UP returns all intensity channels of the current cue back to their previous state FLASH_UP executor list UNPRESS ENTER In an assign command this function can NOT be used You have to use the Assign menu for putting it on an executor button It is simply called OUT there Note It is almost impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line Rather use it when it is assigned to a button or in a macro FLASH_UP_OFF Same as FLASH_UP UNPRESS Please look at the FLASH_UP command description FORM As starting keyword it has no function FORM range list ENTER Form numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 999 169 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 As target for the following commands COPY Copy one form to another DELETE Delete a form EDIT
141. K all features included in cue GO UNPARK all features included in cue LOAD Prepare cue X as next cue for executor Z GOTO Executor Z is calling cue X DEF_GO Is performing a GO on the default executor DEF_GO Is performing a GO on the default executor DEF_PAUSE Is performing a PAUSE on the default executor DELAY 166 With executing keywords and executors Executing keyword Executor List DELAY X X ENTER The execution command is performed on all listed executors with a snap delay overwrite of X X seconds Does not work with PAUSE or flashing commands Giving individual delay times to fixtures or channels Selection AT DELAY X X TRHU Y Y ENTER Individual delays for the feature shown in the preset bar will be set to X X seconds If no selection is given the current selection is used Please note that the given delay may bea range In this case delays will be aligned over the given selection The given delays can be signed which will result in relative changes of individual delays Giving individual delays can be combined with giving individual fades and values into one AT command Clearing individual delays SELECTION AT DELAY ENTER Works very much like b but no value for the delay is given Setting default snap delay No selection present DELAY X X ENTER The next cue will be stored with X X seconds snap delay default for all snap channels As snap delay when storing a cue STOR
142. LAY and FADE 5 1 4 Move in Black Option Executor Defaults Default is Sequence Chaser With this key you can define whether a newly programmed sequence will be created as a Chaser one look after another running automatically or as a Sequence press go for cue 1 and then press go for ce 2 etc default setting Chase Fade Here you can define the preset for Chase Fade Chase Speed Here you can define the default Chase Speed and Effect Speed Readout By pressing the key you can here switch the Chaser Speed between BPM beats per minute Hz beats per second and SEC seconds The default Chaser Speed is also used as the default for the Effect Speed Crossfade Reload Permanent Here you can define whether manual cross fading should be performed just in one direction Reload or in both directions Permanent when moving a fader set to cross fade Remotes as stored use commandline as stored Its unpossible to merge commands from the desk with commands coming from a remote e g MIDI or Touchboard E g button GO and command OFF Exec 2 7 from touchboard the OFF command will be execuded use commandline default All remote commands Touchboard M IDI or REM OTE DM X IN not Pocket PC will be registered in the commandLine E g button GO and command OFF Exec 2 7 from touchboard the GO command is assigned to the executor the executor will be switched on Sheet Sorting By the SORTING column you define according to which as
143. LE USE MAX 10 USER MISFUNCTION CAN OCCURE IF MORE USER ARE LOADED 52 If a user loads a show for the very first time he has never used this show before this show will be loaded with the previously used profile and NOT with his personal user profile If needed the personal user profile can be loaded afterwards X 2 16 8 Saving or Loading Profiles User profiles are saved independently from the show and can thus be loaded for any other show afterwards Go to the Tools menu and User Setup Under User Profile List in the New line enter a name for a new profile Select the user cell under User List in the Profile column Press the Encoder select the profile and take over by pressing it again If this user is logged in the siehetings will be saved to this profile when saving the profile Save User Defaults If this user is not logged in he receives a message that his profile is empty Confirm this message and a selection menue pops up 1 select a profile 2 select what to copy button becomes dark green or select Everthing for complete profile confirm with LOAD SELECTED ITEMS User with rights higher than PLAYBACK can press LOAD USER PROFILE from Show and change profiles of other user not his own profile Save to Global User Profile save current settings independently from the actual show in your User Default Pro file Restore from Global User Profile load your User Default Profile independently from the actual show Load
144. LTP In NON TRACKING mode values will return to their defaults unless they are specifcally given a value in that cue Example Cue 10 is made up of only the information in Cue 10 M odications to earlier cues will have no effect on later cues Essentially cues no longer have a relationship between each other 5 4 TRACKING window Key A B or Split Xfade If the Split Xfade key is pressed displayed in dark this function is active item 5 1 3 Changing Faders Fader XF A and XF B Key Normal trigger If the Normal Trigger key is pressed this Sequence Chaser will be execute with the programmed triggers calls Pressing this key it will switch to Trigger is GO where after the Sequence Chaser can only be controlled by the GO button and will ignore Follow Sound and trigger times LTP Dimmers key pressed When playing back this sequence dimmer channels programmed into this sequence will override all other LTP Dimmer instances of these channels being played back regardless of level They will 109 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 g Exec 1 11 Seq 1 Seq 1 x Playback Options Button and Fader Assignment Function Auto Swop Fix Protect A B Normal Kill tigger Protect Move in Black Options Cuelist MB MiB Auto always never PrePos Res
145. Mail info malighting de Exec 1 11 Seq 4 Seq 1 MIB__ Trig Fade Outfade _ Dela GO Os i Os AN x 5 What Do You Want to Copy sE Press the CUE key once LED is on Using the keypad enter the number of the first Cue to be moved If only one Cue is to be moved continue with the AT key Pressing the Key will move the selected cue and the cue indicated by the subsiquent number Pressing the THRU kKey on the keypad will move the Cues from to including last Cue When pressing the Key the Cue with the next number will be excluded from the move operation Press the AT key once LED is on Enter the new number for the moved Cues using the keypad Example The Cues are to be inserted between Cue 10 and Cue 11 Number these Cues e g as 10 1 possible Cue numbers are 10 001 10 999 This way up to 999 Cues can be inserted between two existing Cues Confirm with ENTER When moving one Cue the COPY window will open After pressing the key on the left of Statuscopy you can choose between During the moving process only the values and times actually stored in this Cue will be moved Tracked information will be ignored The Cue will be moved as it would actually be realized on stage That means all previous steps will be taken into account and the result will be moved By pressing the button on the left of Cue Only you can choose between Normal movin
146. Menu x Actions Copy Merge User Data Is Merged Into MY Se Cleanu Unchanged Items Remove Already imported Items 182 with MATCH all overlapping channels are displayed you must choose which fixtures to overwrite in the current Setup Overwriting objects even partially in the current Setup can affect the whole show after starting the operation with 2x OK the modification cannot be undone any more If you do select none the fixtures of the current Show are kept the fixtures in the left half of the menu keep their green background with NO MATCH you find all fixtures that do not overlap i e that can be taken over without having been selected The Imaps on the left side current setup also can be selected they will be deleted from current setup NEW here lamps are displayed you are importing from loaded show into the current show color has changed from grey to green IGNORED here lamps are displayed you will not import into the current setup lamps in the right part color stays grey or lamps which are deleted from the current show lamps in the left part color has changed from green to grey select the fixtures and press on the Encoder next to the screen the colors of the selected fixtures will change or Select in the WIZARD NO NEW DEVICES DEFAULT will always be executed if no other change was entered Here you cannot change the
147. Message Dimmer 001 01 3 1 Unknown Circuit Breaker has tripped Dimmer 001 01 3 1 Unknown Circuit Breaker was switched on again Dimmer 001 01 3 1 Unknown Circuit Breaker was switched on again 17 1 NDP Configuration NDP Configuration You can use this menu to configure an MA Dimmer cabinet Fault messages and status reports are shown in the NETWORK DIMMER menu Please read the NDP manual if you wish to configure the dimmers it can be downloaded from our homepage Connecting the NETWORK DIMMER PROCESSOR NDP with the grandMA Press TOOLS Press NDP CONFIGURATION The NDP Configurations menu appears IP The IP network addresses of the devices MAC The MAC addresses of the devices NAME This displays the entered name of the device The name can be entered or changed with EDIT STATUS yellow JOINING the network connection is being constructed please wait a moment green DAT OPEN the network connection is active SESSION ID This displays the ID number All devices intended to work together in a session have to have the same SESSION ID number The ID number can be changed with EDIT and pressing the relevant field RACK No This displays the number of the displayed racks MA NETWORK DIMMER Click an empty screen and press the button NETWORK DIMMER in the section OTHER The MA NETWORK DIMMER menu appears Here you can acknowledge all fault and status reports and faults 203 grand MA
148. OWS and vertical COLUM NS Enter the horizontal and vertical distances of the fixtures the resulting total value may however may not exceed the stage size Confirm using the OK button you can move the layout without changing the m with POSITION L Single Create a layout Here you can create layouts that can later be assigned to a Bitmap effect open the LAYOUT VIEW menu using CREATE A WINDOW press CHOOSE LAYOUT and use the Encoder to select confirm a free layout number in the overview open the OPTIONS press the yellow button in the upper left corner press SETUP to open the MANIPULATE SETUP LAYOUT menu click on the LABEL line and enter a name for the layout confirm with ENTER select the fixtures to be used in the layout on the STAGE FIXTURE or CHANNEL Sheet enter the values for ROWS and COLUMNS number of rows and columns making the grid pressing on the digit cell will open the Calculator after entering the values confirm with ENTER The menu will now show the selected grid where you can place your fixtures Transferring fixtures into the layout MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 WaldbUttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Manipulate Setup Layout x Label Take Mouse Selection Frame Add Selection Clean PR Frame Remove Colum Frame Wizard Left gt Right Top gt Bottom Fill Ho
149. P executor list ENTER As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS every executor that follows after SWOP reduces the intensity of all programmed dimmer channels to 0 while restoring the intensity of all other executors to 100 SWOP executor list UNPRESS ENTER In an assign command this function can NOT be used You have to use the Assign menu to define it on an executor s button Note It is nearly impossible to use this command by typing it into the command line Use it when it is assigned to a button or as part of a macro SWOP_OFF Same as SWOP UNPRESS Please look at the SWOP command description grand MA TEMP As starting keyword every executor that follows after TEMP performs a GO if it wasn t already running TEMP executor list ENTER As starting keyword combined with UNPRESS every executor that follows after TEMP is switched OFF TEMP executor list UNPRESS ENTER TIM ECODE As starting keyword TIM ECODE ENTER TIM ECODE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD TIM ECODE range list ENTER Does nothing Timecode numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 200 As target for the following operational keywords COPY Copy one timecode show to another DELETE Delete a timecode show EDIT Open edit menu for timecode show INSERT M OVE Change visible number of timecode show LABEL Change name of timecode show As target for the following executing commands GO Start playback P
150. PAN No Name Range Visualize Range Erta Mode e PAN 0255 Pan 270 00 270 00 Always No Name Range Visualize Extra Mode Open 0 0 Color 2 Red 8 24 Color 3 Yellow 25 41 Color 4 Violet 42 58 Color 2 7 Function Sets Names Channel Values and Presets In this menu you can create or adjust so called Channel Values names for the individual functions e g GOBO These names will then be displayed in the Fixture Sheet instead of the number value Furthermore you can assign different graphic parameters like e g colors or Gobos that will then additionally be displayed in the Fixture Sheet These data will also be needed for the visualization on the grandMA 3D These names and values are used when creating Presets in the Auto Create menu 2 11 Auto Create Creating Presets Effects and Group buttons automatically Presets will not be created automatically if for the Ranges of Names and Visualize values from X up to Y are indicated e g 10 21 Otherwise always see column AutoGen Open this menu by pressing the Function Sets button in the Fixture Types menu see 2 pages earlier Listing of the individual columns and their functions No Listing of the created names and appropriate values If a number is displayed in red and with an asterisk this line has been modified Name This name will only be displayed if the value indicated for Range is reached There are exceptions that
151. Port 8 USER DEFINED 123 125 USER Library 42 User Management 49 User Profile List 52 User Profiles 50 User profiles 52 V VALUE 176 VALUES 12 154 Variable functions 34 Ventilation 5 vibrations 45 VIEW 176 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu 130 VIEW assigning a 56 VIEW button 8 56 VIEW deleting a 78 View Macro Button 3 View Pool 56 VIEW saving a 56 VIEWBTN 176 VIEWS 54 Violett bar 127 Virtual Form creating a 130 Virtual Form modifying a 131 Virtual Form self created two dimensional 125 Virtual Form two dimensi onal 130 Visualize 33 VISUALIZE FORMS 125 W Weight 30 Weights and Dimensions 4 Wheel 44 59 74 Window creating a 53 Window deleting aw 55 Window enlarge a 55 Wing 126 WIZZARD Stage Setup 84 World Filte 52 World pool 195 Worlds 54 195 WRAP 73 Wrap 73 X x axis 35 XF A B 106 XFADE 106 XYZ SUPPORT 31 Y Yellow dot 65
152. Preset Feature and Attribute Setup Attention This menu is important and can influence all of your programming press Full or Live Access open Attribute Setup The number of Preset groups is fix and cannot be modified Furthermore the names displayed in red can t either be changed or deleted Changing the names of Preset groups Features and Attributes 27 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Maie Y i imal ina Can Mal Hin Latin 2 Ried Fics Siy Fniss And Cun Nat Be Chords 28 Click on a name change it using the keyboard and confirm with Enter The modifications will only be executed and saved after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the SAVE button The new name will now be displayed in the respective Preset window or in the Fixture window Creating an additional Feature in a Preset group When creating new scanners or adjusting of present ones you possibly need additional Features and Attributes Select a Preset group Click into the empty cell below the present Features Enter a name for the new Feature using the keyboard e g Gobo 4 and confirm with Enter The same name is automatically taken over and will be displayed in the Fixture window on the right side If you want to use a different name change it as indicated further above Now you still have to create Attributes for this Feature Click into the first cell below the name Enter a name using th
153. RE ENCODER WINDOW press STORE The Encoder window displays the setting of 3 areas of the OPTION menu The settings can be changed for the following STORE process temporarily from the pull up menus On the next STORE the very setting will reappear that was defined in the Option menu 4 1 3 Overwriting a Cue If you wish to overwrite a Cue completely simply use the same EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button once again The following window will appear In order to overwrite this cue completely press the OVERWRITE key If the executor contains more than one cue you will have to be specific about which cue you want to Store 4 2 Programming Sequences 4 1 4 Merging a Cue When merging cues all existing and stored settings will be maintained The newly set values will be stored and added to the cue while already existing values will be overwritten If you wish to merge a cue simply use the same EXECUTOR Fader or EXECUTOR button once again The SAVE STORE window will appear as above In order to merge this cue press the M ERGE key If the executor contains more than one cue you will have to be specific about which cue you want to store 4 2 Programming Sequences 4 1 5 Removing a Cue In the removing operation the active values red will be subtracted from the already existing cue If you wish to remove from a cue simply use the same EXECUTOR Fader or EXECUTOR button once again The STORE window will appear as above In order to rem
154. SCALE 128 STAGE 26 Stage 30 32 54 Stage Flip 86 stage size 20 Stage window 83 Stage Fenster 86 STARTLINE 98 Start New Session 193 Start Speed 128 Statuscopy 97 STORE 16 154 175 STORE encoder window 89 STORE ENCODER WINDOW 89 STORE LED 56 Store Options 88 Store Realease 88 Store Source 88 STRETCH POSITION 85 SUB NET addresses 38 SubNet 39 subnet mas 205 Summer Time 48 SWAP 106 SWOP 107 175 SWOP_OFF 175 Sync Start 128 T Table 124 TEMP 107 175 Temp 106 Temporary Views 55 TEST OUT 20 Throw Out Station 194 THRU 175 TILTNORMAL 65 TILT OFFSET 31 TIME 17 63 71 91 Time automatically according to set 95 Time Scaling Chaser 102 Time Scaling Sequence 95 Time summer 48 TIMECODE 54 140 175 Timecode Midi 141 Timecode new 140 TIMECODE Show 113 TOGGLE 107 175 Toggle Curve 35 Toolbarim PDA 208 TOOLS 154 TOP 107 175 TOUCH_BTN 176 Touchboard Remote Control vial 149 Touchscreen 5 43 93 TRACKBALL 59 Trackball 9 47 TRACKBALL Sensitivity of the 44 TRACKING 17 53 91 TRACKING mode 109 TRACKING Window 116 TRACKINGSHEET OPTIONS 116 TRIANGLE 123 TRIGGER 87 94 TRIGGER changing the 95 Triggermonitor 47 TROUBLE SHOOTING 218 True Tracking Playback 191 Type 30 U Unblock 117 Unmoveable 29 UNPRESS 176 UPDATE 101 129 154 176 UPDATE Cue 76 UPDATE Presets 76 Update processor 223 UPDATE Software 183 185 Updating the Fixtures Library 31 USB 8 USB
155. STORE a view and assign it to the view button MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Backup Menu x lt Doral HardDisk Archive Media LOAD Show gt SAVE Show AS pl Partial Show Read Hard Disk DELETE Show Disk gt a gt SAVE Show SAVE Show Enumerate F a Demo Shows Berge lt Smery Append Enep read only p T Fite a Show Currently Loaded Quick Save N E Sh ON increments Automatically 4810 peti Show File Number create Backup OFF creates Backup Files every Compressed Show 5 1 rea 48100 SHO foc 15 min Load Show will Overwrite Console Memory 15 00 Save Show will Overwrite Your Show File Save Show Enumerate will Create a NEW Show File De not use Autosave in extremely loud environments and during live situations Quick Save Archive Media for Auto Save Hard Disk amp File Server _ Archive Media for Quick Save Hard Disk Auto Save ON increments Show File Number OFF creates Backup Enumerate ON Automatically create Backup Files every 15 min Archive Media for Quick Save Herd Disk 15 60 Archive Media for Auto Save Hard Disk amp File Server grand MA Select Show File to Save Director 02 25 04 13 09 02 25 04
156. Scanners or just Dimmer channels or all Scanners and Dimmers for programming purposes and what is even more important to run Executors Creating Worlds e g In a World the Scanners 1 10 are saved with the Dimmer and Color function If you call up this World only these Scanners will be displayed in the Fixture Sheet Furthermore only the Dimmer and Color functions can be modified In the Channel or Fader Sheet the Dimmer channels will no longer be displayed Selecte Scanner or Dimmer channels If you just want to store some Scanner attributes you can activate these by double clicking on them these Attributes will be displayed in red for the selected Scanners Press the STORE key shortly By clicking a button in the World pool the World will be stored and operational You can also give it a name directly by using the keyboard If not all Attributes are stored in a World this will be indicated by a small red triangle in the left upper corner of the appropriate button Working with Worlds For the programming creating the Show Worlds are a great deal of help when it comes to creating Cues If you select a World only the assigned Scanner and Dimmer channels will be displayed ready to be modified and stored NOTE Starting a console will always reload the last setting if a World was active when the console was shut down last time only this World will be displayed on the next start In the stage window only fixtures of th
157. Sequence selection Link Last Go This displays the sequence that was last started with GO or ON The sequence name is shown in the top bar of the CONTENT Sheet Link Selected Always select Selected Sequence here the small executor window has a light green background Not Linked Here you have to select a sequence in the CONTENT SHEET OPTIONS menu The sequence name is shown in the top bar of the CONTENT Sheet AUTO SCROLL when the button is activ has dark background automatically the actuell cue is diplayed NEXT and LAST CUE not activated or the next cue is displayed NEXT CUE is activated or the previous cue cue will be shown LAST CUE is activated The actuell running cue number and the shown cue number is displayed in the title bar E g act 2cue showing 3cue Cue 2 is running and cue 3 is displayed in the Content Sheet therefore NEXT CUE is activated Next Cue only in mode AUTO SCROLL If the button is activated dark background the next cue is displayed This means that if cue 2 of the sequence is active cue 3 is displayed and the cue number appears in the headline If the last cue is already shown the display jumps to the first cue again Last Cue only in mode AUTO SCROLL If the button is activated dark background the previous cue is displayed This means that if cue 2 of the sequence is active cue 1 is displayed and the cue number appears in the headline If the first cue is already shown the display
158. Sheets affected by the Blind mode will change from blue to red The Blind mode differs as follows from the stage output all other Sheets are available changes in presets can be saved in Blind mode and when switching to stage output the old value will still be visible changes in SETUP will also be visible in the stage output sequences effects groups etc that you delete while in Blind mode will also be deleted in the stage output PDA will show the respective mode without indication whether it is the Blind mode or the stage output To switch off the Blind mode Hold the BLIND key until you hear the beep and the key LED goes out After switching over all changes made in Blind mode will immediately be active in the stage output LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 3 11 Stage window with SETUP and FOLLOW modes The stage window can be used in the 3 different modes NORMAL FOLLOW SETUP NORMAL mode The window will display all fixtures in their stage positions white lines indicating the direction and intensity of Chait Patt Ty _ the light The fixtures can only be selected here ik Atinbwls ae nag Iny Mateut eiii Erana UMM Fedi Puste sialan FOLLOW mode thie Gernly IN this mode you can focus individual fixtures or groups having virtual X Y and Z axes on a deliberate point on 2 Value PIR PRS
159. Statio Full Tracking ST 15 2 Preparing a Session also neeeded to run NSPs Stations in Network Session No Name Status IP eduart 6e3516Standalot 3201 The left table will show all sessions stating its names and the Unconnected group all not connected consoles If a session is displayed with a red background you can only log into this session using a password join above item 3 Forced Login When clicking on a session blue background the units of this selected session will be displayed in the right table My Station IP Address 92 16 The right table will only show the units of the selected session also grandM A Offline and grandMA 3D If a unit is displayed with a red background it is not enabled for network connections above item Allow Invitations The Master priority will only interest you when you want to create sessions with more than 3 units By clicking into the cell here Normal you can switch between Low Normal or High The unit with the highest priority will always have the Master function in a session no matter regardless of which device the session was started Invitation Remote Station This is where the current status will be displayed M aster Slave or Idle 192 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH MA Network Connections Rtandalnne x lt Active N
160. TE Fixtures the beams of which cannot reach the preset position will go to Blackout this way no undefined positions will be triggered or The wheel affects dimmer values only or Any value may be altered by clicking and holding on it with the middle mouse key and moving the mouse For storing settings 4 Cues and Sequences For creating Presets 3 7 Creating and calling up Presets To call up or create Effects 6 Effects If you wish to modify the selection or the activated values of the fixtures Press the CLEAR key When pressing the CLEAR key the first time the selection of fixtures will be deselected from the OUTPUT window yellow characters turn grey The modified active values will be kept and displayed with red background Press the CLEAR key again When pressing the CLEAR key the second time the activation of modified values will be canceled they will no longer have a red background Press the CLEAR key one more time When pressing the CLEAR key the third time all modified values will be reset default or to their original setting prior to the activation After pressing the CLEAR key for the first time the yellow LED in this key will flash This means that only the selection was deleted When you select other fixtures or dimmer channels now the yellow LED will no longer flash 59 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 OFF The selektion of single fixtures can be dele
161. TNET DM X ETHERNET CONFIGURATION You can call up this menu by pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column if the PathPort protocol has been selected It is possible to connect up to 16 Ethernet DM X Converter On the DM X converters unique SUB NET addresses have to be designated accordingly The address switches of the individual DM X sockets have to be set to four dif ferent addresses The settings modified on the DM X converter can be overwritten by software Artnet Note Configuration next page If Artnet converters are connected they will be searched for and displayed in the chart when calling up this menu If the converter is being activated after opening the menu you can search for the converter by pressing LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de ARTNET Node Configuration Shortname Fronttruss Longname Fronttruss scanns and pars Manufacturer Unknown Manufacture IP 2 10 37 Version 100 SubSwitch a Reset to Local Control Status 0006 0007 Short Name Stored PathPort DMX Ethemet Configuration Available Nodes Nob Dew Skt herso ck o di D 5 2 ONE OXT 1 Sose 1 D Prsessaters for Ethernet ONMX Output DMX Swt F Coment 1 Nome wA SAVE X Sean for the Scan for Nodes key to insert the converter in the chart if one is found In the left chart all converters found w
162. Type stands on Mirror and can be switched to Head by selecting the cell using the Encoders to the right of the Display Type Adjust the values for MIB Delay and MIB Fade if needed The settings for BeamAngle Power Lumen and Weight will only be needed for the visualization in the Stage window or on the grandMA 3D and can be adjusted if need be In the New column click on the Attribute cell and open the Select Attribute window by pressing on the Encoder right to the Display Now select the function for the first channel and accept it by pressing the Encoder one more time Automatically the next line will be selected The DUMMY Function is meant for fixed channels The output value for this channel has to be set in the DEFAULT 31 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 32 LIGH column This channel can not be modified in the FIXTURE SHEET If you finished selecting all Scanner functions you can proceed with the presets Presets are Type Snap Inv Default can be adjusted with the left Encoder Highlight can be adjusted with the second Encoder Stage presently without any function MIB FADE can be adjusted with the right Encoder Profil Speed 2 5 Listing of the individual functions in the EDIT FIXTURE menu The values are displayed as percentages and can be switched to decimal or hexadecimal by pressing the Percent button For the individual
163. UE If no BASE VALUE ist set the Cue that is playing back or a direct access value will take effect You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value 3 4 1 ALIGN function Offset By modifying the Offset the starting points for the selected Fixtures and Dimmers will change Default setting is between 0 and 360 i e the first Fixture Dimmer starts with an offset of 0 the last with a maximum offset of 360 all Fixtures Dimmers in between will be distributed evenly The maximum limit for Offset modifications that can be set is from 360 to 360 Before modifying the value of a size select the Effect first Press the OFFSET key once green background Now you can set a different Offset using the Encoder below Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the value to 0 You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value 3 4 1 ALIGN function Rate Display of the set ratio between the speed for this individual Effect as to that of the whole Effect Group Possible settings range between 1 16 and 4 1 At a ratio of 1 16 the rate set for the Effect Group will be divided by 16 If the setting is 4 1 the rate will be multiplied by four Before modifying the ratio s value select the Effect first Press the RATE FACTOR key once green background Now you can set a different ratio using the Encoder below Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the value to 1 1 Grp Group Display of the set number by wh
164. UE X SEQUENCE Y ENTER CUE X EXEC Y Z ENTER CUE X hit executor SEQUENCE X ENTER or hit key in Will edit first cue of sequence X sequence pool window Although a group has no values group pool windowthe selection can be edited PRESET X ENTER or hit preset type on Will edit first non empty preset the preset control bar of fixture sheet of type X PRESET X Y ENTER or hit key in preset pool window Continue EDIT UPDATE procedure with NEXT PREVIOUS object EDIT NEXT ENTER EDIT PREVIOUS ENTER If you use the NEXT and PREVIOUS hard keys ENTER is not necessary Next and previous will continue edit update with the next previous non empty object in the context of the current edit object GROUP X ENTER or hit key in the Examples EDIT PRESET 1 ENTER Starts edit update for first non empty PAN TILT preset EDIT NEXT goes on to the next non empty PAN TILT preset EDITSEQUENCE 1 ENTER Starts edit update for first cue EDIT NEXT goes on to second cue Together with the HIGHLIGHT function EDIT NEXT is a very powerful tool to for checking your stage presets Opening an edit screen Some objects can not be edited in the programmer They have edit screens to manipulate them Only one edit menu for only object can be open at one time If you open an edit menu for an object all other edit menus will close Edit menus can be closed with the ESC key EDIT EFFECT X ENTER or EDIT hit key in effect pool EDIT EXEC X Y
165. Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH Store Options c as default Store Source Filter or ae gogog Store Values If not empty ml an ee E E E E a an f o tor peoe Eis Eee a zalili Selected Selected Preset Options E Prose E E E Yes oN i ve I Direct Activation 4 1 Creating Cues separate memories The actual stage setting can be stored as a Cue and be called up via the EXECUTOR buttons or faders All changed active values recommended setting all momentary settings complete Output or all values of the selected Fixtures and channels can be stored as Cues 4 1 1 Creating new Cues Create the look on stage by direct access or presets 3 4 and 3 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly or 3 7 Calling up Presets This look shall now be stored as CUE in the following way Press the STORE key and hold it The following options and encoder names will appear on the right TFT display Press one of the following keys selected key will receive dark grey background colour Active Values Store only the active values all values in the FIXTURE CHANNEL window which are shown with a red background colour All Store all settings all fixture and channel values All for Selected Devices All values of the selected fixtures and channels will be stored the fixture channel numbers will be marked in yellow Release the STORE key LED stays on F
166. XTURE Sheet the violet or white triangle shows which value is being entered into the active Sheet using the Encoder in the SPEED graphics in the Fixture Sheet select the FEATURE to be executed by the modulator here Dimmer in the Fixture Sheet Inthe Select menu select for which features the modulator values are supposed to be valid In order to do so press on the right arrow and select using the Encoder confirm by pressing on the Encoder or select the menu by pressing on the text button SINGLE only the attribute selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet will be changed SINGLE for ACTIVE only the attributes selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet and now being active will be changed FEATURE only the feature selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet will be changed FEATURE for ACTIVE only the features selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet and now being active will be changed ALL all attributes of the selected fixture will be changed ALL for ACTIVE all attributes selected from the Fixture or Channel Sheet and now being active will be changed DEFINED onlythedefined attributes will be changed In order to do so press on the left arrow and select the desired attributes from the menu attributes with a green background have been selected this setting remains valid for the period that the show remains loaded DEFINED for ACTIVE only the defined and active attributes will be changed select a modulat
167. _ALL CLEAR_ACTIVE Clears the activation in the programmer without destroying stage output CLEAR_ALL Clears the selection Clears the activation Clears the programmer totally all values returned to default or to playback control ODD EVEN Sub selection is reset to ALL CLEAR_SELECTION Clears the selection No device is selected ODD EVEN Sub selection is reset to ALL COPY COPY source objects AT destination objects ENTER Source objects a range list of objects which are all of type X Destination objects a range list of objects which are all of type Y Object types X and Y must be equal or compatible Source object types Compatible destination object types EXEC EXEC FADERBUTION 123 FADERBUTION 1 2 3 DM X_BUTTON DM X_BUTTON MIDI_ BUTTON MIDI_ BUTTON TOUCH_BTN TOUCH_BTN Currently there are some limitations for copying CUES 1 A range list of cues can be a Asingle cue e g CUE 1 b A range of cues e g CUE 1 THRU 10 2 Also the destination object must be a CUE Therefore the syntax COPY CUE 1 SEQU 1 ATSEQU 2 ENTER is not allowed Instead you must write COPY CUE 1 SEQU 1 ATCUE 2 SEQU 2 ENTER Please note that CUE 1 SEQU 1 equals the term SEQU 1 CUE 1 Whenever the term contains CUE you are copying CUES CUE General Format Expression Normal meaning CUE Current active cue of running default executor IncaseofSTORE New cueat the end in default executor CUE X Cue X of default execu
168. a 75 ohm coaxial cable RG 58U with male BNC U connectors on both ends The maximum cable run is up to 180 metres from end to end All connections to any kind of networking units like consoles PCs or Hubs require the use of a T connector which has to be connected to the BNC output of the console Extension cords are not permitted T connector to be used with10 Base 2 network nodes A Any connection cable used for 10 Base 2 EtherNet has to be terminated on both ends with 75 ohm resistors If eS these resistors are disconnected or of the wrong value no network operation will be possible Line termination on 10 Base 2 network 10 Base 2 EtherNet can be used for grandMA master slave connections when no ArtNet DM X Nodes or other distribution equipment is planned to be used For longer cable runs or distributed networks 10 Base 2 EtherNet is not recommended any more LNT ee a iii i Ba BH Two grandMA consoles connected on a 10 Base 2 network 199 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 16 4 2 10 Base T EtherNet The most common EtherNet connection is the twisted pair link using 10 Base T EtherNet Hereby a peer to peer connection is established by minimum 4 wire cable connection at a maximum length of 100 metres The cable is always equipped with 8 pole RJ 45 crimp connectors Twisted pair cable to be used for 10 Base T with RJ 45 conn
169. activate TOOLS MA NETWORK MULTIUSER on the console IP addresses do not correspond The first three groups of the IP have to be identical e g 192 168 177 xxx the figures of the forth group here xxx have to differ for each device connected The 3D version is not compatible to the console software the first three figures of the version number have to correspond 4 36X Some anti virus programs like e g NORTON ANTIVIRUS can disturb the interplay with the 3D deactive these programs Hard disk failure or not present or cable disconnected Repairs should be performed by a service technician see hotline contact on the bottom margin Flash corrupt not present or bad contact Repairs should be performed by a service technician see hotline contact on the bottom margin The patch number used for patching has to correspond to the fixture address if e g fora moving head the figures do not correspond or Moving Heads or Scanners are hanging in 90 or 180 angles on the traverse what do have to consider when using the PAN TILT function When loading a new show from the hard disk the console will freeze showing the message REBOOTING PLEASE WAIT After resetting using the yellow button on the rear side of the console the show will load When starting a sequence using the Executor button or the Executor fader the fixtures will not light up on the stage but the Channel Sheet shows some values nothing in th
170. al for all of the units However tow 1 external monitor can be connected The UPS Functions as well as the 2048 4096 channels are also fully supported as on the grandM A or grandMA light Connectors for external keyboard mouse and monitor are located on the rear of the unit these are not included as standard Encoder Trackerball Wheel more than 5 Executor Faders and 5 Executor But tons as well as quite a few other keys on the grandMA and grandMA light are not available with this unit Nevertheless most of the functions except for the executors can be reached and activated using the mouse and tow external monitor 14 2 2 Working with Mouse Keyboard and Monitor With these tools almost all functions of the grandM A can be operated on this unit The 3 keys of the mouse will take on the functions of the keys on the console All required keys such as CUE COPY NEXT a s o have to be set up as Quikeys in advance 9 2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS so that they can be operated via the mouse Values within the fixture or channel sheets can be modified with the middle mouse key A Command Field will appear on the monitor when clicking on those fields above the non existing encoders You can operate this Command Field with the mouse also 14 2 3 Working in Stand Alone Mode Playback This means working with the Replay Unit without the use of external mouse keyboard and monitor In this mode you can only activate Playback via the e
171. all possibilities of using comand line entry 10 3 1 Key word classifications In the following descriptions the term starting keyword will appear often This starting keyword is a keyword that you start a new command line operation with Basic operational keywords A basic operational keyword in the command line determins a basic operation These keywords can only appear as starting keyword in the command line The only exception from this rule is the AT command AT can follow a list of object keywords and will still be interpreted as operational keyword Operational keywords expect object keywords as targets for their operation Sometimes they also use helping keywords Keyword Operation ASSIGN Assign one object to another like assigning a sequence to an executor AT operational form Set a value to something Make a copy of an object DELETE Delete an object EDIT Edit an object IFOUTPUT Create a selection depending on an objects stage output INSERT Insert an object at another location INVERT Invert the selection LABEL Change name of an object MOVE Move an object to another location PREVIEW Have a look at an object without stage output STORE Store data into an object UPDATE Update data of active object Active objects create stage output Executing Keywords Executing keywords may be used as starting keywords or as source in an assign operation As starting keywords they expect object keywords as targets
172. all units By pressing the Save and Reboot button the new address will be saved and the console be restarted Define console name This is where the name of the console is displayed This name will be displayed on each unit in the network and will facilitate the assignment of individual units in larger networks To change just click on the name overwrite it in the window that will open and confirm Define the station name Define the station priority Set Invitation to Enable Its possible to invite this console to a session Disabled Its unposssible to invite this console 191 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 define the session ID number Ervery member of a session must connect the session with this ID number define the session name to set the Session Password option If another user wants to log into this session he has to do so using this password to set the Session Style Full Tracking Preset for Backup System or Single User will automatically switch to schaltet sich automatisch um auf Multi User if a session with multiple consoles is opened Password Multi User Preset for Multi User systems NOTE In Multi User mode you should use special network switches e g PROCURVE SWITCH 2524 managable switch Our hotline will gladly advise you on setting up your network accordingly My State display MASTER SLAVE Style Remote
173. an empty key FLIP Moving Head Fixtures this function is used to control the manner in which a Moving head fixture moves between two positions Pressing 1x The head will be turned so that it is pointing to the same position but with different values for Pan amp Tilt All lights that have 360 degrees or more of Panand270 degrees of tilt can point at the same position using two or more sets of Pan amp Tilt values Pressing 2x For fixtures with more than 360 degrees of Pan a third set of Pan and Tilt values is possible while still pointing to the same position on stage If the fixture only has 360 degrees of movment it will return to its original position Pressing 3x The head will be returned to the original position When using head Fixtures the FIXTURE SHEET will show a yellow square left of the PAN value symbolizing the current head position Mirror Fitxures The PAN TILT value will be inverted the mirror will be positioned so to easily allow the creatation of symetrical looks 154 Flip reacts as well to the Preset M aster Fader see chap 3 7 3 Flip can be faded either with a set time Set Time setting or cross faded with the fader M anual Fade setting minus Minus key STORE STORE key EDIT EDIT key UPDATE UPDATE key ESCAPE ESCAPE key ENTER ENTER key ALL SELECTION Reselects all FIXTURES and CHANNELS this is normally used after working with the NEXT PREV ODD SELECTION Selects all
174. an switch off this sequence _Action Master F Speed F Fade F MFade By pressing the Edit Window button you open the assigned sequence in the Edit menu 4 3 Editing Sequences If the LOOPS key is pressed the programmed jumps and commands will be displayed in the Sheet If the EFFECTS key is pressed the calls of the Effect Groups are displayed 4 3 Editing Sequences If the LINK DEFAULT key of the title bar is pressed the selected sequence will automatically be transferred to the EXECUTOR window when changing the selected sequence Assigning the selected sequence 1 9 Layout and Controls items 9 and 10 If you press the AUTO SCROLL key the Sheet will be automatically moved upwards downwards when working with larger Sequences Without prior changing the buttons shows INFO EFFECTS LOOPS amp LINKS TIMES ALL and AUTO SCROLL at the upper bar All buttons except AUTO SCROLL can be renamed and the view can be edited AUTO SCROLL If AUTO SCROLL key is pressed the chart will automatically move to top bottom when handling larger sequences Editing the displays CEES Vow Modo Prete AUTO SCROLL can not be edited Select a sequence in the Executor Sheet or press the small executor window abov ethe fader Click the button with the right mouse button or press EDIT and pres the requested button The menu Cuelist Display Options opens All attributes in the EXCLUDED column will be not shown in t
175. and Add on option Cue Lists in Tracking or Non Tracking M ode Optionally insert in Cue Only M ode 14 3 12 Playback Options Free assignment between Program Pool and Playback faders or Playback buttons Playback via fader or GO button with stored timings Chaser effects with Auto Run Audio or manual X Fade Auto Loop Single Reverse Bounce Random Sequence with individual timings per step Go button mode Auto Timed Sound Steps can include loops with counter or timer 14 3 14 Executor Faders and Buttons Executor faders and buttons with multiple assignment options Working mode of faders and buttons can be freely assigned Optionally assignment of several executors for one single cue list A block of special function buttons can be applied to any executor 14 3 14 Fader working modes Brightness M aster in HTP or LTP M ode Manual X Fade Speed Fade Time Rate for chaser and sequences 14 3 15 Button working modes ON OFF GO GO Pause Flash up and Flash down Fast GO and GO lt lt lt and gt gt gt without fades 14 3 16 Output Listings and Cuelist Protocols Infading or outfading values of main sequence is marked in different colours in the channel list Lists of sequences including names of steps and times Parameter modifications directly in the spreadsheet 14 3 17 Overwriting a program sequence Constant access to all effects and channels
176. and MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 LIGHT the small executor window above the executor Start this cue with the GO button Cues within the Mastersequence can be directly loaded Press GOTO key twice LED is on Enter Cue number using the keypad and confirm with ENTER The Cue will be loaded and displayed as next red blinking background in the small executor window P Up cue with the GO button 2 9Playing back sequences or chasers Using the EXECUTOR button you can playback the stored Sequences directly If the green LED on the button is lit a Cue or a Sequence of cues is stored on this button If the yellow LED is lit or is flashing this Cue Sequence of cues or Chaser a sequence which as been told to run automatically is activated The yellow LED indicates the beat of a Chaser Push up the respective M aster Fader for the EXECUTOR faders to see the dimmer values Playback Cues using the Go button standard setting is button below the Fader If the green LED in the button above the Fader is on a Cue or a Sequence is stored on this button If the yellow LED is on or is flashing this Cue the Sequence or the stored Chaser is activated The yellow LED indicates the beat of a Chaser Using the PAGE keys you can select other pages 5 5 PAGE Administration PAGE With the Fader to the right of the EXECUTOR buttons you can either set fixed fade times or perform manual fade
177. ane i naar Baha Whee Whee 1 Always as a Values Inside Functional Block Ranga E Ezta non r bier Npnn hap Sa 54 Clay Pakp DG 2 bmp s 31 Ulay Pek phlei Lng 127 127 Clay PakySMG 13lan Range Input Range N In ORR x a Bee t Bae Cec J Thee F E 3 4 10 SM ART Window The SM ART window offers you an overview of all features and attributes of the selected fixtures as well as very fast way to change save and delete Channel Values Using the EDIT command and the respective feature you can instantly jump into the FUNCTIONS SETS menu and after exiting this menu back into the SM ART window In the context of the M A VIDEO software the SM ART window holds some especially interesting features NOTE Although the SM ART function on first sight might seem to be equivalent to the PRESET function you should use SM ART only for those hardware settings that remain unchanged most of the time For show depending settings that have to be adjusted quickly you should use the PRESET function Use CREATE WINDOW to open the SMART window As long as no fixture has been selected the window is empty the fixture s features will only be displayed after having been selected If different fixtures were selected at the same time green buttons show features for all selected fixtures yellow buttons show features for some of the selected fixtures 1 grey button Indicates an empty button to accept new settin
178. annel this means even though the sequence is running this channel can be used by another sequence chaser etc till this channel gets an value in a following cue In the left shown example the dimmer no 2 during cue 3 and 6 can be used by another playback of course also in cue 1 If no other playback is running using this channel there is no output for this channel during this cue select a channel and set an dummy value Es lt 0 PN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING All for Selected Active for Salectad Create Second Cue Overwrite Cue Ei Sace Save Create Second Cue Save Overwrite Cue Create Second Cue By l Overwrite Cue press STORE and choose option RELEASE store cue as usual tracking sheet shows release instead of an value Ask to Confirm nWhen storing a second Cue on an Executor the SAVE window will open Here you can execute one of the functions by selecting it Cue Options Cue Only On Off Settings to save Cue Only On or Off Reset Times On Off Preset whether the set times are to be reset to default when saving CUEs the next time can be set in SETUP DEFAULTS RESET TIMES ON or whether they are to be kept RESET TIMES O Preset Options 3 7 Creating and calling up Presets Pressing the Save as default button will save the presets as defaults STO
179. appear as green square in the STAGE window Move the first fixture to point A of the stage using the Encoder or track ball Press STORE and Button A of the menu Move the fixture to B C and D and press STORE plus the respective button when you reach these points Repeat this procedure for all fixtures Then press the CALCULATE button The true fixture positions will be inserted into the SETUP menu and the visualization in the STAGE window adapted accordingly 85 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA z 3 12 Stage Flip Bisre by Nanos The Flip Set in the stage values can avoid an unintentional flip of the fixture This is only possible within a certain Pan Tilt range depending on the technology of the fixture some multiple rotations without changing the Tilt position Pan Tilt X i are normally impossible Fixa flip position Selekt fixture activate the STAGE values and set Flip value with the encoder With Flip no specific flip position is forced With flip position 1 2 or 3 depends on type of fixture the specific flip position will retained if this is physically possible set position in FOLLOW mode store cue as normal 4 Cues and Sequences A Cueisan individual stage setting which can be assigned and stored directly to EXECUTOR button or EXECUTOR Fader Several cues in line are called a sequence Sequences of cues can also be assigned and s
180. ards and so on RANDOMLY Chaser plays back individual steps cues on random basis AUTO LOOP SINGLE ON SINGLE OFF Toggle by pressing the key On AUTO LOOP after the last step the Chaser will jump back to the first and continue With SINGLE ON the Chaser makes one run and stops at the last Cue With SINGLE OFF the Chaser makes one run and switches off after the last Cue SPEED INDV On RUN an individually set speed will be used SPEED 1 4 On RUN the respective SPEED Group will be used These set speeds can be used for all Chasers 5 1 6 Assigning Special M asters Using the keys you can either divide or double the set speed HALF SPEED Pressing 1x the set speed will be divided in half this can be done up to 8 times The modification will be displayed above the left Encoder 1 1 Resets the speed to the set value DOUBLE SPEED By pressing this once the set speed will be doubled this can be done up to 8 times Modification will be displayed above the left Encoder 100 This key will bring you to the ASSIGN menu 5 1 ASSIGN menu MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING grand MA BLIND UPDATE The Edit CUE button allows you the modify values of individual Cues LED in Edit key will blink 4 4 1 Changing values of individual Chaser steps Above the encoders on the right screen playback soft keys and the name of the ch
181. arting keyword PRESET ENTER 173 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 PRESET becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD PRESET T X ENTER Call Preset X of type T X Preset number in range 1 999 T Preset type in range 1 9 As target for the following operational commands COPY Copy one preset to another DELETE Delete a preset EDIT Start edit update procedure for preset IF Deselect devices which are not part of the preset IFOUTPUT Search for stage output of preset LABEL Change name of preset M OVE INSERT Move preset to another position PREVIEW PREVIEW object ENTER Only one object can be previewed at one time Preview will show the content of the object in the fixture channel sheets without outputing to stage blind Programmer contents is not destroyed but using Preview Preview will be indicated by all sheets showing PREVIEW in their titles Preview is cancelled by the next command line operation PREVIOUS Create a subselection from the current selection If you have selected more than one fixture and then say PREVIOUS only the last fixture of the selection actually stays selected The others become temporarily deselected The next time you say PREVIOUS only the 2 last fixture within the current selection is actually selected and so on The ALL command will clear this subselection Continue EDIT UPDATE procedure with PREVIOUS object See EDIT Cursor Left in open
182. ase are displayed The functions of these soft keys are EDIT Open edit menu for the chase LEFT ARROW GO Run backwards SQUARE OFF Stop DOUBLE LINE PAUSE Has toggle function RIGHT ARROW GO Run forward PAGE X Toggle between encoder functions The important functions are on page 1 As usual a pushed and then turned encoder works with a different resolution depending on the settings in the setup menu An encoder click push and release without turning brings up a huge fader on screen Encoder functions of page 1 SPEED SCALE Divides or multiplies the speed with a factor SPEED The speed of the chase The accessible range depends on the speed scale If the chase belongs to a speed group changing the chases speed will affect the speed group also the other way around FADE Step by step INFADE time Defines the smoothness of the running chase MASTER FADE Controls master in amp outfade It is used when starting or switching off the running chase With the encoder the M aster Fade can be set to DEFAULT In this position the predefined M Fade from the menu setup defaults playback timing will be used Encoder functions of page 2 SPEED GROUP Link chase to a speed group or let it have individual speed OUTFADE Defines step by step OUTFADE time With the encoder the OUTFADE can be set to always equal INFADE SNAPDELAY Defines the trigger point for snapping channels in the chase 4 4 1Modifying values
183. be indicated in red in the Effect Pool Filter Here a filter can be set that limits the execution of the Effect either to the odd numbered or to the even numbered Fixtures To assign a filter select the cell Press the Encoder right of the display once The SELECT FIL TER window will open where you can select a filter for this Effect Param Parameter Display of the assigned parameter for which the Effect has an influence over To change which parameter select the cell and press the Encoder to the right of the display once The SELECT ATTRIBUTE window will open where you can select a different parameter for this Effect Table Here the assigned Effect is indicated with its name To re assign an Effect select the cell Press the Encoder right of the display once The SELECT TABLE window will open where you can select a different Effect for this function The left part of the window displays the selected Effect If the Effect Group has been started the Fixtures and Dimmers will be displayed on the Form mimic at the bottom left of the display PWM Pulse width modulation The pulse width can be defined as follows Press the EFFECT SETUP key once H Possible Effect Attributes HH Special Attribute Combinations H Available User Attributes d Scale 1 1 d_ Group 124 Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING grand MA key ha
184. be labeled the given name will be enumerated for every object LABEL PRESET 4 1 THRU COLOUR1 ENTER Preset 4 1 isnamed COLOUR1 Preset 4 2 is named COLOUR2 and so on Please note that executors do not have a name of their own Instead they show the name of the object assigned to it In this way labeling of an executor does not change the name of the executor but of its object Relabeling of executors can be very quicky done LABEL hit executor enter new name Of course you can not change the name of an empty executor LEARN As starting keyword every executor that follows after LEARN will use repeated learn comands to define a new speed LEARN executor list ENTER In an assign command this function can be put on an executor button see ASSIGN The LEARN function works with CHASERS a sequence assigned to an executor in chaser mode and with EFFECTS regardless if they are assigned to an 171 executor or not Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Note It makes no sense to use this function by typing it into the command line The LEARN function will calculate and average the timing between 2 to 4 LEARN commands and adapt its speed to that LOAD As starting keyword every executor that follows after the LOAD will go to a given cue upon the next MANUAL GO command LOAD CUE W EXEC X ENTER Giving the keyword CUE is optional If W cue number is not given you will be
185. black gt black pressing shortly or long will bring up a menu reference to the next menu you could open The following terms are used to explain the keys to refer to different effects short short press on the key to get to the function long ong press time can be set in the PocketPC the function will be started after this time acoustic signal toggle each time you press the key the next function is selected press center press on the cursor in the middle To set values by the Cursor you can define three setting speeds coarse fine finest The setting can be performed either e using this key and with each press you will switch from one setting speed to the next one or e pressing the Cursor Scroll key long and selecting the setting speed in the menu or e using toggle in the taskbar and with each press the setting speed will be switch to the next one A IN IN a finest x fine A Coarse AN 207 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Pocket PC Tue GMA Remote 4 10 20 GD ae a ft a3 Select View 208 Toolbar Refresh Using more than one remotes can cause bad screen display parts of the menue are missing Press REFRESH SCREEN to actuate the screen Available Desks toggle see the available desks or the standard menu red cross desk is available green hook desk is connected Chat Menu menu to s
186. bmasters global speeds etc too This way one track would Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 always relate to one specific executor It is not possible to have two tracks for the same executor A TRACK consists of SUBTRACKS A SUBTRACK has a specific function that relates to its parent track For example a subtrack for an executor track could have the crossfade function One subtrack always relates to one specific function It is not possible to have two subtracks for the same function Every executor track has at least one subtrack for executor commands Subtracks for fader movements are added if needed A SUBTRACK contains EVENTS An EVENT contains specific TIM E and DATA information The DATA is interpreted according to the function of the assigned subtrack Adding Tracks When recording TRACKS are automatically added but of course you can also add tracks manually Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key or make a right click with the mouse in the track display of the timecode show editor on the left side below the sort key Select ADD NEW TRACK Choose an executor from the list or simply press a physical executor button You can even enter EXEC 17 ENTER in the command line An executor track for this executor will be added to your timecode show if it did not exist already Changing the Executor Changing the executor of an already existing track is very similar to adding a new track Choos
187. bo will be inserted into i Delete Folder the fixture Yen ERR from Disk DG etme A Delete Image using DELETE FOLDER FROM DISK to delete the chosen folder from the hard disk oe x from Disk using DELETE IM AGE FROM DISK to delete the bitmap from the chosen folder DG 7bmp y ee __ paseme The bitmaps and folders for those bitmaps will be permanently deleted can not be oopsed again Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING DMX Configuration SAVE E mrama a DMX Input po Ph ii DMX Output via Ethernet p E y Config gt DMX via Ethernet local DMX output ports EFTE x D gt XLR B 2 5 Q DMX Output On Master save PX Local Menu DMX Output gt DMX Input DMX Output via Ethernet j WYSIWYG Config gt DMX via Ethernet Note Edi pm Remote DMX Output On Universe N E alone 2 9 DMX Output and Ethernet Configuration There are 4 DM X output sockets on the rear of the grandM A These sockets can be assigned to any of the DM X universes A to H It is also possible to output the same universe on more than one output socket By using Ethernet data transmission more DM X outputs can be assigned DM X universes E to H are only available with the optional channel expans
188. bove Active Channels for which a value is activated will be moved upwards Values Channels will be sorted by highest value Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Display Layer F Sorting amp Channel Sheet Options Readout W Name Field Sewer P Display fi 7 Filter Columns Programmer Only Wrap Around Delete Window Channel Sheet Values sorted by Numbers Channel Captian 1 Name j Typa D Sort Direction Sort Upwards Sorting by ascending numbers Sort Downwards Sorting by descending numbers Readout By pressing this function you can choose the display criteria for the values Percent Values will be displayed as percentages Percent Values will be given as percentage values interim values will be displayed next to the figure inform of dots Decimal Values will be given as decimal numbers 0 255 HEX Values will be given as hexadecimal numbers 0 FF Font By pressing the function you can switch the font size in the Channel or Fader window between Huge very big Big and Small The Settings button must be pressed displayed with a green font Orientation By pressing this function you can choose between sorting the channels from left to right or from top to bottom Wrap Around If On has been selected the size of the Chann
189. brunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING grand MA Fixtures Values __ sorted by Numbers 3 4 Accessing Fixtures directly in the FIXTURE SHEET Individual fixture functions can always be accessed directly and multiple fixtures can be controlled at the same time The selection will determine which fixtures react to Direct Access procedures selected fixtures will be marked in yellow writing in the FIXTURE window Within the FIXTURE window you can locate select and execute all functions for all fixtures Select the fixtures where you wish to modify a value the selected fixtures will be displayed in yellow characters Selection Call up a fixture group 3 3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS or Select fixtures using the touchscreen or Select fixtures by using the Fixture key and the numeric keypad 3 3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dim mer GROUPS or A left mouse click on the individual fixtures Select the requested function by clicking on the relevent key on the Preset Control Bar Switch on the Preset Control Bar 3 4 8 Options in the Fixture Window Values can now be changed via the encoders located below the right TFT display all functions of the encoders will be displayed directly on the screen The various functions can now be toggled by pressing the FEATURE key or The Trackball affects the PAN TILT function only if switched to Pan amp Tilt N O
190. cally perform the ENTER Fix _N amp DM X_N2 to patch or repatch fixtures DM X 1 absolute DM X number per E TANDS DMX 1 2 Universum number DM X number o ASSIGN TIME ASSIGN Time value target ENTER to set times in Cues ASSIGN FADE press TIM E button once OUTFADE press TIM E button 2x DELAY press TIM E button 3x OUTDELAY press TIM E button 4x SNAPDELAY press TIM E button 5x Cue N for the Default Executor Cue N Executor N for the respective Executor You can also enter multiple times for several Cues of a sequence at the same time e g ASSIGN FADE 3 DELAY 8 OUTDELAY4 CUE 1 THRU 4 EXEC 2 4 AT As operational keyword AT TYPE 1 Inputing dimmer values directly destination objects AT values FADE fades DELAY delays ENTER Destination objects A list of objects that can create selections Usable keywords are CHANNEL FIXTURE GROUP SEQU CUE PRESET EFFECT If no destination objects are given the current selection will be used Values VALUE_X THRU VALUE_Y in percent Fades FADE_X THRU FADE_Y in seconds Delays DELAY_X THRU DELAY_Y in seconds Values fades and delays are decimal numbers with dots e g FADE 1 5 Examples CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 20 FADE 2 5 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTER Will put channels 1 through 10 at 20 and give them all a fade time of 2 5 seconds It will also stagger a delay time across all 20 channels with channel 1 having the longest delay time and channel twenty
191. cking cuelist it only makes sense to store values that have changed On playback the grandM A will hold a parameters value until it is given a new value by subsequent cues NON TRACKING CUELIST With a non tracking cuelist all values to be playback have to be stored in each respective cue as all values not stored within a cue will be switched off 0 or default 1 10 8 Playback buttons and faders The motor faders allow to work on different pages simultaneously With OFF playback of cues loaded onto executors can be stopped With the ASSIGN EXECUTOR buttons you can define which sequences with which functions are to be playbacked on executors The 12 function keys can be used for any Playback OFF EXECUTOR1 To call up a cue with a fader it has to be activated via GO TOP or ON Watch out for the GRANDMASTER or simply switch it off in the Setup menu 17 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA 2 Setup The Setup ment is displayed only on the right screen grandM a In case of a failure of these screen press F3 to display the menues of this screen on an external screen Tecde Dibia leh die Plight p bucixme Dpto Leh Mite b Pe gt Bima Vie Oplys leh Sees fight tre om Aut p DE E Bem Fees C Encoder 2 Feder Monument hebbel xzrk Pict z Come Fee Fot 2 1 Selecting patching creating and editing of fixtures and SETUP dim
192. creases according to the proportional changes of the individual times Use the Calculator to make the changes and confirm with ENTER WARNING If you compress all times to 0 you will no longer be able to enter longer times You would then have to enter all times anew or you could restore them if the OOPS function was activated not on the MICRO FADE times in Profiles Besides lineary FADE times you can also use to vary FADE procedures using a profile You can fade dimmers and PAN TILT movements using individual profiles In this version it is irrelevant whether the PATH column contains no entry or linear You can choose from 43 paths 16 of which are pre defined and 16 that you can assign self created profiles to Open the Cue overview click onthe cell in the DIM PATH column for the FADE profile of the dimmer or M OVE PATH for the FADE profile of the PAN TILT movement and press on the right Encoder The SELECT FADE PATH menu will open 95 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Select Fade Path N NL Normal Low 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 Select Load path Profile Add _ Profile Delete Profile Edit Choose No Profile Profile Edit Profile x lt In 0 gt Out O Add Point Delete Point Toggle urve 2 Defined Linear Mirror Switch Sinus Square ___ Power Correction Nurr T s
193. created layout from the overview the current layout is indicated by its name and number and with the number of rows and lines below the CHOOSE LAYOUT button open the BITMAP WIZARD to load create or adapt a bitmap Creating a graphics CREATE TEXT to create and save a text bitmap press CREATE TEXT enter text and text size and name the file with TAKE transfer it to the Wizard with TAKE SAVE save it and simultaneously transfer it or just save it with SAVE SAVE BITMAP to save a bitmap on the console s hard disk LOAD BITMAP to load a bitmap from the console s hard disk DELETE BITMAP to delete a bitmap IMPORT BITM AP to import a bitmap from floppy disk press X to return to the EDIT menu choose a background color TILES tiling function sets the graphics as multiple tiles one after the other using BACKGROUND choose the background color Choose color and brightness in the Select menu and press the button for the desired color COLOR CORRECTION GREY SCALE CORRECTION set the offset values using or or the Calculator pressing on the black number cell select a scaling SCALE 1 1 will transfer the bitmap 1 1 into the selected layout SCALE TO FIT WIDTH will scale the bitmap to the optimum width for the selected layout SCALE TO FIT HEIGT will scale the bitmap to the optimum height for the selected layout SCALE TO BEST FIT will scale the bitmap to the optimum appearance
194. ct in this case next pages Abort or Reconnection of a session Autoconnect If a session was disconnected for example OFF without leaving the session slave desk tries to reconnect to the session after switching on Abort Autoconnection press Abort Connection will not re established desk works as stand alone with the current show Allow Autoconnection press X or after approx 4 Seconds automatically Connection with session see picture session GM edi of desk with IP 192 168 177 113 will be re established only when session master is available SESSION Collision If between abort and reconnection to a session the session was changed this collision warning will pop up after reconnection Choose an action to connect the desk to this or another session Join other session The desk connect s to another session Take over other session Other desks whenInvitaion is enable will be invited to this session Change my ID The ID of this session will be changed MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING World 1 7 World 2 STORE World 3 links 2 Master Isolated 15 7 Worlds In the World pool you can create call up or manage so called Worlds Worlds can be created individually Worlds can be used e g to split up complete Scanners all Attributes or indivi dual Attributes of
195. cted remote is displayed on th eright touchscreen y With Send Message you can chat with the selected remotes Message WithENABLE DISABLE REMOTES you can reject or enable a remote connection to your desk Pressing Disable Remotes does not interrupt the actual connection with a remote press Disconnect Remote first Show Remote BE ON THE SAFE SIDE During life situation switch remote access to DISABLED Enable Remotes 196 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH grand MA 16 Full Tracking Backup on grandMA consoles 16 1 Why using a backup system Anytime the grandM A or another member of the grandM A family is running a show it already provides a maximum level of stability in operation based on its unique hardware concept and the built in UPS power supply For applications like big theatre shows live broadcasting or larger touring events even more security is sometimes required With other systems this is very often achieved by a second console loaded with the same show This second desk backup system is then manually tracked to take over control whenever the main system fails Sometimes both consoles may be linked together via MIDI MIDI Show Control or any other serial signal to perform a olayback tracking which keeps both systems on the same cue In a backup situation only the DM X outlets need to be cross switch
196. cue will be deleted without changing the following cue With CUE ONLY x the cue will be deleted all previous steps will be taken into account Deleting by mistake can be undone by OOPS Renumbering Cues Select the Cue to be renumbered Enter the new number on the right side of New Number By pressing the REN UMBER key the Cue will be renumbered If you want to renumber not only one but several Cues select the respective Cues Enter the new number for the first Cue on the right side of New Number By pressing the REN UMBER key the Cues will be renumbered 4 3 7 Inserting LOOPs Program flow inside a cuelist can be controlled by LOOPS Loops have a destination If a Cue is executed that contains a loop program flow will continue with the given destination instead of the next cue Loops can be timed A timed loop will stay inside the loop until a given time elapses Otherwise loops are counting A counting loop will stay inside the loop until the loop counter reaches zero Loops can be endless An endless loop will stay forever inside the loop once it was activated Make a right mouse click on the respective Cue in the LOOP column The SELECT LOOP TARGET window will open Select the Cue to which the jump is to be performed The Cue will be listed in the top line Select the jump function by pressing the respective Key With the LOOP TIM ED Key a timed loop will be created With the LOOP COUNT Key a counting loop wi
197. d Save the drawn graphics as a bitmap or save the individual layout steps as a Cue You can delete all changes by pressing CLEAR 3 times 135 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Manipulate Setup Layout A Move Selection K t A gt V4 4 Yy Color Bitmap Wizard Draw mode Color Block Freg Color for Unused BitMap Wizard Scale to best fit Scale to fit width Scale to fit height Grey Scale Correction Al a Rane Red BRU Green BEIM Blue SALLI i Tile Create Import Save Load Delete Text Bitmap Bitmap Bitmap Bitmap BitMap Offset Scale Wizard 1 of 3 100 0 00 136 open LAYOUT VIEW pick a layout with CHOOSE LAYOUT pressing DRAW will bring you into the drawing mode choose DRAW MODE FREE allows you freehand drawings using the mouse or your finger BLOCK forms a rectangular frame COLOR opens the color menu for fixtures with color changers Choose a color and insert the new color by pressing on the Color button in the Select menu When using ACTON CMY this color will be assigned to the selected cells choose ACTON GREY a dimmer value will be assigned to the selected cells COLOR a color value will be assigned to the selected cells The selected cells receive a yellow frame and will disappear the next time you touch the screen Only if the selected cells have an assigned dimmer
198. d Fixtures or Channels If in the Executor Sheet or in the EDIT menu a trigger call or time is selected you can open this window by pressing the Encoder on the right side of the Display If Fixtures or Channels are selected this window can be opened by pressing the respective keys for this function above the Encoder The title bar of this window will display the selected function In the upper cell the current value will be displayed Using the touch screen the number pad or turning the encoder on the right of the display you can enter a different value or time and accept it by pressing the OK key Left of the numbers the following keys are displayed H for hours M for minutes S for seconds and F for frames With these keys you can directly enter times if necessary or If a function is selected keys for Clear Deactivate and the individual presets are displayed in the lower part If you grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 OOPS KEYBOARD EERE A Backspace Up P Down press CLEAR the values of the selected Fixtures or Channels will be deleted If you press DEACTIVATE the active values of the selected Fixtures or Channels will be deleted If you select a Preset it will be displayed in the upper bar and you can select it pressing the OK key Entries can be deleted using the OOPS key SOFT TOUCH Keyboard On the grandMA light and ultra light and Micro yo
199. d master executor assigned to a speed master GOTO As starting keyword every executor that follows after the GOTO will try to go directly to a given step GOTO CUE W EXEC X FADE Y DELAY Z ENTER Using the keyword CUE is optional If W cue number is not given you will be prompted for it If executor is not given default executor will be used If fade or delay are given they overwrite the default GOTO times The default GOTO times can be changed in the SETUP DEFAULTS menu In an assign command this function can be put directly on to an executor button see ASSIGN In actual fact you will end up with an LOAD assigned to the executor button as it has to ask for the cue number GROUP As starting keyword GROUP ENTER GROUP becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD GROUP range list ENTER Select groups in range list GROUP range list AT see AT Apply values to groups in range list Group numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 999 As target for the following executing commands ON activate devices contained in group OFF deactivate and deselect devices contained in group PAUSE PARK all devices of group GO UNPARK all devices of group HIGHLIGHT Pressing HIGHLIGHT once will change the selected fixtures to the value set in SETUP When holding the HIGHLIGHT button down the selected fixtures will pulse for a better identification IF is performing a logical command within selections It never en
200. d on stage That means all previous steps will be taken into account and the result will be copied By pressing the button on the left of Cue Only you can choose between Normal Copying with or without Status Will copy the values of the step before into the step after but only to a position having no value 97 this wouldn t be ON Paint COPY will move the Cue CANCEL will abort the process grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Nap Width Braat State Timing Tirin fae Delete Cue Deleting Cue yr Co i Delete Cue Deleting Cue X 4 3 6 Deleting and renumbering Cues Right click with the mouse on the respective Cue in the NO column The following window will open From Cue Display of the first selected Cue The number can be modified by clicking on it To Cue Display of the last selected Cue The number can be modified by clicking on it New Number Display of the first new number of the selected Cues The number can be modified by clicking on it Step Width Display of the steps in which the Cues new numbers will be placed The number can be modified by clicking on it Deleting Cues Select the Cue to be deleted By pressing the Delete Cue key the Cue will be deleted If you want to delete not only one but several Cues select the respective Cues By pressing the Delete Cue key the Cues will be deleted With CUE ONLY S the
201. d values the value of the selected Channel Fixture s in the middle will be taken as the starting value will not be changed The value of the first and last selected Channel Fixture will be the ones modified most and all values in between will be distributed evenly ALIGN key pressed 4 times LED is on When changing the activated values the middle value will be the one modified most the values of the first and last will not change and the values in between will be distributed evenly 3 4 2PAUSE Function With the Pause Function you can temporarily freeze park entire fixtures or just individual parameters of fixtures After the activation of the Pause Function no further changes will be output by the console But you can still change and store fixtures or single functions internally Output is shown in the STAGE window but not on the real stage You can park single fixtures with all parameters Parked fixtures are displayed by a blue bar on the side of the name and all functions Press PAUSE key 1x LED is on Click on fixture or fixture key in the Group Window or click on fixture in the Fixture Sheet You can also park single parameters of the fixtures Parked parameters are displayed by a blue bar on the side of the name and all functions Press PAUSE key 1x LED is on Click on the functions in the Preset Control Bar Switch on Preset Control Bar 3 4 8 Options in the Fixture Window or directly on the parame
202. ddressing the button executors Page numbers P Q must be in the range of 1 64 as starting keyword EXEC ENTER EXEC range list ENTER Select devices included in objects to given executors EXEC range list AT see AT Apply values to devices included in objects assigned to given executors the command line to an executor XECUTING COM MANDS can be assigned with the command line to an executor s button For fader executors the keyword EXEC specifys the middle EXEC becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD key COPY Copy one executor to another DELETE Delete an executor This does not destroy the object that is assigned to the executor EDIT Edit the object that is assigned to the executor With executing keywords and executors Executing keyword Executor List FADE X X ENTER The execution command is performed on all listed executors with a fade overwrite of X X seconds Does not work with PAUSE or flashing commands Giving individual fade times to fixtures or channels Selection AT FADE X X TRHU Y Y ENTER Individual fades for the feature shown in the presetbar will be set to X X seconds If no selection is given the current selection is used Please note that the given fade may be a range In this case fades will be aligned over the given selection The given fades can be signed which will result in relative changes of in dividual fades Giving individual fades can be combined with giving individual delays and value
203. de pool window Touch one of the timecode show keys you will get the timecode control bar for this show in the display on the right Enter the name for the timecode show using the PC keyboard Press the EDIT field in the timecode control bar and the timecode editor will appear Using the command line EDITTIMECODE X ENTER Brings up the timecode editor and the timecode control bar for timecode show X There is no hardware key for TIMECODE on the grandM A but you can enter this in the command line or into a macro by using the text keyboard Combining the two methods EDIT and then touch a key in the timecode pool If the timecode show that you have selected was empty there will be only the empty editor in front of you and you can now start recording or manual editing 8 1 3 Playing back a Timecode Show Graphically with the touch screens or mouse Brings up a timecode control bar for the desired timecode show when touching a key in the timecode pool Use the cells with the cd player like symbols to control the show playback Using the command line COMMAND TIMECODE X ENTER COMM AND is one of the executor commands that you will find above the page keys You can use GO PAUSE lt lt lt gt gt gt ON and OFF Combining the two methods COMMAND as described above and then touch a key in the timecode pool Description of playback commands Status Command Line Description STOP OFF Show is stopped no outpu
204. dialog windows In all temporary dialog windows and message boxes you can use the PREVIOUS key to move the input focus in that window to the left Together with NEXT and ENTER you can for example choose the appropriate answer in a message box If no device is selected PREVIOUS will bring the fixture having the lowest ID into the selection on the next PREVIOUS the fixture with the next lower ID will be selected With NEXT the selecting direction will be reversed Proceeding from the fixture with the lowest ID on the next PREVIOUS the selection will jump to the dimmer with the highest ID SELECT 174 As starting keyword it is used to select the DEFAULT EXECUTOR SELECT hit executor SELECT EXEC X ENTER The default executor can be identified by its green title in the executor mini displays The default executor is reacting to the DEF_GO DEF_GO and DEF_PAUSE commands and to their physical counterpart the three big yellow buttons During programming it can be very convenient to make the executor you are working on the default one Many commands assume to work with the default executor if no other executor is given In an assign command this function can be put on an executor button see ASSIGN Pushing this button will select the executor of the button as default executor THRU can only be used within other commands to create ranges X THRU Y Range from Xto Y X THRU Range from X to the end THRU Y Range from the beginnin
205. ding to a virtual dimmer can be set Bits pe Functions of the individual buttons Add Line To insert a new fixture or function above the selected line 30 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH Vecimal B bit ire Type lt lt lt lefault Highlight Stage MIB Fade Profile j j XYZ Support Special Functions Remove XYZ Support from all fixture types Create XYZ Support for all fixture types Boos Nis _ Fixture Types KK gt gt gt Shortname Manufacturer Comment_ Date Type MIB Delay MIB NONAME 01 01 Mirror Default Defa No Qty Name 1 0 Tesi Select Attribute Attribute Feature No Break Attribute Typ New Default load User xture library Harddisc H SELFMADE Harddisc Floppy Delete Line To delete the selected fixture or function Decimal Values To display the table values as percentages By pressing the button you can switch between decimal and hexadecimal representation XYZ SUPPORT Using CREATE you can insert virtual X Y and Z axes into all Fixtures necessary in order to use some of the STAGE features Using REM OVE you can remove the virtual axes CAUTION this will also remove all STAGE information contained in the current Show sequences or effects containing these information can then no longer be execut
206. displays the next available DM X channel in position ON this channel will be used after presing CREATE in position OFF default any other available channel can be used 2 2 2 Pressing Create will accept the settings for generating fixtures later on 2 2 2 Patching Scanners Dimmers In The lower part of the window shows the Scanners Dimmers of the selected Select a fixture in the Patch column blue background If all fixtures of these Fixture Layers are to be patched one after the other you can select all of them together by clicking on the column title in this case PATCH Now all fixtures are displayed on a blue background Pressing the Encoder will open this menu Below Direct Patch the first free DM X channel is displayed First you have to set the DM X output e g A B then the first DM X channel Finally press the Patch key That s all or All free channels are displayed in the right column By turning the Encoder all invisible channels can be displayed and selected Pressing the Encoder will accept the channel If the TEST OUTPUT button is pressed green background the selected DM X output channel is set to 100 This accelerates the localizing of a patched channel in the stage setup This function will only affect fixtures whose DM X signal is directly output by the console Consoles in Slave operation or fixtures whose signals are output over the MA Net cannot
207. dit Cue 1 uoma Cue Trigger In Fade GO 94 In Delay 02 Basic 1 of 2 t Snap Delay N BLIND ACTION Type of Effect call play forwards play backwards pause stop INTENS Display of the defined size of the Effect F Fade If Y YES is displayed the size will be faded in with the set fade time SPEED Display of the defined speed of the Effect F Fade If Y YES is displayed the speed will be faded in with the set fade time SOFT Display of the set softness softer fade in of the effect F Fade If Y YES is displayed the softness will be faded in with the set fade time If AUTO SCROLL key is pressed the chart will automatically move to top bottom when handling larger sequences The chart will show you all cues of a sequence including the various TRIGGER functions The EDIT CUE key will enable you to change values of individual cues below Description of each encoder 4 3 1Changing values for individual cues in the sequence Select the Cue that you want to change red cell in the Name column Press the Edit Cue key LED in the EDIT key starts flashing All values of the Cue will now be played back on stage and displayed active red in the Channel amp Fixture sheets The cue can now be changed by either direct access or presets 3 4 Accessing Fixtures directly in the FIXTURE SHEET 3 5 Accessing Dimmer Channels directly in the CHANNEL SHEET and 3 7 Creating and ca
208. dited object is updated and EDIT UPDATE procedure is finished It loads the UPDATE dialog where you can update changed PRESETS and CUES VALUE VALUE has no other meaning than switching back to value mode if desk isin a time mode such as FADE or DELAY VIEW As starting keyword given views will be called VIEW range list ENTER View numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 999 As target for the following commands ASSIGN A view can be assigned to a VIEWBTN COPY Copy one view to another DELETE Delete a view INSERT M OVE Change visible number of view STORE Store a view You will be asked for the screens that should be contained in the view 176 Views can store and restore the window arrangement on the screens of your desk A View can contain one screen or multiple screens Views that contain single screens can be called back also on other screens VIEWBTN As starting keyword given view buttons will be called VIEW BTN range list ENTER Viewbutton numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 30 Each screen has 6 view buttons 3 build in and 2 external monitors make a to tal of 30 view buttons As target for the following commands ASSIGN Assign a view or a macro to a view button Syntax is ASSIGN VIEW X VIEWBTN Y ENTER ASSIGN MACRO X VIEWBTN Y ENTER COPY Copy one view button to another DELETE Delete Empty a view button MOVE Move one view button to another STORE
209. dom BLOCK UNBLOCK Quikeys have the same function as Buttons in the Tracking sheet Quikeys however offer far more options With Quikeys you can block individual Fixtures or Dimmers not only Sequencies and Cues When using the AT filter you can block individual parameters too MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de E eee SNK vend eae core coe Link Comment ree DELETE WINDOW IFACTIVE With IFACTIVE ENTER you can select all Fixtures having active values Instead of ENTER you can filter the command e g With IFACTIVE SEQ X you can select all Fixtures and Channels of this Sequence having active values or IFACTIVE GROUP 1 will select all Fixtures in Group 1 having active values 9 3 Agenda Menu In this window you can set the time of day and date for the automatic execution of Macros It is also possible to set relative trigger points using sunrise sunset dawn and dusk as a reference You can select a different Edit Date by using the encoders or the keys on the display Pressing this key you can toggle between day week month or year in this display If DAY is chosen the ADD DEL and EDIT keys will be displayed Pressing the ADD key will include a new column in the sheet where you can set the programming for automatic control If acolumn is selected you can delete it by pressing the DEL key
210. ds grandMA Light as of SN 317 onwards Priority grandMA UltraLight as of SN 232 onwards invitation ESS grandMA Replay Unit asof SN 38 onwards grandMA MICRO with all devices Consoles with lower serial numbers must be upgraded with 256 MB RAM and a 100M Bit network adapter Start a session press TOOLS press MA NETWORK CONFIGURATION press CONSOLES enter SESSION ID 1 31 all stations within this session must have the same ID number press START SESSION and enter name and password if required press NSP to open the NSP configuration menu Register a NSP on the console the NSPs should be switched on connected to the network and have unique IP addresses you can change their names and IP addresses in SETUP under UPDATE SOFTWARE and a session must be started press ADD NSP if needed enter a name select the IP address of the desired NSP and click on it using the Encoder This will transfer the NSP into the overview assign the DM X lines to the NSP outputs lines 1 8 equal A H lines 9 64 will only receive numbers repeat the operation for each NSP Delete a NSP on the console click ona NSP in the overview press REMOVE NSP LOAD columns numbers 0 100 Will show the workload of the EXPANSION MODE You can choose between 4 096 channels whether the DMX channelss are output from the data output of the respective NSP If the number in this column is console Expansion Mode inaktiv
211. e AS Adaptive Speed If this function is activated the speed will automatically be adjusted when the number of Fixtures or Dimmers changes That means the individual Effects of this Effect Group do not run at different speeds when working with different numbers of Fixtures or Dimmers but always at the same step speed To activate the function select the cell Press the Encoder right of the display once Or Activate by making a short right mouse click into the cell below AS This will be indicated by a YES in this cell Part Partly he sequence of an Effect can be subdivided 16 times and an Effect can then be assigned to the first individual subdivision This colomn displays what the subdivision ratio this part of the Effect Group belongs to Example With a setting of 1 5 the individual Effect would always be executed in the first fifth of a Effect Group sequence Before modifying the subdivision value select the Effect first Press the PART key once green background Now you can set the subdivision of the Effect Group for the individual Effect by pressing and Medien Lose oe ee holding the Encoder below You cannot designate a section in which a particular Effect is to be executed it aS nist will always be executed as the first subdivision Pressing the Encoder once shortly will set the value to ALWAYS and the Effect will be executed during the whole period 6 2 2 Deleting individual Effects Select the Effect to be deleted
212. e bored ae Backup Menu Local HardDisk LOAD Show SAVE Show SAVE Show SAVE Show AS p Enumerate X Archive Media Hard Diss Partial Show Re Initialise Demo Shows read only b l Fie Server gt 11 12 PARTIAL SHOW READ loading parts of a Show As of version 5 0 you can import parts of another show in to an existing show Besides the Setup you can also take over show elements like Groups Presets Sequences or individual Cues Worlds Forms Effects Layouts Bitmap Effects M acros and Matrices Take care that all connected elements are being taken over i e when a sequence refers e g to Presets you have to import the Sequence plus the Presets The PARTIAL SHOW READ function is carried out in 2 phases SETUP transfer here you have to decide which fixtures of the imported show you want to transfer If these fixtures do not correspond to the current fixtures you can add them If overlapping occurs only the current or the imported fixture can be transferred If both fixtures are to be used in the current show the only way is to change the ID and Patch numbers of these fixtures in the respective show it is not possible to do that in the PARTIAL SHOW READ function Data transfer here you can select elements of the imported show Elements having the same name will be overwritten or merged depending on the command used TIP Save the current show to a fl
213. e Delete Lines Channels of Fixture Type lt lt lt gt gt gt Decimal 8 bit Se f Export p lt 1 Import _ Ee gt Function Sets Then select a Feature to which the Attribute is to be moved e g Control Select the position in the Attributes table by clicking on it In this Preset group the Attribute will now be moved into this Feature Some Attributes cannot be moved e g Color Mix1 This is indicated by the word Unmoveable in the table on the right of the respective Attribute The changes will take effect and will be saved only after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the SAVE button 2 4 2 Encoder Activation Grouping All settings within this menu will affect the storing of Cues Presets and creating of Presets Create Preset menu Attention This menu is important and can influence all of your programming Call up this menu by pressing the Encoder Attribute Grouping key in the Preset and Feature Assignment The Attributes combined in a group will be activated and stored when they are changed e g Pan and Tilt In the Attribute Setup menu see 2 pages earlier open this menu by pressing the Encoder Grouping button By selecting a group the appropriate Attributes will be displayed in the table on the lower left side Pressing the Add Group key will create a new group In order to delete a group this group has to be selected
214. e STAGE window When loading a show from floppy that had been created on another console no fixtures will appear are placed on moved positions no or the wrong channels will be triggered Choose SETUP FULL ACCESS in FIXTURE LAYER the group to which this fixture belongs in the menu below you can find the starting number of this fixture it has to correspond to the address adjustable on the fixture e g on the console B17 on the fixture 017 If the fixture has 14 channels the next fixture must beginn with B31 Adapt the fixtures using the parameters X Y and Z in SETUP FULL ACCESS if needed use INVERT to adjust the sense of rotation of PAN and TILT It is highly probable that a software error has occurred on the hard disk Repairs should be performed by a service technician see hotline contact on the bottom margin Master open Group master open If in the Channel Fader and Fixture Sheet the ID numbers or the names have a blue background the master has a subordinate priority World assigned correctly 219 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Question The configuration of my console Tracker ball Screen Off etc has suddenly changed settings and IP numbers have changed In the NETWARE CONNECTIONS menu I cannot see some consoles although they are in the network Can select active fixture e g an active Cue automatically to form a group Can
215. e PAN TILT change values in PAN and TILT with other features change values of the right neighboured parameter press to the next parameter e g Color1 Color 2 211 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 212 LIGHTING Pocket PC GMA Remote 4x 1 148 z Sort Dir Di Fike Sheet bas A Only P Pocket PC GMA Remote xi 46 GD Per fare Sor t Bs a ort By Sheet Readout Only Dim 1 Dies 2 Dim P Dies 4 230 230 230 230 5 6 7 8 Dim 5 Dim 6 Dim 7 Dim 8 displays the current Sheet Sheet toggle Fixture Sheet Fader Sheet Channel Sheet short Selection short toggle between scroll value long cursor mode short The figure indicates how many channels will be displayed in one column Enter a new number x x and confirm with OK for Cursor Scroll J scrolling in the Sheet for Cursor Values e t to change the values of the marked Dimmers for marked name frame around the name blinks press OPTIONS of the Dimmers will be displayed hanner displays the current Sheet Sheet toggle Fixture Sheet Fader Sheet Channel Sheet short Selection short toggle between scroll value long cursor mode short shows name of Channel orFader for Cursor Scroll scrolling in the Sheet for Cursor Values e to change the values of the marked Dimmers for marked name frame around the name blinks press OPTIONS will be displayed
216. e in the Live Access menu Check it out Select a fixture press HIGHLIGHT and let the Track ball run Modifications will only be available after they have been saved In cases like these the HIGHLIGHT key among others is very useful if you keep the key pressed selected lamps flashes for better identification a DMX List Single Channel specific Adjustments for the Current ow Press the PATCH SHEETS key in the Full or Live Access menu to activate this menu This menu will only display the actually patched channels All changes made here will only affect the current show This column will show the individual addressed DM X channel Will show the ID for Channel and Fixture The IDs can be changed without affecting the show e g for a better display on the Fixture Sheet The name of fixtures and dimmer channels assigned to the individual DM X channels The functions of the individual DM X channels Inthis column a profile can be assigned to this channel 2 8 Creating Assigning and Deleting Profiles Within this column the respective DM X channel can be inverted A click into the cell will activate this function Press the Encoder right to the Display Select Yes for Inverted No for not inverted or Original Library setting will be used and accept them by pressing the Encoder one more time An inverted channel will be indicated by a YES in the respective cell These inverted channels are not used for the visuali
217. e keyboard e g Gobo 4 and confirm with Enter The same name is automatically taken over and will be displayed in the Fixture window on the right side If you want to use a different name changeit as indicated further above To create further Attributes go to the next free cell and proceed as you did for the first Attribute Adding additional Attributes to a Feature Select a Preset group and then an Feature Click into the free cell below the available Attributes Enter a name for the new Attribute using the keyboard e g Gobo 4 and confirm with Enter The same name is automatically taken over and will be displayed in the Fixture window on the right side If you want to use a different name changeit as indicated further above Inserting deleting or moving Features or Attributes Select a Feature or Attribute blue background Pressing the buttons below will have the indicated results Add Line will add a new Feature or Attribute in front of the selected one Delete Line will delete the selected Feature or Attribute Only self created Features or Attributes can be deleted Moves Lines will move the selected Feature or Attribute to another place in the table The different ways to move Features or Attributes will be explained in the two following items Moving a Feature to another Preset group Click on a Feature e g Gobo Press the M oves Lines button will be displayed in red Select a Preset group to which
218. e other overwritten Effect Groups If the other Effect Group that had overwritten this Group is switched off this Effect Group will again affect the Fixtures Dimmers This function is active by default when creating a new Effect Group Sync Start If this key is pressed dark background and another Effect Group had already been started this Group will automatically be started at the same speed and position One Shot If this key is pressed dark background the Effect Group will only be executed for one complete run and will be deactivated 128 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH 6 5 Effect groups in Cues During normal SAVE processes you can also save Effect Groups in Cues In the Cues the settings for Call GO GO Pause and OFF Intensity SPEED SOFTNESS and IN OUT FADE TIME are saved In the Cues no further settings from the Effect Group will be saved function as with presets Sse eae Aa Or No Name MIB Trg Effects N z Ea eere ea earnen It iS also possible to create Cues to which an own Effect Group can be assigned If temporary Effect Groups are 4 ce E LOTE MBER UE Ns used when creating the Cues a copy of the Cue will also be saved i e it will not be depending on the 3 Be Gn Et 1 GO Eff 38 OFF blinder OFF original Effect Group anymore 4 4 Cue blinder OFF Star
219. e second step Cue 2 Inthe ASSIGN menu you can define whether this Sequence should be executed in TRACKING or NON TRACKING mode TRACKING and NON TRACKING 5 1 4 EXECUTOR SETTINGS Create the next Cue for any other step and use the same EXECUTOR fader or button when storin 4 2 1Copying Sequences Once a Sequence has been created it can be copied completely with all component Cues Fade and Delay times Press the COPY key once LED is on Press the SEQUENCE key once LED is on Using the numeric keypad enter the number of the Sequence to be copied All sequences and their numbers will be displayed in the Assign menu 5 1 ASSIGN Menu Press the AT key once LED is on Using the numeric keypad enter the number of the new Sequence and confirm with ENTER 4 2 2Including Cues Set a Cue 4 1 Creating Cues Press the STORE key once LED is on Press the SEQUENCE key once LED is on Enter the number of the Sequence using the numeric keypad Press the CUE key once LED is on Enter the number of the new Cue via numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER Example A new Cue is to be included between Cue 3 and Cue 4 This new Cue will be named for example Cue no 3 1 numbers between 3 001 and 3 999 are possible This way 999 Cues can be included between two Cues Lt MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de SELECT 4 2 3Selected Seq
220. e the following syntax on the command line copy seq X_cue XX_at_seq Y cue YY ENTER If the target Cue is empty select the status of the copy STATUS COPY or CUE ONLY if the Cue has a contents choose between the OVERWRITE or MERGE option You can cancel the copying process using CANCEL 4 3 11 Copying individual values of a cue into another cue or sequence Values of individual parameters can be copied from one cue into another or into another sequence Use the following syntax in the Command line From the current cue into another cue of the same sequence or another sequence Select the fixture or the channel in the current cue if necessary activate the parameter double click headline the column has a red background STORE OPTION should be set with Active values STORE seq _X_cue_Y and confirm with MERGE or OVERWRITE Executor 1 18 Sequ z Seq gi Effects MIB Trig G0 4 4 Editing Chasers A Chaser is a sequence which runs automatically During the editing process you will be able to modify add or delete all the values of the individual Cues Speed X FADE and SNAP DELAY times can also be adapted globally Apart from what is indicated in this chapter there are three other ways of editing 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 Overwriting expanding removing Cues 4 5 and 3 7 5 Update Cues or Presets 5 3 EXECUTOR window Press the EDIT key LED is on Select a Chaser with the respective EXECUTOR key Or Left click with
221. e the track that you want to change with the track encoder or by touching it Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key Select CHANGE EXECUTOR from the list The rest is similar to adding a new track Adding Subtracks When recording SUBTRACKS are added automatically Of course you can also add subtracks manually Subtracks can only be added to already existing tracks Choose a track with the track encoder in the bar or by touching it Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key or right click with the mouse on the TRACK Select ADD NEW SUBTRACK Choose the type of the new subtrack from the list Deleting Tracks or Subtracks Choose a track with the track encoder in the bar or by touching it Press the TRACK FUNCTIONS key or right click with the mouse the TRACK Select DELETE TRACK If the track contains events you will be asked for a confirmation otherwise the track will be deleted immediately If you delete the first subtrack like executor command track the whole track with all its subtracks will be deleted Expanding Collapsing Tracks Tracks can be EXPANDED or COLLAPSED An expanded track will show all of its subtracks while a collapsed track will hide all its subtracks except for the first one For an executor track the first subtrack is always the executor command subtrack This functionality only affects the display Hidden subtracks are always played back 144 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr
222. e within a group or selection forwards PREV key once within a group or selection backwards Pressing the SET key once reselects all Fixtures and dimmer channels in the group If there are more groups than can be displayed in the GROUP window you can scroll down within every active window title bar in dark blue on every screen by using the encoder wheel on the right of the respective J touchscreen or the up down key a 3 3 3 Moving GROUP keys within a window Press the M OVE key once MOVE LED lights up Using the touch screen or left mouse key click on the GROUP key and hold it down a small hand appears Drag the key to another location within this window and then release it or press MOVE twice LED flashes Using the touch screen or left mouse key click on the GROUP key and hold it down a small hand appears Drag the key to another location between two buttons within this window and then release it COPY 3 3 4 Copying groups Press the COPY key once LED is on Select the Group Keys in the GROUP window By selecting several groups one after the other that set of groups can be copied together Press the AT key once LED is on Click on the position for the copied group in the GROUP window _ Confirm with ENTER The functions M ove Copy or Delete can also be used for Executors Pages Sequences or Effects MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbittel
223. e z select a User Profile User Data is merged into my profile The profile elements of the selected profile will be loaded into the profile of the current user User Data is merged into the original profile The profile elements of the selected profile will be loaded into the profile of the user having the same name or if the user does not exist in the current show the user will be created If MY PROFILE yellow button is chosen after multiple profiles were selected the current user s profile will successively be overwritten by the selected profiles not a good deal Load parts of a Show COPY the selected elements will be inserted into the current show or if there are elements having the same name the current elements will be overwritten by the copied elements MERGE the selected elements will be inserted into the current show if there are elements having the same name the current elements will be merged with the copied elements Here a concise overview Remove unchanged Items Will delete all elements in the overview that were not changed i e these elements will not exist in the current show Remove already imported Items Will delete all elements in the overview that were already imported using the COPY or MERGE command x leave the menu by pressing on the X System Software Update 4 840 Network Update P 192 168 177 27 19216817728 Wion NetWork Update will Update the Selec
224. each Scanner and Dimmer you ll find the Select column By choosing a cell and pressing the Encoder on the right gf the Display you can select them and the display switches to Yes When creating Presets these will only be 1 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Auto Create Presets For Selected Types AutoCreate Presets New Select Fixture Types AutoCreate Presets Delete Presets Reset Preset Reference Select exactly 1 Fixture as reference Create Preset Reference All Presets which contain the selected fixture will be stored inside the fixtures type and can later be used for AutoCreating Presets For All Types Create Dimmer Presets x ES Presets Effects amp M trickg UsiTT Ascu Show Filg 42 created for these Scanners or Dimmers By pressing the Autocreate Prests New button you can create individual Presets for each Scanner type The created Presets will now be available in the individual PRESET windows See also 2 7 Function Sets Names Channel Values and Presets By pressing the Autocreate Presets M erge button you can create the Presets for all Scanner types simultaneously Same names of different Scanners will be displayed on one PRESET button By pressing the Delete Presets button you can delete the Presets of the selected Scanners and Dimmers By pressing the button
225. ecode synchronization can be used to trigger one or more controllers to synchronize with an audio or video recording SMPTE 24 25 and 30 Drop and Non Drop Frames are encoded time information e g recorded ona separate track of a multitrack tape frequency range of 1 2 kHz Normally this Timecode is already added when compiling the music e g for presentations but it can also be recorded afterwards in a regular recording studio If the music is recorded in stereo a third track is needed for the Timecode All sequences programmed into the grandMA can be synchronized by Timecode During the playback of the tape the Timecode information is transmitted to the connected controllers Each controller has an internal memory that triggers the activation of a specific program at a given point of time On the grandMA the EXTERNAL LTC Timecode can be connected via a jack socket and the MTC via Midi IN on the rear of the unit 8 1 1 Introduction to the Timecode System Here the major advantages of the new Timecode System Timecode shows are organised in a pool The basic handling of timecode shows like edit copy delete etc is totally compliant with the rest of the console s syntax Timecode shows are completely embedded into the command line So you can now start timecode show number 5 from a macro GOTO commands are supported and are used as the default when recording normal GOs This means that the timecode show is referancing absolute cue
226. ectors Pin numbers on RJ 45 connector and 10 Base T standard signal assignment a As 10 Base T EtherNet always requires an EtherNet hub to distribute the signal connections from console to console go via a hub a useful application will be any network where more than two consoles or consoles with ad ditional equipment such as ArtNet DM X Nodes are proposed For a simple peer to peer connection between two consoles a crossed 4 wire cable M UST be used Crossed cable to be used for 10 Base T peer to peer connections Panetta preferer RES 1 R fe 4 oe Ping Pin 1 O pe NEO e O pe WN e Ce eee Pee ae pe C pe O kee pe MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 200 LIGHTING Using a crossed 10 Base T cable will allow a direct console to console connection but no additional components can be added to this connection type later on Lit eS Estill a grandM A Master slave configuration with 10 Base T crossed cable ii el am BA wis eB aay a H The console s can only work on one transceiver type at a time when the 10 Base 2 port is in use anything i Ch connected to the 10 Base T outlet is ignored and vice versa If you want to connect more consoles at one time or the use of a ArtNet DM X Node is required a 10 100 Base T EtherNet switch must be installed Also for security reasons on lon
227. ed Updating the Fixtures Library Export to Library The selected fixture will be saved to disk in the Library Export to Floppy The selected fixtures will be saved to floppy Function Sets Changes into this menu 2 7 Function Sets Import You can insert a fixture from the Library or from a floppy Funcion Sets Here you can enter and modify value depending names and values for the visualization and representation in the Fixture Sheet Furthermore you can define how Presets are automatically created 2 7 Function Sets Names Channel Values and Presets With this you can leave this menu The settings will only take effect and be saved after leaving the Full Access menu and after pressing the SAVE button 2 6 FIXTURES TYPES create new In the Full Access menu open this menu by pressing the Fixture Types button All fixtures that are currently used in the Show will be displayed in the upper part of the Displays Description of all functions 2 5 FIXTURE TYPES In the New column click on the Name cell and enter a name for the new fixture and confirm with Enter A new fixture is created and the basic settings are set to Default These settings still have to be adjusted Please make sure that the chosen name does not already exist because otherwise two with the same name can later only be recognised by their manufacturer or the date Now you can enter a name for Shortname Manufacturer and if needed a comment
228. ed The grandMA now offers a complete concept of show backup for moving light and conventional controllers 16 2 grandMA with show backup As the DM X signal distribution via EtherNet has been implemented to all grandMA systems the software release brings full backup capability via EtherNet 16 2 1 Backup options via EtherNet The Backup system can by used to combine multiple grandM A consoles up to 10 to form a Master Slave configuration The console having the Slave function will permanently be provided with the current Show data and furthermore all Playback commands can be executed so that it could take over the Show at any time if the Master console fails or the connection is interrupted manually Both the connected consoles will always run the same Show 16 2 2 Tracking the Console Status As soon as the grandMA Full Tracking Backup has been set up and is operational all important operating elements of the M aster are simultaneously transmitted to the Slave system for parallel execution If not set up this way the Slave system will only follow the commands of the Master main system if the latter is operational If the connection to the Master system is interrupted or the Master itself crashes due to a hardware or software failure the Slave system would not accept this invalid condition All these features as a whole let the grandMA provide a complete Full Backup without any compromise offering maximum safety in any Show 16 2 3 Usin
229. ed accordingly Additionally adaptations can be made in the Attribute Setup It is not possible to sign on or delete new lamps in the Show The PDA remote control does have the status of Live Access only NOTE AUTO CREATE All text marked with does not apply to the isi In this menu you can e g have presets automatically created for all your fixtures and dimmers as long as those grandMA MICRO Cia presets are already contained in the internal library Premade Effects and Groups for each Fixture or Dimmer channel can also be created 2 11 Creating presets effects and groups automatically All buttons marked with are located in the grandma MICRO s COMMAND WINDOW only 18 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH Add Line Delete Lines Move Lines Name T ID ChID Fix 1 N HF 1 E MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 2 As i z Create MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 3 1 As Multipatch MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 4 A22 mel MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 5 MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 6 MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 7 Patch MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 8 Sheets p MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 3 MINISCAN HF MINISCAN HF 10 Attribute New Setup p Fixture Types p Stage Setup p X Position Y Position Z Position Function Load from Fixture Library Harddisc Original and User Create New Fixtures or Channels ae Au
230. ed can be assigned to any Fixture parameter or dimmer channel Assigning a profile to a DMX channel press Setup Open the FIXTURE TYPES menu 2 5 Modifying scanners EDIT FIXTURE or 2 6 Creating Scanners EDIT FIXTURE Here you can assign a profile to all fixtures of one type simultaneously Or Open the Patch Sheets menu 2 3 DMX List Single Channel specific Adjustments for the Current Show Here you can assign a profile to each individual DM X channel MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Select Profile x lt No Name Qty Add 2 Profile Delete Profile special01 Edit Choose Profile No Profile Qty Numbers of cordinations are displayed 100 Number of fixtures this profile is coordinated 1 Number of channels per fixture this profile is coordinated t In the Profile column elect the cell for the fixture or DM X channel and press the Encoder The Select Profile menu will open The table shows all created profiles By selecting a profile it will be activated and the menu be closed The name of the selected profile will now be displayed in the cell Un assigning a Profile Select the name of the assigned profile and press the None button This will revoke the assignment 2 8 1EDIT PROFILES Creating or modifying profiles If you want to create a new profile press the NEW button
231. ed times for Dawn Sunrise Sunset and Dusk for yesterday today and tommorrow are listed Leave this menu with the X key Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Ine Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 WaldbUttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de EE e Tel o TTT A g ry BE 2 16 User Management The new user management and security features include Temporary simple desk locking mechanism User management for up to 32 users Users have privilege levels These levels of privilege can prevent an inexperienced user from destroying show data Users can have their own user profile User profiles include views and default settings even a set of default views that can be loaded into any show Multiple users can share one user profile although they can have different privilege levels Forced login when the desk starts up as an option When you get a new desk or you update your old version All user management features are disabled by default If you do not touch them you will not notice a difference to the older versions of grandMA software Internally you will be automatically logged in as administrator working with a default user profile The user management is not show dependent It is affecting all shows on your desk The Micro has only one default user no login and no User profiles Parts of the user profles can be added from the loaded show All following chapte
232. ed tracks Choose one of the three commands A BEFORETIME Events that are before the current time will be selected B ALL All events on given tracks will be selected C AFTER TIME Events that are after the current time will be selected Selecting the Current Event Only one event can be defined as the current event In the graphic mode this event will blink In text mode this text line event will be yellow Its position is shown in the timecode control bar You can select the current event one way or the other Graphically with the mouse Choose the SELECT mouse tool Make a selection that contains only one event or click only on one event With the encoders in the bar Select the track with the track encoder second one Select the event with the event encoder third one With the XY encoder in text mode Simply scroll through the list Deleting Events Graphically with the mouse Select the DELETE mouse tool The cursor will show an arrow with a large Drag a frame or click on an event Events that you click on or that are inside the frame will be deleted With the DELETE SELECTION key Make a selection or select the current event Then press DELETE SELECTION If more than one event is going to be deleted you will be asked to confirm that Attention mouse users Please be aware that if you have chosen the DELETE mouse tool this tool stays active So wherever you click with the mouse it will
233. elect a ready made profile Select a profile from the menu number or profile name has a blue background which will display the profile as a graphics and press SELECT PATH The selected profile will appear in the PATH column For some of the pre defined profiles the curve position may partly lie outside of the coordinate system A fixture can follow this negative amplitude only if it is not already positioned at it s ultimate stop For self created profiles you cannot place the curve outside of the coordinate system assigning a self created profile to a FADE path touch the field DIM PATH or MOVE PATH and press the right encoder Menu SELECT FADE PATH opens Turn the encoder and choose an empty path User 1 User 16 NO PTAH if you don t want to assign a profile LOAD PROFILE if you want to assign a profile to a path Click to a profile in the overview profile gets a blue background Press button CHOOSE PROFILE now the profile is assigned to a pathand the menu SELECT FADE M OVE PATH opens Press button SELECT PATH the path with the assigned profile is assigned to the cue Press SELECT PATH and the profile is assigned to a cue in th epath column or create or change a profile touch the field DIM PATH or MOVE PATH and press the right encoder menu SELECT FADE PATH opens Turn the encoder and choose an empty path User 1 User 16 Press LOAD PROFILE to load a new profile or change an existing
234. elected fixtures or channels will be displayed in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window in yellow characters Press the STORE key once LED within the key is on Using the touchscreen or left mouse click select the desired group key in the GROUP window on the display The selected fixtures are now stored in this group STORE LED is off You can now name this group using the keyboard Enter the name or description and confirm with ENTER Press the CLEAR key once This deselects the group of fixtures and dimmer channels For further groups simply repeat the process Delete Groups press DELETE button press groupbutton of relevant group 2 11 Creating presets effects and group keys automatically 3 3 2 Calling up groups Groups can be called up by A left mouse click Direct touch on screen 57 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Pressing the GROUP key once entering the group number with the keyboard or keypad and confirming with ENTER Press the GROUP key once Pressing the ENTER key once will lock GROUP as preset in the Command Line Then enter the group number on the numeric keypad and call it up pressing ENTER Groups Group 1 By pressing the CLEAR key once all selected Fixtures and Channels are deselected no longer displayed in yellow Proceed as follows to separately activate selected Fixtures Dimmers or called up groups in the desired stored order NEXT key onc
235. eleted New Patch of Fixtures Fixtures which are present in the fixture Sheet can directly patched in the DM X Sheet select fixture in fixture sheet with mous or touch press button Assign LED lits press empty space in the DM X sheet the fixture will be patched if the fixture needs more channels as available in this area the procedure will be stopped Look for an area with enough empty channelsin a row Note when you take action in the DM X sheet and Full Access is aktive dont press Save after closing Full Access otherwise all changes in the DM X shet will be rejected Direct DMX access to non patched channels Using the CommandLine you can also assign values to non patched channels DMX x y ATz eg DMX 2 35 AT50 channel 2 B 35 will be set to a value of 50 This value will appear as parked channel on the DM X sheet De parking values GODMXx y The non patched values will disappear from the DM X sheet 2 11 Auto Create Creating presets effects and group keys automatically For most of the Fixtures in the library there are ready made presets that can be created in this window Further more ready made effects and group keys for each Fixture and Dimmer can be also be created open AUTO CREATE in SETUP Menu 2 11 1 Creating Presets automatically Call up AUTO CREATE in the SETUP menu In the table all Scanner and Dimmer types are displayed that are used in the current Show On the right of
236. els when pushing the fader upwards or downwards Empty Fader has no function Rate Using the Fader you can change all fade and delay times for sequences If the fader is at 50 all times will be executed in the normal way Using the RATE 1 button you can automatically set the Fader back to the 50 position MFade This fader controls master in amp outfade in a range from 0 to 10 seconds It is used when starting or switching off the running chase With the encoder the master fade can be set to DEFAULT In this position the predefined M Fade from the menu setup defaults playback timing will be used Temp Use the Fader to temporarily fade in the first Cue step then the previous status will be restored similar to the Temp key By a touch on the respective KEY symbol a selection will appear in which any button can be allocated with diffe rent functions Go The cue will be played back with all programmed FADE and DELAY times Go For sequences the previous cue is played back and all changes are executed full tracking using all programmed FADE and DELAY times For Chasers the running direction will be reversed Pause A running cue or a Chaser will be temporarily stopped To continue use GO or GO On Reasserts the priority of the Executor making it the latest action thus overriding other executors which were LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn
237. els will be adjusted automatically when the number of Channels changes Namefield If On has been selected the Channel names are displayed Show Cue Colors ON Colors of tracked blocked values are shown OFF Colors of tracked blocked values are not shown Numbers are shown in yellow and fader bars in grey Column The figure indicates how many channels will be displayed in one column Clicking on that figure you can enter a new number via keyboard confirm with ENTER The new number will automatically be taken over The Channel window can be deleted by pressing the Delete Window key By pressing the X key the Option window will be closed All these settings excl LINK will be stored when storing the VIEWS 3 2 Storing VIEWS 3 5 8 DIMMER OPTION In the Channel Sheet you can adapt different basic settings for each individual Dimmer channel Press Edit key and choose the channel on the Touchscreen The CHANNEL OPTION window will open The Dimmer channel can be renamed using the keyboard Next to Type the type of Dimmer is displayed next to ID the corresponding number and next to Patch the DM X address for this Channel Pressing the WITH MASTER key display changes to NO MASTER will be indicated by a dark blue background the Dimmer channel will be output without regard to the GRAN DM ASTER If a Dimmer channel was modified in this window the Dimmer channel s number or name will be displayed on
238. en a command line window on the screen Whenever this window has the input focus title is shown in deep blue all keystrokes of the PC keyboard go into the command line If the input focus goes somewhere else the PC keyboard will no longer work with the command line Touching the title or the bottom line of the command line window will give the input focus back to it To permanently lock the the PC keyboard to command line input press the SCROLL LOCK key You will hear a beep and the SCROLL LOCK lamp will be on indicating that the PC keyboard is now locked to command line operation If the PC keyboard is locked you can not use it for other operations like naming presets etc But another push of the SCROLL LOCK key will unlock it If you are using the PC keyboard as command line input you can only enter valid commands and values If you try to enter FIQQQ the command line will audiably warn you upon the entry of the First Q This is because the only two commands that the command line recognises that start Fl are FIXTURE or FIX In most cases it is not necessary to enter the full name of a keyword the letter F is totally sufficient for FIXTURE You can find all keywords and their shortest form in section 9 2 command overview 10 1 7 Using the command line history It is possible to recall previous commands from the history into the current command line There they can be re executed or edited and executed a Left click with the mouse in t
239. end messages to desks user in the net close the menu with HELP Menu Information for button and cursor functions close the menu with Gk INFO Menu Information about software version F yd Close menu GR Buttons Here you can adjust the hold down time for some hard and softkeys Here you can swith on off the horizontal cursor buttons during the value setting The cursor left right can adjust the next parameter e g if in COLRM IX the parameter CM 1 is set the vertical Cursor adjusts CM 1 the horizontal Cursor may adjust this setting CM 2 Chat set the acoustic signal on off Current IPs shows the actual IP address of this pocketPC Shortcuts Switch on the shortcut options Disable without chek mark shortcuts are disabled Enable with check mark shortcuts can be switched on and off Close menu with Shortcuts If shortcut option ison ENABLED activate shortcuts with this button bright background or deactivate shortcuts dark background MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Li urTrine COMMAND 1 COMMAND 2 a le Both menues contain the same buttons as the COMMAND WINDOW on the grandMA console The limited space PRES ner ae makes necessary to devide the menue to COMMAND 1 and COMMAND 2 Soe noe secre Open COMMAND Window Press Button COM M AND2 Every time you press this butt
240. eport_seq_ number of sequence number or area of Cues enter report_group_ number or area of Groups enter report_ world_ number or area of Worlds enter report_preset_ number or area of Preset Only Report will create reports of all Cues sequences Groups Worlds CAUTION will produce large files The right display will show the view form of the report If there are more columns available than can be shown on the display proceed by using the arrow buttons If there are more lines available scroll on using the Encoder next to the display id With each REPORT command the previously active contents of the REPORT index will be deleted to be replaced by the chosen files 103 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA 1_ No 2 Name 3 MIB A Trig 5 Fade 6 Outfade 7 Delay 8 Outdelay 9 Snap 12 Loop 13 Lo Del 14 Li Del 15 Link 16 Info A SL300 1 18 SL300 1 19 SL300 1 20 SL300 1 21 SL300 1 22 SL300 1 23 SL300 2 24 SL300 2 25 SL300 2 26 SL300 2 27 SL300 2 28 SL300 2 104 LIGH 2 192 168 177 114 _ ia Report Lo Server 192 168 177 114 Benutzername boot Klicken Sie hier um weitere Informationen zum Browsen von FTP Sites zu erhalten BACKUP Ci colors Ipoc42 COFIXTURES Corte Ga gobos CiLog CI NET T P2 CI NET TYP3 I NEWw_oma ime new_show CI NEWFIXTURES Upsr psr_conv orm CI
241. er M Sorting amp Readout a Display Filter None Filter is inactive all fixtures are shown Programmer only Only those fixtures are shown that are in the programmer Parked Only Only the parked fixtures are shown Selected Sequence Only the Selected Sequence fixtures are shown Selected Sequence No Default Values Only the Selected Sequence fixtures are shown but without default values Filter Multi Control Delete Window Fixtures Values Auto Auto sorted by Numbers sot Cos Rows Filter FRN TE Nan PanTit RY ol t Cn Fost Haus When On the display filter is shown as buttons in the fixture sheet Use these buttons to switch over the display without calling up the Options menu a05 60 50 E ee 50 Multi Control L300 6 When On the filters LAYER CONTROL and PRESET CONTROL bars are replaced by a line with 3 pull down menus LESL300 7 b containing all buttons This saves space on the screen Programmer Selected Only Sequence LAYER CONTROLON selectable in the Display Layer Modulator Modulator Modulator Modulator Table Size Speed Phase aan i PRESET CONTROLON selectable in the Display Layer E 67 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 smart Values Align Olf G1 Gubud Vales Inside Cunctional Diock Cunction No Range Yicuakze Subfunction Physical Moda M
242. er Pb 1 Pb 8 Toggle When engaged it will switch over from Full to Out and vice versa Full Will switch the Master to 100 Out Will switch the M aster to 0 Using the Fader you can apply a infinitely variable fading between 0 and 100 The Button and Fader functions cannot be modified 113 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 small key symbol this sequence is locked and cannot be edited dark green background A high priority temporyry Selected Sequence big key symbol this executor is locked and canno ight green backgroupd T Tracking Mode be edited or Selected Sequencef is acti foisted ji q is activ 114 5 2 Small EXECUTOR Window grandMA These windows are located above every EXECUTOR FADER or after pressing the LIST key twice in the right TFT display for the EXECUTOR buttons grandMA light ultra light and Micro After pressing the LIST FADERS key these windows will be displayed above each of the EXECUTOR FADERS After pressing the LIST KEYS key twice they will be displayed on the TFT display for the EXECUTOR buttons The name of the assigned sequence is displayed in the headline The shown figure displays the number of the sequence Touching the Sheet not the header on the touch screen or using the left mouse Key will open the EDIT menu 4 3 Editing Sequences or 4 4 Editing Chasers Touching the title bar on the touchscreen or using the lef
243. er etc Go Go Pause buttons Only effective for the selected sequence The selected sequence can be assigned using the Select key recognisable by the green title bar of the small EXECUTOR window above it Ports and connections on the rear side a m Lamps 1x on the top at Micro Light and UltraLight b LTC IN AUDIO IN 4x DMX Out 2x at Micro and UltraLight 1x DMX In and 1x DMX Thru not at Micro and UltraLight Reset MIDI OUT THROUGH IN Remote for touch board Ethernet c os i o TT STea TO a Extern Monitors left and right System Monitor center for service only 2x Serial Ports 1x Parallel Port Printer USB Ports not Micro Do not use this ports Main switch Power and fuse zji D HAE LLOR TELE MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING att O pmi i 10 Select key to address the Selected Sequenz T T Keys To directly process Go Go etc for any Executor or to lock Executors 12 Page change over For Channel faders Executor faders and Executor keys 13 Executor buttons can be defined e g as Got Go Pause Flash etc 15 Select Cues Groups Executors etc in combination with numeric keypad 14 Manual Timing Setting for Executor Buttons 16 Blind Freeze Clear keys 17 Blackout key for Dimmer channels 18 Grand Master for Dimmer channels
244. er on the right of the Display In the active window the focus coloured frame or a highlighted cell red blue background can be moved upwards or downwards By pressing the Encoder when turning it you can move the focus to the left or to the right If a pulldown menu is opened you can use the Encoder to scroll through the list When you reach the desired value you can select it by a pressing the Encoder If in a chart a cell is selected with a value or a time you can open an entry window by pressing the Encoder In this window you can also use the Encoder to adjust the value pressing the Encoder again will accept the new value If a Fixture or a Channel is selected coloured frame you can open the options by shortly pressing the Encoder Encoder below the TFT Display The currently chosen function is displayed above the appropriate Encoder The currently set value for the last activated lamp is displayed below the respective function The values displayed percent decimal do always refer to the active window e g Fixture or Channel Sheet Use the encoder to modify the values of this function If you press the Encoder while turning it you can modify its sensitivity default setting 2 13 item 6 By pressing the respective button you can select the next function in this case Gobo1 Pressing on the arrow will open a menu in which all functions are displayed and can be selected directly Pressing on Align Off a
245. er value SPEED here you can set the effect speed however the graphic s movements also depend on the settings FROM TO SPEED SCALE and RATE FADE here you can MASTER FADE here you can set the time to fade out and fade in the effect after start and stop enter a name for the BITMAP EFFECT in the LABEL line and confirm with ENTER yN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Placing a BITMAP EFFECT on a fader button press ASSIGN once press on an Executor button not yet assigned or press on an Executor fader small Executor window EM PTY inthe ASSIGN menu press the BITMAP EFFECT button inthe overview select the desired effect using the Encoder and leave the menu by pressing X 7 3 Starting the Effect open the BITMAP EFFECTS WINDOW press the button in the BITMAP EFFECTS pool Or if the effect had been placed on a fader or a button start the effect using the fader or button As is the case with the effects you can modify the speed while the effect is running WARNING If you open the BITM AP WIZARD in the EDIT menu the effect will stay active 139 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 8 Remote Control 8 1 Timecode All sequences chases and cues on the grandM A can be synchronized by using Linear Timecode LTC or MIDI Timecode MTC Tim
246. ers HTP or LTP with 8 or 16 bit resolution optional also available with 4096 channels ultra Light 1024 With NSPs expandable to 16 384 parameters on the Micro only 1024 channels are possible Virtually unlimited number of presets memories cue lists and effects 1 3 2Ergonomics full colour TFT touch screens with a wide angle of view and 2 external one on the ultra light monitors optional encoders for display setting 5 master encoders for data entry 20 10 motor faders and extra silent GO and GO Buttons 10 non motorized Faders on the ultra light and Micro Numeric keypad plus standard keyboard and mouse only with grandM A Trackball 1 3 3General user functions Constant access to single units or groups Fixture library with updates supplied via the Internet Selective programming for free combination of memories and effects Free switching between stage orientated movements and DMX control in combination with 3 D 1 3 4Hardware Hard Disk Drive resp CF and 3 5 Floppy Drive 12 MB flash memory for self contained operating system not on the ultra light and Micro Protection against radio interference CE Norm Inputs MIDI Sound Remote Go SMPTE Analogue 10 V DMX 512 Output 4 Times DM X 512 2 on the ultra light and Micro MIDI Printer Ethernet e Full tracking backup and sync mode with second unit 1 3 5Dimensions and Weight 4 grandMA Width 48
247. es Pressing this key once will switch the display to MACRO NOT TIMED In the Sheet the DELAY times will be displayed on a dark background and the Macro will be executed without delay times You can leave the menu with the CLOSE key 153 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 9 2 Assigning and Activating QUIKEYS You can display and call up various keys commands and functions using the QUIKEY pool Display Softkeys Create a QUIKEY window 3 1 Creating a Window Press the EDIT key and click or touch on a key in the QUIKEY pool or Make aright click with the mouse ona key The QUIKEY OPTIONS pool will open Clicking on one of the functions will assign it to the key Using this method it is possible to customise the console allowing quick and easy access to commonly used functions List of functions ALIGN OFF Switches off the ALIGN function ALIGN LEFT ALIGN key pressed once ALIGN RIGHT ALIGN key pressed twice ALIGN BOTH ALIGN key pressed three times ALIGN SYM ALIGN key pressed four times CLEAR SELECTION CLEAR key pressed once CLEAR ACTIVE CLEAR key pressed twice CLEAR RELEASE CLEAR key pressed three times VALUES M ODE Switches the FIXTURE and CHANNEL SHEET to the VALUES mode FADE M ODE Switches the FIXTURE and CHANNEL SHEET to the FADE time mode DELAY MODE Switches the FIXTURE and CHANNEL SHEET to the DELAY time mode ASSIGN ASSIGN key EM PTY Creates
248. ets As the embedded value is nothing but a link to the original preset all changes of the original preset will be eset I hereta contained in all those presets containing this link All Embedded Presets as well as all presets having a link to another preset can be distinguished by a black frame in the Preset Sheet preset4 i Creating an Embedded Preset call up a preset adjust additional values or positions use STORE to save the new preset to an empty button in the Preset Pool mind the preset filter setting The Preset 1 black frame around the new preset indicates an Embedded Preset value 1 Example activate Preset 1 and save it with an additional value as Preset 2 In the Preset Pool Preset 2 will be displayed e with a black frame indicating an Embedded Preset Create Preset 3 in the same way If you change Preset 1 this will automatically change Presets 2 and 3 Editing an Embedded Preset press EDIT call up a preset in the Fixture Sheet all Embedded Presets will now be displayed with a black frame make your changes press UPDATE and confirm with OK If you change the values of all Embedded Presets they will become a normal preset after an update If an Embedded Preset or a part of an Embedded Preset e g only the PAN channel is kept the character of the Embedded Preset will also be kept Preventing changes by previous Presets e link zu call up the Embedded Preset value 1
249. etwark Sessinns Stations in MEE Ressinn LID Session Name Shovwfie No Name Status Vers Type 1 Fullsize Standale 192168 0 114 5 534 GHA My Station My Scssion IP Addrese TRERSRTE Name fullsire Nane Priovitiy Normal Fatro Invitation Tankis Style Local taton Pi Station MA Network Connections Active Sessions Stations in Session Unconnected 5P Vers 192 168 177 11 3 950 Idle 192 168 177 20 3 950 MA Network Connections Sessions Stations in Session GMA Demo No Name IP Version No Name Status IP 0 Unconnected 1 GMA Demo Master 192 168 0 111 iy 3 RR 192 168 0111 3 940 MA Network Connections Sessions Stations in Session grandMA Name IP Versioni No Name Status IP Vers i Unconnected 1 grandMA Master 192 168 0 111 3 940 1 I 192 168 0111 3 940 2 light Slave 192 168 0 145 3 940 3 APU Slave 192 168 0 1 01 3 940 15 3 Creating a Session Before you start a Session make sure that the appriate settings from chapter 14 2 have been made Connections always have to be made when starting a Session Only now canthe different units 3D Offline grandM As be integrated in this Session After all settings are made press the Start New Session button and confirm with OK The name of the unit will automatically be accepted as Session name or If you want to assign a name to the Session click into the empty cell on the side of Session Name enter a name and conf
250. exchange fixtures that are part of a seqency eg dimmers of another manufacturer or fixtures having more features Group master moves on each page even if the fader is empty or a group master moves although it was not switched on In case of an admittedly improbable crash of the console can troubleshoot the cause Answer If the DELETE SHOW button was pressed while loading a show alle configuration settings were reset to their defaults All settings must then be entered anew Sorry The consoles have different version numbers and will therefore not be recognized by the network Update the consoles to the current software version All fixtures of a Cue can be selected using the EDIT function lt in this setting you can save a group using STORE that is a SELECT ALL ACTIVES function so to speak If you delete or exchange fixtures in the SETUP all values of the matching sequence that are not necessary will also be deleted cannot be restored l e if a new fixture does not have e g a color wheel the color wheel values for this ID will be deleted and cannot be triggered even if you install the old fixture again afterwards If the new fixture has more features than the old one these will not be accounted for It is recommended to copy the show to another name and test exchanging the fixture there Under LOOPS LINKS possibly in a macro too only the fader number without page number has been entered for t
251. execute this function Now the selected and patched fixtures can bei positioned in a 3D stage display Leave menu with X press Save to save the modified settings Don t Save will discard the modifications with Cancel you stay in this menu 2 2 3 Position of fixtures In the upper right part of the window you ll find a simplified representation of the stage that can be used to position the fixtures Settings will also be taken over onto the grandM A 3D If this part of the window is active title bar Stage is displayed in dark blue you can modify the stage view by turning or turning plus simultaneously pressing the Encoder Setting the stage size In the geometrical system of the grandMA Stage window or in the grandMA 3D you can position objects in the three dimensional space It is modelled on the geometrical system used in architecture The X Y level is defined as base area stage and the height as Z axis To adjust the stage size press Stage Setup LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de grand MA Click on the values and enter a value in the entry window the values do always refer to the centre of the stage By turning or turning and simultaneously pressing the Encoder you can change the stage views Close menu with X Positioning fixtures You can only set the specific group selected in the
252. explained in the appropriate chapters of the grandMa User s Instructions alternative operation and special key layout will be explained on the following pages The following devices are suitable So far the following products have proved successful as of 08 2004 COMPAQ iPaq Serie 36 38xx with extensionPack PCMCIA TOSHIBA e740 e750 version WiFi recommended by MA Lighting TOSHIBA e800 recommended by MA Lighting DELL Axim X5 with Linksys CF Wireless Adapter HP iPaq Pocket PC H5400 family with ROM update from 17 03 2003 Fujitsu Siemens Pocket Loox 710 and LOOX N520 recommended by MA Lighting HP iPaq H4155 HP iPaq H 5550 BT as access points as of 12 2003 ASUS SpaceLink WL 300 recommended by MA Lighting D Link DI 614 3 COM WLAN Access point 2000 D Link DWL 900APP Wireless Access Point D Link DWL 800AP E POX EWL A11 Accesspoint US ROBOTICS USR 5450 LANCOM L 54 g Wireless recommended by MA Lighting If in the network there is a device having a transmission rate of more than 10M bit the whole network will be reduced to that transmission rate As at the time being all Access Points work with this rate using a PDA can potentially affect the network Installation Install the Wireless Access Point according the the manufacturer s instructions On the PocketPC select the installed adapter under SETTINGS CONNECTIONS NETWORK ADAPTER and enter the IP address plus subnet mask number 255 255 255 0 under PROPERTIES 15
253. ffect Group will open the EDIT EFFECT menu in the right TFT display z Or Manual OFF Pressing the ADD LINE key once will open the SELECT PARAM ETER window Now select a function e g PAN Af ter selecting a function the SELECT TABLE window will open where you can select an Effect for the chosen function PWM Pulse width modulation RANDOM Random fade ins of individual channels of the selected function CHASE sequential flash to 100 function SIN Sinus function COS Co sinus function LIN Saw tooth ascending LIN Saw tooth descending TRIANGLE Triangle function PHASE1 PHASE2 PHASE3 Normally used to create rainbow color effects on fixtures with color mixing Each of the phases is exactly out of phase with the other This allows for an even and offset application across 3 parameters By pressing the USER DEFINED key turns dark gray user created two dimensional forms can be selected for the PAN TILT function If a form is to be created or modified press the NEW or EDIT key to open the EDIT FORMS menu 6 7 Creating and storing virtual forms 123 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 In order to assign further Effects to the selected Fixtures Dimmers in this group press the Add Line key again A new line will be displayed and the Select Parameter window will open Choose a function now and assign an Effect Up to 16 individual Effects can be combi
254. figuration MA Network Remotes Standalone x Location User Rights 17 3 grand MA Videol7 3 grand MA Video This menu can only be used in connection with the grandM A Video software For further information on the installation an operation please refer to the grandM A Video manual that you can P download from our website www malighting com 2 Port edi Logged In NSP 17 4 REMOTE This menu can be used to see the connected remote handheld PCs NOTE Disable Remote when a show is running Send Message Disconnect Remote 204 MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING hasa Pocket PC ei 00X 4x 10 21 Sires ae ee m F Values Sort By and ES f Readout Presets Mear G1 Gobo1 G1 Rot 1 2 3 4 5 6 EA 8 E 1 FUJITSU coe SIEMENS Note WLAN Power save mode must be disabled 18 PDA Remote Control ntroduction The PocketPC is the ideal complement to our grandMA console It combines the functionality of a console with the mobility of a compact organiser It serves to remotely control the major operations and must be used together with the console It is not intended to and cannot replace the programming at the console as for reasons of visibility only the most important menus will be displayed Working with these menus is
255. first Now press the Delete Group key The group will be deleted the Attributes will automatically be added to the Free Attributes In this column the Attributes of the selected group will be displayed By selecting an Attribute this will be removedfrom this group and added to the Free Attributes In order to assign Free Attributes to another group this group has to be selected first Selecting the Attribute will add it to the currently selected group By pressing the Default key all groups except 3 will be deleted Almost all Attributes will be displayed as Free Attributes in the right column In the remaining 3 groups the fixed Attributes Pan Tilt Col Mix1 4 and Blade1A 4B are allocated These Attributes can not be moved into other groups indicated by fix next the Attribute s name The changes will take effect and will be saved only after leaving the Full or Live Access menu and pressing the SAVE button 2 5 Modifying Scanners FIXTURE TYPES In the Full Access menu open this menu by pressing the Fixture Types button The upper part of the Display shows all fixtures that are currently used in the Show No Numerical of the individual fixtures currently signed on in this Show If this number is displayed in red and with grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 an asterisk this fixture has been modified Qty Number of fixtures of this type Name Name
256. for YES Press UPDATE to confirm the modifications and save them in the Cue Chuusy Biles You can modify the cells Name Intens Speed F Soft and Fade directly by a right mouse click wo Te un UMK 129 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 View Ab iunning Ettscts arn EX Munil nFF Fizuli NFF Ea re i 4 oo Hes te Kiele ae Pa is hese FP sin bled trot Pa im heen LTE csslal CLOSE 130 6 6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu In this menu all currently playing back Effect Groups will be displayed Press the EFFECT key twice On older consoles this key is not labeled and is positioned between the VIEW and GOTO keys An appropriate label can be ordered from MA or from your local dealer Or When choosing an Effect Group from the Effect Pool the respective key will be displayed above the Encoders Press the LIST key on the touch screen By pressing the ALL OFF key you can switch off all Effect Groups simultaneously You can leave the menu with the CLOSE key Inthe left part of the menu all manually called up Effect Groups will be displayed Pressing the OFF key on the right side of MANUAL all these Effect Groups will be switched off The middle part of the menu shows all Effect Groups that areplaying back via EXECUTOR faders Pressing the OFF key right of the EXECUTOR will switch off these Effect Groups 5 1 1 Assigning Effect Groups t
257. for the selected layout using the Encoders below the screen to set the bitmap starting position after switching the page you can also turn the bitmap around and change its rotation point The cross wires and the projection frame are very useful when setting up the bitmap effect OFFSET here you can change the bitmap to matrix position the projection frame will be offset along the x or y axis ROTATION OFFSET here set the pivot point for a rotaton the cross wires will be offset along the x or y axis ROTATION here enter the bitmap position WIDTH here enter the bitmap width HEIGHT here enter the bitmap height 137 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 ap Wizara x Scale 1 1 Scale to best fit Scale to fit width Grey Scale Scale to Correction fit height i Red UE Green UE Blue 00 y Tile Create Import Save Load Delete Text Bitmap Bitmap Bitmap Bitmap B ap Offset Scale ard 1 of 3 t tdt Atmap Ettect 16 Eytmap Ettecr a EA None Preset J zz peas scroll el Geel oS Hugh Edit Bitmap Effect 16 Bitmap Effect Bitmap z Preset None Preset None 138 press X to return to the EDIT menu enter the values for the individual functions e g horizontal shift or rotation Enter preset values if TOGGLE is active is green you can combine multiple settings ROTATE RIGHT will insert 0
258. for their operations Keyword Operation lt lt lt Go back with no time gt gt gt Go forward with no time FIX Fix an executor This executor will ignore page changes FLASH_DOWN _OFF Temporary down flash of executor FLASH_UP _OFF Temporary up flash of executor 159 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 160 M LIGH GO GO GOTO LEARN LOAD OFF ON PAUSE SELECT SWOP _OFF TEMP TOGGLE TOP Go forward Go backwards Goto cue Learn speed Prepare next step of executor wait for GO Switch off something Switch on something Pause Select default executor Temporary up flash for executor and downflash for all others Temporarily run an executor Toggle executor on and off Goto first cue Object Keywords Object keywords are used as targets by basic operational keywords and by executing keywords They represent data that can be manipulated Keyword ALL CHASES ALL SEQUENCES CHANNEL CUE DMX DMX BTN EFFECT EXEC FADER FADERBUTTON1 FADERBUTTON2 FADERBUTTON3 FIXTURE FEATURE FORM GROUP MACRO MDI_BTN PAGE PRESET SEQU TIMECODE TOUCH_BTN VIEW VIEWBTN All executors assigned as chasers All executors assigned as sequence A conventional light One step or memory of a cuelist A DMX channel A Remote triggered by incoming DM X signals An freely editable effect generator An executor is the physical front end for executing sequences etc
259. g 192 168 0 x Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 PATHPORT Node Configuration Name BACKTRUSS LEFT Additional Info Desk Config IP 192 168 177 77 192 168 177 111 ID 00 00035E Subnet 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 Serial 431 Software 03000038 3 Hardware 0 0 0 f Backlight Gat p ateway 19216802 Esen MAC 00 04a1 00 0 af Patch xDMX Slot Type z Default 1 unidir virt female sink Source 01 2 unidir virt female sink DMX Configuration SAVE x DMX via Ethernet J Operation Mode ETON ie nee In Show i AX C arameters 16384 arameters EO Local gt Fixtures Fixtures is OMX ines E DMO tines i Ethernet Output i grandMA Protocol Configuration gt DMX Slot 1 A NONE ork amp DMX Slot 2 B NONE NSP Config DMX Slot 3 C NONE Ee sah 2 gt DMX Slot 4 D NONE DMX Slot 5 E NONE _ DMX Slot 7 G NONE DMxX Output On DMX Slot 8 H NONE a Enabled if Standalone _ Wysiwyg Ethernet Output amp Autofocus Mode Wysiwyg Output amp Autofocus Enabled Connection ID 1 32 1 40 DMX Slot 6 F NONE _ DMX via Ethernet If the Node is activated after having opened the menu you can look for the Node by pressing the Scan for Nodes button to be displayed in the table In the left table all found DM X outputs are indicated by a number These are the assig
260. g with or without Status Will copy the values of the step before into the step after but only to a position having no value this wouldn t be wise The moved Cue will now be a Cue Only 4 3 5 Copying Cues Press the COPY Key once LED is on Press the SEQUENCE Key once LED is on Using the keypad enter the number of the Sequence from which the Cues are to be copied Press the CUE Key once LED is on Using the keypad enter the number of the first Cue to be copied If only one Cue is to be copied continue with the AT Key Pressing the Key will copy the selected cue and the cue indicated by the subsiquent number Pressing the THRU Key on the Keypad will copy the Cues from to including the last Cue When pressing the Key the Cue with the next number will excluded from the copying operation Press the AT key once LED is on Enter the new destination number for the copied Cues using the keypad Example The Cues are to be inserted between Cue 10 and Cue 11 Number these Cues e g as 10 1 possible Cue numbers are 10 001 10 999 This way up to 999 Cues can be inserted between two existing Cues Confirm with ENTER When copying one Cue the COPY window will open After pressing the key on the left of Statuscopy you can choose between Only the values and times actually stored in this Cue will be copied The tracked information will be disregarded The Cue will be copied as it would actually be realize
261. g Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Fixture Layer Name Qty frontO1 10 back01 10 dimmer01 2 blinder 1 dimmermeu New lt lt lt gt gt gt ID_ Fix i as ID Cha 11 20 ie 2 3 3 5 103 Fixtures and Channels in Layer Type ID Func Till Sw Fixturetype STAGE LIGHT 300 Strobe Dimmer Dimmer amp bit COLOUR FADER DIMME krom library Multipatch Dummy SL300 lt gt Creating groups with Scanners Dimmers Delete Line The selected group is deleted All fixtures with all settings in this group are deleted Moves Lines The selected group can be moved to another position in the table If the M oves Lines button was used this will be displayed in red By selecting a new position in the table the group will be moved 2 2 5 Adjusting individual fixture groups Select a group in the Fixture Layer this will now be displayed below Adding identical fixtures Select New dark blue and shortly press the Encoder right to the Display The Create New Fixtures or Channels window will open In this window all types of fixtures are displayed that are already present in this show Select the type of fixture by turning the Encoder Proceed like indicated 3 pages earlier Creating patching and positioning groups with Scanners Dimmers Adding new fixtu
262. g assignment press DETTE Press the Touchboard key or the appropriate key once The assigned playback keys will always be executed directly The assigned playback keys will be executed in combination with the previously selected commands Example If an OFF key is programmed on a TOUCHBOARD key but PAUSE is activated 1 9 Layout and Controls item 11 not the OFF command but the PAUSE command will be executed when pressing this key 149 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 TOOLS Remote DMX in gt STORE Ran anon PAGE 1 amp 2 333 5 a ee Ensto Emy conte ee Empis Empir Emetr Emory ter Emmy Empis Empis Emote Empty a Ener Emy Empar Empis Emetr Emer Emser Ener Exper Enty Empis Empis Empir Empty Emety Emory Eey Emy Emis Empis Empir Empty feoty Emoty Ear m a Poms EEDA me 1e meaa FADER Coe Remote Off DMX in al x DELETE 150 8 3 Remote Control by DMX IN DM X IN can be used to MERGE the signals of a second control board with those of the grandM A and transmit them to the stage via the same data line If during this process channels from the grandM A and from the second control board are mixed up only the higher value will be transmitted DM X IN will only be linked to DM X OUTA and will not be output via Ethernet For DM X M erge information 2 9 1 Via the DM X IN socket assigned commands can be called up from an external DM X console The DM X input
263. g the True Tracking Backup live The grandM A Full Tracking Backup system has been developed mainly to ensure and cover any kind of live situation and critical Show conditions Show recordings and final rehearsals will however be even better protected by saving Show data at regular intervals in between by activating the Autosave or double clicking on the BACKUP button One major advantage of a synchronisation via EtherNet is the possible combination with the DM X EtherNet distribution in this the currently installed ArtNet and PathPort protocols will be used In order not to have to switch the DM X signals from the Master system to the Backup system in case of an emergency the grandM A Master and the Slave console can be connected in a network via an Ethernet DM X converter As long as the Master Slave connection remains established in the network the grandMA Master will actively transmit DM X data via the protocol the Slave system will ignore the DM X Ethernet settings As soon as the Slave system is switched over into M aster mode it will immediately activate ArtNet protocol and start transmitting DM X data All internal DM X interfaces will be active at any time 197 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 16 3 Setting up a Network System In order to set up a network configuration within the grandMA family you can connect consoles of different types or with different numbers of DM X channels The g
264. g to Y THRU Range from the beginning up to the end The meaning of beginning and end depend on the context FIXTURE 10 THRU ENTER will select all fixtures from 10 upwards Thru can of course also be used to create ranges of values like CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT 0 THRU FULL ENTER or CHANNEL 1 THRU 10 AT FULL FADE 1 DELAY 0 THRU 5 ENTER As starting keyword SEQU ENTER SEQU becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD SEQU range list ENTER Select devices included in sequences Sequence numbers must be in the range of 1 999 SEQU range list AT see AT Apply values to devices included in sequences As target for the following operational commands EDIT Opens edit menu for sequence IF Deselect devices which are not part of the sequence IFOUTPUT Search for stage output of sequence INVERT Invert selection of sequence LABEL Change name of sequence MOVE Move sequence to another position as target for the following executing commands ON Knock in all devices contained in sequence OFF Knock out all devices contained insequence MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de PAUSE PARK all devices contained in sequence GO UN PARK all devices contained in sequence STORE STORE object list ENTER All objects in the object list must be of the same type If no object is given a new cueis stored into the default executor
265. g with external sync it is not possible to change the time manually There are many different ways to change the current time of your show when using the internal time base Graphically with the mouse left mouse click somewhere into the timeline With the encoder Turn the time encoder leftmost to change the current time Each click on the encoder means one frame If you p ress and turn this encoder simultaneously each click means one second If you press the encoder without turning you can enter an absolute time With the jump to breakpoint commands You will find them as the outer playback symbols in the timecode control bar and as command line functions lt lt lt and gt gt gt Time will jump to the next available breakpoint in the given direction With the event encoder second in the bar Whenever you select a new event time will jump to the exact time of that event 142 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH grand MA 8 1 4 Recording a Timecode Show Recording is enabled only if the timecode show is not write protected options menu Recording will always be live on stage and can be done in three ways a Fully automatic recording with external synchronisation The current time is given by the SM PTE signal and every executor command or fader movement will be added to the timecode show until y
266. ger cable runs or branched wiring a 10 100 Base T switch is strongly recommended like a DM X booster on larger DM X networks The following example shows a network configuration with two identical consoles and an ArtNet DM X Node for DM X changeover and distribution All components are star wired from a central EtherNet hub using standard 10 100 Base T cabling When deciding for a Switch please make sure that its Cache is as big as possible 201 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA 17 Channel extension with the NSP NETWORK SIGNAL ive Network Sessions PRO c E S SO R ame Showfile With a NSP grandMA consoles except MICRO can be extended to 32 768 channels 16 384 parameters The Zonas console can be connected to up to 16 NSP so that you can control 32 768 channels This way you save cable metres and can bridge greater distances easily The NSP has to be connected to the console within a session and has to be adapted in the DM X NSP configuration menu NOTE If more than 4096 channels are to be used you absolutely need a network having a 100M bit transmission rate Make sure that there are no elements in the network potentially reducing your speed to 10Mbit My Station My Session o No problems will occur in a network environment with consoles having the following serial numbers IP Address grandMA as of SN 490 onwar
267. ght and Micro Left click selects a field for keyboard or encoder input etc Right click goes to Modify opens windows with options sorting columns by clicking on the headline Pressing and holding the middle mouse key changes output values Hold and M ove The displays select one by a click into empty space The grandM A offers different windows M enus with information and control keys spreadsheets key groups dimmer channel listings and fader symbols Clicking and dragging using the left mouse key on the headline moves a window you can alter the size by clicking and dragging the left and bottom edges Right clicking with the mouse on the headline of a window opens options menu for that window Spreadsheets comparable to those used in Excel or Access Click and drag with the left mouse key and you can select a range of cells not on all screens possible Left click on a column headline will resize or move the column Right click on a column headline will sort by this column Emergency help Like any computer the grandMA may crash To resolve a crash 1 Perform a reset by pressing CTRL ALT DEL or the RESET key on the backside of the unit or Power Off on the Ultralight and Micro Only if this doesn t help 2 During the booting use Delete ActShow to delete the current Show 13 Utility M enu In case of any further problem please feel free to contact your dealer or our HOTLINE 49 5251 688865 99 1
268. ground short toggle hours minutes seconds long marked dimension will get a red background and remains set as it is Feature Gobo After confirming with ENTER the COMMAND 2 menu will be called up automatically short choose the Feature long Pull down menu of the Features 210 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Pocket PC GMA Remote Values EEG rst retusa nat I Readout Presets Gobol G1 G1 Rot 0000000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FUJITSU SIEMENS MA toggle Fixture Channel Fader toggle Sort Dir Sort By Readout Switching to Values and Presets fades Delays Values Only DMX Executor ID Cue ID toggle Presets Sheet In the Channel Fader sheet activate the Cursor scroll in the Fixture sheet toggle Cursor scroll Cursor value short Select the parameter if more than one long Calculator when name marked in the Fixture short Choose the Feature short same function as of NEXT key on the console long Pull down menu for Cursor Scroll e scrolling in the Sheet when name is marked frame around the name blinks press OPTIONS will be displayed for Cursor Values name must be marked and frame around the Feature blinks changes the values of the chosen parameter e only with activated Change Parameter in the Button menu gt gt with featur
269. gs to be saved Press the yellow button upper left corner and open the SMART WINDOW OPTIONS menu Set the desired views Headline here features and attributes will be displayed as pull down menus Direct Select here features and attributes will be displayed in a structured overview Select a fixture The SMART window will display all features and attributes belonging to this fixture If e g for Gobos graphics are used as backgrounds these are displayed in the upper part Editing Channel Values press EDIT Press the desired Channel Value button If different fixtures were selected you will be refused to edit them in this case select only one type of fixture Perform the change from the Functions Set menu and afterwards close the menu using the X upper right corner After having returned to the SM ART window the changes have been stored automatically Storing new Channel Values Select a new fixture type Adjust the setting using the Wheel Encoder Calculator or Trackerball press STORE Press the grey empty button Only the value of the selected feature will be stored l e for dimmers only the dimmer values will be stored not e g the PAN values that were changed at the same time Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Smart Coon Bho Crion Mhai Cal Codes Enter New Name Pan Tilt Dimmer
270. h the LOAD button Keyword As it appears in the command line lt lt gt gt gt ALL ALL CHASES ALL SEQUENCES ASS GN AT CHANNEL CLEAR CLEAR_ACTIVE CLEAR ALL CLEAR SELECTION COPY CUE DEF_GO DEF_GO DEF PAUSE DELAY DELETE DMX DMX_BTN EDIT EFFECT ESC EVEN EXEC FADE FADER FADERBUTION1 FADERBUTTON2 FADERBUTTON3 FEATURE FIX FIXTURE FLASH_DOWN FLASH DOWN_OFF FLASH_UP Shortcut Hard key Shortest possible formHow to enter the of the keyword when keyword into the using PC keyboard lt gt ALL ALL C ALL S AS A C CL CLEAR_A CLEAR ALL CLEAR S CO CU DEF DEF_GO DEF P DELA D DMX DM ED EF ES EV E FADE FADER FADERBUTTON 1 FADERBUTTON2 FADERBUTTON3 FE FIX F FLASH_D FLASH_DOWN_O FLASH_U command line lt lt lt gt gt gt QUIKEY CONSOLE CONSOLE ASSIGN AT CHANNEL CLEAR QUIKEY QUIKEY QUIKEY COPY CUE Yellow GO Yellow GO Yellow Pause 2 xTIME DELETE DMX CONSOLE EDIT EFFECT ESCAPE QUIKEY EXECUTOR 1xTIME 2 x EXEC Hit Executor Hit Executor Hit Executor 2 x PRESET FIX FIXTURE CONSOLE CONSOLE CONSOLE Operation Short description of the meaning For a more detailed explanation see chapter 3 Plus Minus Go Back with no time Go Forward with no time All selection with ODD EVEN Accessing all executors with chases Accessing all executors with sequences Assign lt source gt l
271. h zero fadetime and delay if the corresponding fixture was dark when the executor was started Switching off an executor with the Auto PrePos function enabled tries not to destroy the stage look only dimmer channels are fading out When deactivating this sequence the channels will be altered only after the respective dimmer has been set to 0 LOOPS NORMAL use the GO command to execute the next Cue within the LOOP breaking GO use the GO command to cancel the LOOP and to execute the next Cue of the sequence RESTART OPTIONS If the Restart with first cue key is pressed the Sequence will restart always with the first cue If the Restart with actual cue key is pressed the Sequence will restart exactly where it was switched off the last time If the Restart with next cue key is pressed the Sequence will restart one cue after where it was switched off If the Release from last to first cue key is pressed tracked values are released when the executor jumps back to the first cue PRIORITY OPTIONS There are 3 priorities Low lowest Normal middle and High highest Executors having a higher priority cannot be overwritten by Executors of a lower priority In general this applies only for LTP functions PRIVATE EFFECTS Effects saved in this sequence will only use channels that are not used by other sequences So in some cases the effect may not be executed completely as no overlaps are allowed upper graphic
272. have a red background when switching on the respective DM X channel The assigned playback keys will always be executed directly The assigned playback keys will be executed in combination with the previously selected commands Example If an OFF key is programmed on a DM X IN channel but PAUSE is activated 1 9 Layout and Controls item 11 not the OFF command but the PAUSE command will be executed when calling up this DM X IN channel LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Remote MEN Configuration T o s y e g os B E l i l pa z Syme ke at gueg grand MA 1 key STORE ectedetes Emcee Remote MIDI TOOLS Remote MIDI STORE Off DELETE 8 4 Remote Control by MIDI On the rear of the grandMA you will find the MIDI IN MIDI THRU and MIDI OUT sockets Assigned commands can be called up using e g an external MIDI keyboard or sequencer Devices like these can be plugged into the Midi IN socket Only note commands are currently supported The incoming signals will be automatically transferred to MIDI THRU Also Midi Show Control M SC can be processed or sent 8 4 1 Midi Show Control The console can receive MSC commands which will be used to trigger the Master sequence only Push the key Midi Show Control within the Tools menu the menu Configuraton Midi Show Control will be opened
273. have selected a function in which a certain sequence is important Using SELECT VALUE the selection sequence is not important only the values within the selected fixtures will be shuffled NOTE The functions can only be undone using OOPS Both functions can be executed using the buttons in the MATricks menu or using the Quikeys SHUFFLE VALUE examples Select the first 11 fixtures in the FaderSheet from left to right Press ALIGN once and increase the dimmer value As dimmers were selected in ascending order the values between the first selected fixtures n 1 and the last selected fixtures n 11 will also be aligned in ascending order ALIGN function see graphics above NOTE Important for an alignment using the ALIGN function is always the order in which the selection takes place and not the channel number Press Select Value once either using the Button or the Quikey The values will be kept but randomly assigned to the dimmers graphics in the middle Press Select Value once the values will receive a new assignment bottom graphics This procedure can be repeated at will SHUFFLE SELECT ORDER examples Select the first 15 fixtures in the FaderSheet from left to right in the MATricks menu set the groups of five Use NEXT to select the groups of five for a better visualization the groups have received different dimmer values 81 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandM
274. he Executor sheet A Click on the attribute moves it to the other column Excluded to Included and vice versa With Info Dialog and Effect Dialog the cue Info and effects overview will be shown in this display Click on Label for typing an individual name Save as Default stores the view fro all executors Confirm using the X button options are stored Save as Default grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Tracking Sheet Options gt lt Dis y Display Layer Sorting amp Readout Attribute Mask Select Sequence e ID Preset Control Layer Control Tracking Sheet Options Included Excluded Display Name Name Layer pan Sorting amp IEL Readout Stage Y Stage Attribute Z Stage Mask Dim m G1 Select G1 Rot Sequence c1 x j Select Sequence Display Type No Page Name Ty Layer Fader 1 1 Seq 3 Seq p z Fader 6 1 Seq 6 Seq eae Fader 10 1 Seq 7 Seq Fader 11 1 Seqi1 Fader 12 1 Seq 2 Fader 16 1 Seq 4 Fader 17 1 Seq 5 Show Selected hage Auto Link Auto Sel Featwelg OS Sort Selected Scroll Name 1 Dim2 Dim3 3314 Dim5 Dim6 Dim Dim8 Dim9 Dim10 Di1 SL22 SLE3 SL34 SL35 Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim Dir iue AAAA 2ce AMPM CECE nE CEEA Tracking an 116 5 4 TRACKING Sheet In the Tracking sheet all values and times durations
275. he Hori and Vert sliders By pressing the dark grey key below the modified sliders shortly both values can be set simultaneously By pressing the lt gt key both sliders can be coupled so that the size can be modified simultaneously Using the ROTATION slider the form can be turned from 0 to 360 By pressing the MIRROR key the form can be mirrored You can leave the EDIT menu with the CLOSE key With good knowledge in maths you can also use formulas for PAN and TILT Syntax to enter a formula manually The standard display of mathematic formulas will be executed The following is allowed M athematic Basic Operators Numerical constants integers floatingpoint numbers or exponential figures Example for valid numerical constants 2 71818 1 2e 2 0 4 Other constants pi corresponds to the circle figure T Variables X Mathematical functions sin x or sinus x cos x or _cosinus x abs x corresponds to the absolute amount sqrt x corresponds to the square root pow x y corresponds to the y Power of x Arguments errors with x 0 und y lt 0 or with x lt 0 and y are no integers Examples sin 3 x sqrt abs x sin x sin x cos 3 x pi 2 cos x abs x 1 pow x 2 cos 0 5 x abs x 0 5 2 131 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Channel Sheet Modulator Speed sorted by Nu iis A 5 7
276. he cursor Now click and drag holding the left mouse key By moving the mouse the window can now be resized according to your requirements One of the most effective ways to work with the grandMA is by using the touchscreen and the encoder which is located next to each display 3 1 2 Deleting a window Press the DELETE key once Right click on the title bar of the window Or Click into the left corner yellow dot of the title bar In the next window confirm with YES or DELETE Or When pressing the top and bottom VIEW keys simultaneously all windows on this TFT display will be deleted 3 1 3 Scrolling with the UP and DOWN hard keys Pushing the UP and DOWN hard keys will scroll a whole page up or down inside the menu or pool window that has the input focus dark blue title Pushing down the UP or DOWN hard key while holding down its opponent will scroll to the beginning or to the end If there is an active popup dialog on screen the UP and DOWN hard keys work as UP and DOWN cursor keys for navigation inside the dialog 3 1 4 Temporary Opening of Windows Important windows can be opened temporarily and quickly on the right Display This function is especially useful on the grandMA light and ultra light Hold the List key By additionally shortly pressing the function keys the respective window will open and the function be switched off again afterwards Press 1x Press 2x Press 3x Channel Channel Sheet Fader Shee
277. he history of a command line window Orscroll with the XY encoder if the command line window has the focus Or use the UP and DOWN cursor keys on the PC keyboard if the command line window has the focus or the PC keyboard is locked to the command line b Edit the command line if you want c Press ENTER The command line will be executed MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 10 2 Command Overview Here comes the complete list of all possible keywords in the command line Special Short cuts 2 OFF orF 604 Eo CHANTE CHANNE HIGHLIGHT long 2 NEXT PREV EERE ong TO ENTER 2E0070 ENTER grand MA Displays an overview of all running playbacks Sequences Effects Chasers M acros and Timecodes Shut off all running playbacks Activated the selected parked Channel Fixture Parking the selected Channel Fixture The dimmer channel pulses for better dentification Stores the current show without prior selection of Fixtures or Dimmers selects the first NEXT or last PREV Dimmer or Fixture depends on default command see10 3 1 Clears the programmer totally all selections activations values identical with 3x CLEAR The Overview of the selected cue opens and a cue can be started with the GOTO button The Overview of the selected cue opens and a cue can be loaded wit
278. he key is set to Enabled OOPS functions can be used for VIEWS calls and creating or deleting VIEWS keys Pressing the Enabled key will toggle it to Disabled and the OOPS function can no longer be used for VIEWS commands Oops for Programmer If the key is set to Enabled OOPS functions are available for all entries in the PROGRAM MER selecting deselecting or activating deactivating Fixture or Dimmer channels Pressing the Enabled key will toggle it to Disabled and the OOPS function can no longer be used for entries in the PROGRAMMER In strong bass enviroments vibrations please switch off all OOPS settings and Autosave disabled 11 Saving and Loading a Show Autosave Close menu with X Changes will be saved 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS Menu Pressing the DEFAULT key in the SETUP menu will bring you to the DEFAULTS menu Programming This column will display the default times and settings that will be used when storing Cues and Sequences Using the Encoders you can adjust the individual times and trigger calls DUAL DIGIT VALUE ENTRY Entries performed over the numeric block have to be done in the conventional way entry 2_0 will yield a value of 20 SINGLE DIGIT VALUE ENTRY Entries performed over the numeric block will be done in factors of ten entry 2 will yield 20 0_5 will become 5 and 1_5 will yield 15 without switching to DUAL Default AT Here enter the percentage value that the selected fixtures or dimmers are t
279. he sequence e g fader 14 instead of 1 14 that is why fader 14 will be moved disregarding the program for this fader Best thing is to make use of the MA Lighting service After the crash reboot the console using the RESET button on the back of the console or the POWER switch Have an empty floppy available After booting the following message will displayed Please Confirm Save log Ee floppy aa ia D moe Now you have 4 seconds to press the SAVE LOG TO FLOPPY button Insert the empty floppy and confirm the next request with OK It is advisable to email the log file to our service department Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de grand MA Question Can I switch the console on and off using an powerline integrated timer to start a show automatically Can I re patch a fixture during a show e g because a malfunction has occurred Being in a specific sequence can I start the cue of another sequence Can I run any show on any console AUTOBACKUP in a session The desk gets slower and slower when starting and storing a show can no longer perform tasks in the network with my UltraLight Answer A timer does the same as an interruption of the power supply i e the grandM A Light and the ReplayUnit will immediately switch over to battery supply and will shut down the console after 3 minutes No problems here as
280. hen following all the instructions in the manual overheating Do not install the unit into a frame unless sufficient Only manipulate the controls as stated in the manual wrong settings on the controls may ventilation is guaranteed Install in accordance with the damage the unit manufacturer s instructions The unit fell and the housing was damaged 8 Do not insert any objects through the slots of the unit as these could 20 WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOTEXPOSE THIS APPARATUS get in contact with live parts or could cause short circuits This may TO RAIN OR MOISTURE cause a fire and an electric shock 9 Do not place the unit on unstable surfaces It may fall and get damaged Es 10 The unit is provided with a safety plug This plug can only be used with safety sockets These precautions should by all means be followed F If the plug should not fit into a given socket e g the case with old Electric shock warning on the rear of the grandMA sockets the socket should be replaced by an electrician The unit should be serviced by qualified personnel only as live parts may be exposed when 11 Do not ignore the safety purpose of the grounding type plug A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong The third prong is provided for your safety If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet consult an electrician for replacement of the obsole te outlet Please note that this console is
281. hen switching the Executor pages and will only be released when it is switched off If an Executor is stored at that position on another page this Executor will appear and can be used again only after switching the locked Executor off If the Swop Protected key is pressed the Dimmers of this Sequence will not be switched off when another Sequence is called up using Swop If the TRACKING key is pressed dark background the Sequence will be executed in Tracking mode If the key is not pressed the Sequence will be executed in Non Tracking mode The TRACKING mode is normally used for theatre applications Values that were played back in a Cue remain unchanged for each susequent Cue until they are modified or overwritten by a later Cue LTP principle Therefore you do not have to program values which do not change into later cues Example At the beginning of a Sequence Dimmer channels are set to 80 Let s assume that the setting isto be used for several cues As long as the channels are not modified they will remain at 80 When working with this Sequence you may recognize however that the channel setting should only be at 70 Now you only have to change this channel setting once all subsequent Cues will automatically be modified to 70 Example Cue 10 is made up of the changes programed in cue 10 as well all the changes in cues1 thru 9 with the later values taking presedence over the earlier values Latest Takes Presedence
282. hey pass the filter Examples FIXTURE THRU AT select PAN TILT CUE 1 ENTER This will bring all PAN TILT information contained in CUE 1 of the default executor active into the programmer CUE 5 AT select GOBO CUE 4 ENTER Devices of cue 5 get the gobos of cue 4 of course only if the gobos were programmed into cue 4 CUE 5 AT select GOBO CUE THRU 4 ENTER Devices of cue 5 get the gobos of the STATUS of cue 4 This is very diffe rent to the previous example As helping keyword See COPY MOVE and INSERT 2x AT Will set the defaul value for selected fixtures set in SETUP DEFAULTS DEFAULT AT CHANNEL as starting keyword Lt MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de CHANNEL ENTER CHANNEL becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD CHANNEL range list ENTER Select channels in range list CHANNEL range list AT see AT Apply values to channels in range list Channel numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 9999 as target for the following executing commands ON activate dimmer value in programmer OFF deactivate dimmer value in programmer and deselect channel PAUSE PARK dimmer value of channel GO UNPARK dimmer value of channel CLEAR Progressively performs 1 If there is a selection gt CLEAR_SELECTION 2 If there is an activation gt CLEAR_ACTIVE 3 If there is stage output from programmer gt CLEAR
283. ht green this sequence is the master sequence SELECT Executor No All store title bar commands will always affect this sequence on the grandMA only the yellow only 1 master sequenz possible keys that are available in a sequence will have an effect on this sequence en dark green these sequences are Default sequences The yellow buttons or the command title bar combination e g GO GO Pause etc and ENTER will affect all light and possible for multiple Executors dark green Executors at the same time The setting is temporary and will not be adopted when saving orange cues this sequence is fixed and even after switching the pages will be visible for several sequences sequences or chasers that are on this position but on a different page will only be covered but otherwise not affected even if they are currently running The selected sequence can also be fixed green orange When scrolling through the pages fixed sequences can cover other sequences on the same position this will not affect the operation as such After resetting the fixed sequence sequences that had disappeared can be reloaded from the pool T When the letter Tis displayed these sequence is in Tracking Mode 225 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Colors used for displaying the DMX output sheet olor or symbo COLOR Co DE Dimmer values yellow value of an Executor cha
284. ich the assigned Fixtures or Dimmers will be divided In the subdivided groups the Effect will then fully be executed Before modifying the subdivision value select the Effect first Press the GROUPS key once green background Now the subdivision of the Effect can be set using the Encoder below Clicking the Encoder once will automati cally delete the set value Wing The set number will indicate how often the assigned Fixtures or Dimmers and the Effect will be mirrored Possible settings range between 8 and 8 Example With a setting of 2 the assigned Fixtures Dimmers will be divided in the middle The set effect will now be executed in the first half forwards up to the middle and in the second half the Effect will be executed in reverse from the middle onto the last Fixture Dimmer With a setting of 2 the assigned Fixtures Dimmers will be divided in the middle The set effect will now be executed in the first half forwards up to the middle and in the second half the Effect will be executed in reverse and phase shifted by 180 from the middle onto the last Fixture Dimmer Before modifying the wing value select the Effect first Press the WINGS key once green background Now the PN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING number of Effect wings can be set using the Encoder below Clicking the Encoder once will delete the set valu
285. ie Pon SRL TEE the stage These values will always refer to the stage geometry and will be displayed in the STAGE column on the Caney eee RATE EEO SUES MLS NES Fixtures Sheet The resulting PAN TILT values will be calculated from the fixture position and also be displayed in UWL apes the Fixtures Sheet The focus will be kept even if you change the fixture position and the respective PAN TILT hile in es a a Exjarl values will automatically be adapted a PAN Cowie Ter 15 Enter the virtual axes in SETUP FIXTURE TYPE CHANNELS of FIXTURE TYPES using the SPECIALS button SPECIALS jae k o a t la t Select the fixtures in NORMAL mode Use the mouse or the touch screen to define the position on the stage floor the Z value will always jump to 0 or set the spacial coordinates using the Encoders in this version AREA is not yet assigned In the Fixture Sheet the values will be displayed in a separate column STAGE X Y Z and can be set here too The values do always refer to the stage siye definable in SETUP FULL ACCESS SETUP STAGE 50 of the definable area are always the middle of the stage front edge If you create multiple intersections see graphics on the left the Encoders will always show the last entered value Note regarding DMX STAGE values may not be mixed within one Cue or Sequence Effects using the X Y and Z parameters For creating effects you can also use the stage parameters X Y and Z
286. ill be displayed with the respectively set address for each DM X OUTPUT The number in front of the colon is the SUBNET address the number following is the address for the DM X OUTPUT Choose an address for the DM X OUTPUT In the right chart one line is displayed for each converter The selected DM X OUTPUT will be displayed on a green background If an output is displayed on ared background this indicates that it is already being assigned and can not be used Pressing the Save button will save all modifications Press the key X Now the converter for this DM X port is configured and the menu will be closed For the DM X Hub from the Artistic Licence Company this button must be on Delayed Output for all other units this setting is not relevant If further ports are to be assigned repeat all steps When all settings are completed press the SAVE key in the DM X OUTPUT CONFIGURATION menu The modified settings are now stored Now the blue ACTIVE LED at the assigned DM X converter is on and the DM X outputs can be used When at the node data is received the red LED is on Artnet Node Configuration First choose a DM X converter to be edited in the table Pressing the Edit Nodes button for this Ethernet DM X converter will open the menu As Shortname and Longname you can enter any name for this converter The IP address of the grandM As does not have to be adapted to this IP address here For Manufacturer IP and version
287. ime look for MOVING EVENTS Graphically with the mouse Right click on an event and the Edit menu appears according to the type of the event With the event encoder in the bar Select current event with the track and event encoder Then press the event encoder Edit menus will appear In text mode Scroll to the event that you are looking for Edit the appropriate column by right clicking or pressing on the XY encoder The parameter column is only editable for GOTO commands and for fader events Special fast edit for fader events in graphic mode This method is not exact enough for speeds but for master fader events it is recommended Click with the middle mouse key on an event and keep the mouse key pressed Drag the mouse vertically with middle mouse Key pressed The value of the fader event will now follow 147 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 FF Show Honzental Serolba t recerswy F Show Venea Seroiba t necessary Mik Mick ine MPU gt Mid out 148 8 1 6 Special Procedures Recording Crossfades Crossfades for executors are recorded as a combination of commands and fader movements These commands are XGoUp Crossfade will start upwards XGoDn Crossfade will start downwards Xend Crossfade has ended XGoUp and XGoDn have a cue number as parameter just like a GOTO command therefore a crossfade may start on any cue not only on the next one Try to
288. in the command line Yes gt clear commandline b Is edit update procedure running Yes gt cancel edit update c Isthere an open window or a message box Yes gt close it d Isthere an edit menu open Yes gt close it EVEN EVEN creates a sub selection from the current selection If you have selected 10 fixtures and then select EVEN only the 2 4th gt gth and 10 fixture in this selection stays selected The others have become temporarily deselected waiting to be fully selected again by the ALL command IF Deselect devices which are not part of executor s object s selection IFOUTPUT Select devices which have stage output from this executor INVERT Invert current selection by the selection of executor s object LABEL Change name of executor s object MOVE Move executor to another position PREVIEW Preview executors object If the object is a sequence and the executor is running the next cue will be previewed as target for ALL executing commands Please look at 9 3 1 Executing Keywords for a summary or look at those keywords for details EXEC 168 Format Meaning EXEC X THRU Y Executors X to Y of current page EXEC P X THRU Q Y Executors X of page P to exec Y of page Q EXEC X THRU Y PAGE P THRU Q Executor X to Y of page P to Q Executor number X Y must be in the range of 1 60 where 1 20 is adressing the motorized fader executors and 21 60 is a
289. individual channel and can easily be changed during programming if needed Fixture or Channel Patch menu LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Dimmer Patch J id Fix Id Ch Fixture Type xX 6 6 DMB DM86G C1 ji 1D Fixture Patch 1 2 3 4 5 Dimmer Strobe Strobe Strobe Strob 6 Fi e Random Random Random 2 Close Fast Medium Slow Fast Medium 8 Slow Lamp Off 0 G olor 1 7 3 5 6 7 8 Random Random Random 4 White Cto Red Green Blue Fast Midle Slow e Fixture Sheet Values amp Presets sorted by Numbers emi aus Id Name Pan Tilt Dimmer Gobot Gobo Color Colorz Pan Tilt DBRS GI GI ReG2 C1 c2 ColorMix CH1 CM2 CM MAC 500 M Align Off aq Iris scabs Lncoder DURI maw Y i imal ina Ean Mad lin Lafad 2 Fadl FecWs Ay Puisi And Cun Nat Be Chre In both of these menus you can patch fixtures And you can define standard settings for each fixtur press SETUP press FULL ACCES press PATCH SHEET press FIXTURE PATCH or CHANNEL PATCH Listing of individual functions DMX Shows the patched channel If this is to be adjusted click into the cell and rotate the Display Encoder The Fixtures to Patch menu will open 2 2 2 Patching Scanners Dimmers NoMaster Ifa cell contains a No here
290. indow In this options window you can select which Sequence is assigned to the executor by clicking on it With the FONT SIZE key you can toggle the font size used in the EXECUTOR sheet between Huge Big and Small With the DELETE WINDOW key you can delete the Executor sheet or close the Options window using the CLOSE key In the EXECUTOR sheet you can watch the progress of the sequence the currently playing back Cue will be displayed by a yellow background MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHT Executor 1 1 Loops 5 Rid Sequ 3 Seq 3 Info Effects Re Times rx You can modify the M ASTER fader using the left Encoder or by pressing the button above it im Using the RATE FACTOR Encoder you can temporarily adjust all FADE and DELAY times If the Sequence is switched off the RATE FACTOR will automatically be reset to 1 Scroll Fade OutfadiSnap LFade Delay Loop Lo Del Link 087 2s i u ae You can set the time to be used when switching off OFF key using the right Encoder or by pressing the button 087 2s Esa above it If Default is displayed the default time will be used 2 13 Default Menu ne E Using the Arrow right or Arrow left buttons you can call up the next or previous Cue With the double arrow you can call up the previous or next Cue without any FADE or Delay times With the STOP button you c
291. ing of values this depends on whether Tracking had been activated in the ASSIGN menu siehe 5 1 4 Executor Settings Besides the Selected sequence you can select multiple Executors as default sequences These are indicated by a dark green title window the Selected sequence only possible for 1 Executor has a light green title window gt E All default sequences can be operated at the same time if using the yellow buttons All default sequences can also be operated by using a combination of a command e g GO Pause OFF and simultaneously pressing a ENTER 1 z pes 2 ee te Hold the SELECT button down and click on the desired Executors no effects or Bitmap effects the first 1 S ie Executor becomes the Selected sequence light green and the following Executors become Default sequences 52 cue BS dark green This selection is temporary and cannot be saved in the Show file aie o A further selection holt the SELECT button and click on Exec will delete the previous selection ia Dur 1 ur ia cu GOTO 4 2 4 LOAD CUE You can use LOAD CUE in order to directly call up a certain cue with either one or several executors Press the GOTO key twice LED is blinks Select an executor by shortly pressing a key A window with a chart appears All cues of this sequence are listed in this chart If you select one of these cues it will be loaded This cue will be displayed as next red blinking background 91 gr
292. ing user porfiles or part of profiles with the Micro press TOOLS press Load User Profile List select user an items in the Load to current User Profile menu confirm with Load selected Items World Filter You can assign a World for any User profile see Worlds chap 15 7 By this you cannot only assign Rights to a User but also grant him access to only certain areas of the Show By this e g the Dimmer operator has full access to the Dimmers but cannot access the Fixtures by chance if these are saved to another World Inthe User Profile List menu click on the respective cell under World Filter and enter the name of the saved World 2 16 8 Forced Login at Desk Start Forced Login is enabled only if at least one user appears in the user list TOOLS menu User Configuration To change the Forced Login setting you need to have administrator privilege level Go to Tools menu Go to User Setup Press the FORCE LOGIN AT DESKSTART key If you switch on FORCED LOGIN upon every desk start or loading of a show the desk will automatically bring up the login screen If FORCED LOGIN is switched off upon desk start the desk will automatically login the user who was last logged in Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING grand MA
293. ion of the trackball to mouse functions The product will not be delivered with a hardware keyboard and an external 1 son pea ook Ta be defined as e g LED off or to Pan Tilt functions LED on mouse An additional external keyboard and a mouse however can be 0 GO False Flash Etc P Left Middle Right key for Mouse connected on the rear of the unit 15 Executor faders can also be defined eg as raat eae oe Using the KEYBOARD key on the TFT display a Soft Keyboard can be brought up Master Swap M aster X Fader etc that can be operated via the touch screen The Soft Keyboard will only appear if 25 Trackball for M ouse or Pan Tilt functions entries are possible 26 Socket for console lamp 12V 5W If the trackball is switched to mouse function LED in the PAN TILT key is off you can perform mouse functions using the trackball or the LEFT M IDDLE RIGHT keys There are some limitations for the MICRO 7 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 1 7 2 Layout and Controls grandMA O eo Nu QU A WON TFT Display Touchscreen View Macro keys Encoders To move scroll the respective window contents Encoders To set the attribute values such as Gobo Pan Tilt times etc Manual Time Setting for Presets Yellow Knob To adjust the Touchscreen Panel Playback buttons Can be defined as Go Go Pause Flash etc Executor faders Can be defined as Master Swap Master X Fad
294. ion upgrade to 4096 channels As of serial number 156 a dongle hardware protection has to be installed within the grandM A for serial numbers under SN 156 a plug in card has to be exchanged For this operation the unit can only be opened by a qualified technician CAUTION disconnect the mains power first There are some limitations for the MICRO and grandMA UltraLight 2 9 1 Assigning the DMX XLR sockets of the grandMA DM X outputs A to D on the backside of the console In this column the DM X ports can be assigned to the respective output sockets on the grandMA By repeated pressing these keys any of the DM X Universes A to H can be assigned to any of the grandM A s DMX output sockets A to D The assigning of DM X ports to the sockets is instantaneous DMX input In this area you can assign the DM X XLR input to an internal DM X port A H or you can assign the DM X In of an external Ethernet DM X unit to an internal DM X port By pressing the button below PROTOCOL you can set the following Intern The DM X IN on the backside of the console will be used ARTNET The assigned DM X In of an ARTNET unit will be used Assignment see 2 9 3 ARTNET DMX ETHERNET CONFIGURATION DM X input In this area you can assign the DM X XLR input to an internal DM X port A H or you can assign the DM X In of an external Ethernet DM X unit to an internal DM X port By pressing the button below PROTOCOL you can set the following
295. ions MACRO other Macro calls Call ups of Clear operations Press the STORE key once LED is on TIMED Press the MACRO key once LED is on The SELECT M ACRO window will open Enter a name for the Macro using the keyboard Press the TIMED key will turn dark gray if the M acro is to be executed over the same amount of time as it STORE takesto record it The alternaitive is that the Macro will be played back as fast as possible Confirm with ENTER LED in the MACRO key flashes Now enter all operational steps to be executed by this M acro To stop recording the macro press STORE MACRO and then ENTER LED in the MACRO key is now off MACRO This completes the MACRO Programming procedure 9 1 1 Calling up macro Call up the macro window with CREATE A WINDOW Press the desired macro button or Enter in the COMMAND LINE Macro_XX ENTER or Press ASSIGN LED lights up and click a VIEW button The OPTIONS window appears Select MACRO The SELECT MACRO window appears Select macro Now the macro is assigned to the VIEW button and can be requested at any time MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Lie FU MACRO JELA ato 1 5 Bm s DELETE iI a 6 it a LOWE 5 S n EDIT als ais LOWE al 1c ail 4 8 EDIT TiN CLOSE LINE COMMAND DELAY ue st 5s 2 Off Exec 1 14 Go Exec 1 15 Os Second command
296. irm Then press the Start New Session button and confirm with OK In the left table the created Session will be displayed with its name and on a light green background This unit will now be the only M aster in this Session Now you must integrate another unit into this Session 15 3 1 Expanding the Session Before units can cooperate with each other you have to integrate the second one or further units theoretically up to 10 units into this Session The Show of the second unit and of all others must be saved before as these even on the 3D will always be overwritten by the first unit that had created the Session All users that are not present on the first unit that had created the Session will be deleted If needed you would have to set them up again Master priorities have to be defined see on the right side Attaching Units from the Master In the left table click on Unconnected The table on the right will show all units that are the free In the right table click on the unit 3D Offline grandM A will get a blue background Press the Invite Stations button and confirm with OK The data of the invited unit will be overwritten Attaching from another Unit In the left table click on the Session which is to be joined Press the Join Session button and confirm with OK The own Show data will be overwritten now Master Priorities All units of the same priority The unit that had created the Se
297. is World can be seen in the stage window however under SETUP all registered fixtures can be found If you are in a network session that means that different users units can use different or overlapping Worlds Call up a World by clicking on it will be displayed in dark green CONTROL shows if you have full control over the selected World green or just a partial Playback control yellow Full World By pressing the Full button alll existing Scanner and Dimmer channels will be displayed again complete World The button will be displayed in green If you see a warning symbol on a button it means that this World is presently being used by another User user With the Exec Sync function multiple users units can start calling Executors simultaneously synchronously In order to do so this function must be switched on on both appropriate units by pressing this button will be displayed in green i This special function only serves synchronizing two different Worlds Playback And this function has to be switched on in a Playback session if the Playback commands are to be transferred 195 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Remote Network Connections X Ho p m va 15 8 Remote Network Monitor 1 ma edi mamas In the menu Tools Remote Network all remotes e g PDA s are displayed Fomote Button Disconnect Remote disconnect the selected remotes With Show Remote the sele
298. is done with the syntax PRESET X Y with X preset type and Y preset number DELETE PRESET X will ask for confirmation and delete all presets of the given type SEQU TIMECODE TOUCH BTN VIEW VIEWBTN EDIT Simulating a right click of the mouse for editing an input field or a cell in MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de grand MA a grid EDIT use touchscreen to click somewhere or EDIT left mouse click somewhere Starting EDIT UPDATE procedure The whole procedure works as follows EDIT object ENTER Only one object can be edited at once If the edit update procedure is still running for another object you will be asked to update the old one first Programmer is cleared and the values and selection of the object is loaded into the programmer All titles of fixture and channel sheet will show the name of the edit object Change values and selection in the programmer as required UPDATE starts flashing as soon as values are changed Hit UPDATE You will be asked for a confirmation and then changed values and selection is stored back into the object ESC will quit the EDIT UPDATE procedure without updating the object at any time Objects that can be edited in this way are Syntax start with EDIT Comment CUE ENTER Edit active cue of default executor CUE X ENTER Edit cue X of default executor C
299. ith fast BASSDRUM beats Beats will be automatically recognized via the incoming sound signal BPM Press TOOLS Press Button Sound Settings to open the menu To set an equalizer pull the respective slider to the desired position In the left lower corner there is a visual trigger signal monitor for your orientation The small dot on the left side of the HOLD Function will indicate the remaining HOLD time The small dot on the left side of the GAIN indicator will show the compression rate of the audio signal The right small dot will indicate the state of compression of the audio signal The sound signal is visualized in the lower left part of the display The analysis of the sound signal will be indicated in the smaller right part of the window including indication of the recognised BPM Beats per minute By moving the BPM slider the beat can be set The next possible beat will be recognised from the incoming audio signal and will be used to control the BPM If the BPM key is ON the currently recognised beat will be used When switching the BPM to OFF the last recognised beat at the time will remain unchanged and will be used You can adjust the value using the BPM slider If the Auto Stop key is on ON the Chase or the effect will be stopped when there is no sound signal If the Auto Fader key is also on ON the Chase or the effect will be faded out when there is no sound signal 47 When you switch the Auto Stop key to OFF the
300. kground the _ respective function has not been modified If the background is red something has been changed in this function Wes If pressing the Sorting amp Readout button displayed with a green font Sorting amp Sort by Readout With the respective key you can determine according to which criteria the fixtures within the column are to be sorted Numbers Fixtures will be sorted by numbers in the FIXTURE window Names Fixtures will be sorted by name Selected The selected Fixtures will be moved upwards Active Fixtures for which a value is activated will be moved upwards Sort Directions Values Fixtures will be sorted according to highest dimmer value Sort Upwards Sorting by ascending values Sort Downwards Sorting by descending values Tare READOUT Pressing this function you can switch between the following display options OR Sheet Values amp Presets sorted by Numbers isin ae lon Percent Values will be displayed as percentages l l U tae roe Gato Cor Clea le lean Percent Values will be displayed as percentage values interim values will be displayed next to the figure in i form of 3 dots Pan Th MWG G2 G1 RG AoC Ci Ce CMI CM2 CM3 Stib m Decimal Values will be displayed as decimal numbers 0 255 HEX Values will be displayed as hexadecimal numbers 0 FF FONT By pressing this function you can switch the font size in the FIXTURE windo
301. kground Illumination 44 BACKUP 154 BASE 126 BASE VALUE 126 BASIC FADE 17 Battery 5 BeamAngle 30 BLACKOUT 9 46 BLIND 9 94 Blind Modus 81 82 BLOCK 117 Blue Buttons pocket pc 214 Booting 15 BOUNCE 100 128 BPM 46 47 100 128 Break 30 Button changing a 106 Button Page 118 Button Pages 54 BUTTONS OFF 120 C Calculator 13 Calibrating Button 43 Change of Pages within a cue 99 CHANNEL 53 164 Channel expansion 37 CHANNELFADER 44 70 CHANNEL Mode 70 Channel Pages 54 Channel Start Id 19 CHANNELVALUES 33 Channel Values 33 CHANNEL window colors used for the screen display 224 226 228 CHASE 123 Chase Fade 46 CHASER 114 Chaser calling a Playback 92 Chaser editinga 99 Chaser executing a 105 CHASER SPEED 46 CHASER triggering a 47 CHASER FADE 101 CHASES OFF 120 Chat 54 Circular Copy 80 CLEAR 9 16 59 70 154 165 Clear Activation 74 CLEAR LED 59 70 CLOCK 54 Clone 42 CLOSE 111 COLOR CODE 225 226 colors 33 colors used for the screen display 224 Colums 73 COMMAND 1 209 Command Line Commands 98 Command Line Order 93 Command Overview 157 Command Reference 159 Command Time 210 COMMAND WINDOW 11 COMMANDLINE 54 Comment 30 Comp Fixture Sheet Options 60 COM PACT CONTENT 53 Compact Fixture Sheet 60 Complete Loss of Data 5 CONFIRM 131 CONTENT 53 CONTENT SHEET OPTIONS 122 COPY 58 97 154 165 Copy cue in eine andere Sequenz 99 Copy cues between sequence
302. labels 3 4 8 Options in the Fixture window Choose a function where you wish to program a time other than the Basic time Single Single For Active Feature Feature For Active All All For Active Defined For Active Now you can modify the IND FADE time or IND DELAY time individual Fade Delay Times for the selected fixtures using the encoders While modifying you can use different options Choosing options Above the left Encoder a second additional button with the currently chosen option will be displayed By pressing this button you can select the respective next option Or By pressing the right arrow a menu will open in which all options are displayed and can be chosen directly Single For Active The time can be adjusted for each individual Function Attribute If Single For Active is chosen only times for activated values can be changed Feature For Active The time can be adjusted for the chosen Feature e g Gobol containing e g Gobol and Gobol Rotation If Feature For Active is chosen only times for activated values can be changed All For Active All times for all Attributes are adjusted If All For Active is chosen only times for activated values can be changed Defined For Active The time can be adjusted for the fixed Attributes Pressing the left arrow on the side of the a a Defined button will open the Define Attributes to Set Time menu Se
303. larges the current selection It leaves only those devices selected which are included in both selections Assuming that we have two groups we will use real names to make it clearer PAR64 includes ALL PAR64 lamps FRONT_TRUSS includes ALL lamps on the front truss MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn LIGH www malighting de eMail info malighting de PAR64 IF FRONT TRUSS ENTER will therefore select all PAR64 which are on the front truss General Syntax selection1 IF selection2 ENTER If selection1 is not given the current selection will be used IFOUTPUT IFOUTPUT is selecting devices depending on the current stage output General syntax IFOUTPUT object list ENTER If the object list is a hit on an executor s button or a click into an object pool window ENTER is not needed Examples IFOUTPUT EXEC 1 ENTER All devices which have stage output from executor 1 will be selected IFOUTPUT PRESET 1 1 ENTER All devices which have the preset 1 1 active on stage will become selected Very nice for selecting all fixtures that have a blue star currently on stage All devices of the given selection that have a stage output at the moment become selected IFOUTPUT CUE SEQUENCE EFFECT works accordingly IFOUTPUT ENTER All devices having a dimmer value of more than 0 will be selected All devices having an output between the entered values will be selected If no value had bee
304. lay MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Cxec 1 20 Group 1 dimmer x Choose from Est Ni z ima Name Dimmer a ist 100 Cuelis Seti Chasis Spatial Mashu Effect Ritnapi Filu 5 Executing Cues Sequences and Chasers 5 1 ASSIGN menu Assignment to EXECUTOR Cues Sequences or Effect Groups can be assigned to any EXECUTOR fader or button One way to enter the ASSIGN menu is by a mouse click or using the touch screen on the title bar of the EXECUTOR FADER window Or Press the ASSIGN key once LED is on Select a Sequence in the Sequence Pool or an Effect Group in the Effect Pool Press the EXECUTOR FADER or EXECUTOR button to which you want to assign a Sequence or Chaser Or Press the ASSIGN key once LED is on Press the EXECUTOR FADER or EXECUTOR button for which a Sequence or Chaser is to be created The ASSIGN menu will appear in the middle TFT display Another way to enter the ASSIGN menu is via the EDIT menu The title bar will display the selected EXECUTOR FADER or BUTTON 5 1 1 Assigning Sequences or Effect Groups The Function key must be activated dark background By pressing the CHASER SEQUENCE or EFFECT key all created Sequences will be listed in the Sheet Select the Sequence or Effect Group to be assigned Assigned Sequences or Effect Groups are displayed in red The CUES column sho
305. ldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Visualize Fore cE Fiii SH Gilat L ein s Brace Horde Fld hamir ELISE a Put in form CPAND sinbd abs6d 1 5 Put in form TILT gt sinhd x cos bd 41 5 CONFIRM Make a left mouse click on the respective fields now enter the formula via keyboard The form will be confirmed by pressing CONFIRM 6 7 2Modifying Forms The EDIT FORM S window will open by pressing the EDIT key Make a left click with the mouse on at least three positions of the marked form With each click on the form a new red dot will be displayed on that position In order to delete one of the dots middle click with the mouse on this dot To reshape the form click and drag with the mouse on one of the red dots If you click the right mouse key during the reshaping while holding the left mouse key you can define the reshaping each time By pressing the key you can program in which way the lines shall be drawn when reshaping the form ANGLE straight line ARC outer arc ARROW inner arc By reshaping the form the lines will be expanded and respectively the extended positions of the form will be reported to the Fixture faster f the extended lines and consequently the longer ways for the Fixture are to be transmitted with the same speed you have to press the EQUALIZE DOTS key once The form can be modified in its horizontal or vertical size using t
306. le in the EFFECT pool 6 Effects By pressing the Import Effects button you can load saved effects from floppy By pressing the Export Effects button you can save the created effects to a floppy 2 11 5 ASCII Show Import If the Ascii Show button is pressed green background you are in the ASCII Show Import Export menu Before you load an ASCII Show you should save the Current Show as it could be overwritten If the FDD contains a floppy with a Show in ASCII format file with the ALQ extension you can load the Show by pressing the button It isnot possible to transfer Scanner data The Default User Settings 2 8 Saving or Loading Profiles will be loaded The Show will be saved under the name AssciiShow and should be renamed and saved again 11 Saving and Loading a Show The data will only be saved to the RAM permanently only when saving the complete Show to disk or floppy 11 Saving and Loading a Show 2 11 6 ASCII Show Export Export an ASCII show on floppy disc press button EXPORT SHOW FILE insert empty floppy and confirm with OK Use the X button to leave the Auto CREATE menu 2 12 Settings in the Setup Menu By pressing this key MSDBOX M ode you can set the confirmation menus e g STORE to be displayed on just the right side TFT touchscreen or on all displays Using the Executor Layout button on the grandMA light ultralight or RPU simulate the numbering of the grandM A s executors Executor Fader 1 20 Exec
307. lecting individual Attributes Shae In this menu all Attributes are displayed with a green selected or black deselected background Pressing on one of the functions will select or deselect it respectively Dimmer Goboi Colorl Defined raes t Align Off t Gobo1 i 63 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 3 4 4 Modulator values in the Fixtures window The 4 modulator columns of the respective features show the values on which the effects are based the column having a violet background The values will be inserted automatically when an effect is transferred to the modulators using the TOP command You can however enter values directly into the modulator columns 6 8 Modulator Table here you find the entered functions e g SIN SWING etc Modulator Size here you find the entered size of a function ranging from 200 to 200 Modulator Speed here you find the entered function speed Modulator Phase here you find the entered angle to shift the effect The TOP button in combination with a target will synchronize the effect modulators 3 4 5 Deactivating values individually Knock out Before storing it is possible to select which parameters of which fixtures are to be stored Values that are to be stored are indicated by a red background or by red numbers By default parameters within functions are partly activated together 2 4
308. lete an assigned Playback button press the DELETE key once LED is on Press the Key once 8 4 6 Using the MIDI Input In the TOOLS menu you can switch the MIDI input function on or off using the ON OFF Key If the MIDI input is active you can call up the assigned keys by pressing the respective note keys on the MIDI keyboard For optical convenience the key in the MIDI REMOTE CONFIGURATION menu will have a red 151 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 background when pressing a note key Executor 1 11 Fffects Sequ 1 Seq 1 8 4 7 MIDIOUT No MIB Tn Link Hie a a MIDI OUT commands in the CommandLine LE and MIDI N MiNote 0 127 0 127 Seperate numbers with comma e g MiNote _13 122 1 GO MIDI contol MICI 0 Wr 0 127 Seperate numbers with comma e g MiCtr_11 123 3 GO MIDI Programm Miprog 0 1 27 OPTION type in the MIDI channel separated by a comma 1 16 If no channel is selected the default channel is 3 GO MiCt 12 11 used Di n 4 GO MiProg 2 23 Seperate multiple commands with semi colon see lower line on picture left 5 GO MiNote 13 122 MiNote 14 123 9 Macros und QUIKEYS store 9 1 Creating Macros With macros you can combine sets of command line entries and key strokes for recalling in batchs These can also be Playback buttons e g GO Fader Pause etc incl number of the Executor Call ups of Views Call ups of Delete operat
309. licking on the button you can call up the stored setting and the button will be displayed with a dark green background You can combine multiple stored settings by calling them up in sequence By pressing the Reset button all settings in the M Atricks Setup will be switched off 3 9 4 Selective Copying With the Circular Copy function you can copy or move set values of fixtures to other fixtures Copying values Example Select a fixture and set the Dimmer value to 100 Select the fixture and further fixtures By pressing the gt button the Dimmer of the fixture that was selected as next one will be set to 100 With each pressing the value will be copied to the next selected fixture When pressing lt the value will be copied to the last selected fixture Moving values Example Select a fixture and set the Dimmer value to 100 Select the fixture and further fixtures to which you want the Dimmer value to be moved to By pressing 2x on the column title here Dimmer you can activate all Dimmer values f r the selected fixtures By pressing the gt button the Dimmer value of the first fixture will be moved to the next selected fixture When pressing lt the value will be copied to the last selected fixture Lie MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 22 88 177 199 221 44 1
310. ll be created With the DELETE Key you can delete the loop For the indicated loop you can now edit the duration or the loop counter value in the LOOPDELAY column by clicking on or entering the respective value Example When you enter 5 in the TIMED cell the loop will be executed for 5 seconds When you enter 5 in the COUNT cell the loop will be repeated five times before the Sequence will be continued normally d 4 3 8 Inserting Command Line Commands Within a Sequence a Command Line Command can be triggered by a Cue As soon as this Cue is reached this command will be executed By setting a time frame the command can be played back with its own individual delay time 10 Command Line MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 WaldbUttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING A click on the respective Cue in the LINK column For the selected command you can now enter a delay time in the LI DEL column The command will only be executed after this time has ended e g if you enter 5 in the LI DEL colu mn the command will be executed after a delay of five seconds T 4 3 9 Automatic change of Pages An automatic switch to another page can be assigned in the column Link select a cue and press button LOOPS amp LINK type in the requested page page x y 4 3 10 Copying cues between sequences You can also copy Cues from one sequence into another To do so us
311. lling up Presets If this Cue has been changed the LED in the Update button will be on f the Cue is not to be seen on stage activate the Blind function by pressing the BLIND key integrated LED is on Press the Update key once Choose OK in the window that has just opened The changed Cue is now stored Press the CLEAR key twice if necessary Cue values will be deleted in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window For modifying further Cues select the respective Cue one by one will be displayed on a green background Repeat all steps as described with first cue MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH ME TRIGGER FADI RT SOUND 6 5 1 FOLLOW 12 60 TER 2 8 6 4 ia GO 6 4 inp Total Cuaelirens hpul Barge Ws lu 4h FADE SHAP 0 36 0 26 0 16 08 4 New Number Step Width Scale Timing Exec 3 19 Sequ 15 Seq 15 Trig 6 50 5s Fade As Scale Timing sec Outfade _ Delay Times oea I qis 11 50 As 2s HL High Low User 2 Auto Scroll 4 3 2 Changing the TRIGGER Call up of individual Cues within a Sequence Select the respective cue within the Trig column red cell Enter the following with the left Encoder or via the keyboard and confirm with ENTER F for FOLLOW mode G for GO button S for
312. llow Active values determine which channels and parameters are to be stored in the next cue and will be controlled by this cue later on Values with a dark red backround will be stored in the next cue values with a bright red background are currently under your control and will also be stored in the next cue Channels not active when the cue is stored will not be affected by the playingback of this cue Selected fixtures or channels are automatically deselected if a setting was altered and new fixtures selected a single press of the CLEAR key will do the same Changing the selection Any channel or function being controlled in Direct Access mode is automatically marked as selected Pressing the CLEAR key several times deletes the whole selection 1 CLEAR deselects 2 CLEAR deactivates 3 CLEAR deletes all values set by direct access and returns the values to their defaults or to being controlled by playback 16 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Selecting a channel fixture or function multiple times can be used to modify an activation 1 selects 2 activates all parameters 3 deactivates all parameters By holding the STORE key and selecting ALL the activation will be ignored and the complete console output stored as a cue 1 10 6 Timing Fade times FADE and Delays DELAY The grandM A offers two different ways of storing
313. llows you to select the individual Align functions Pressing on the arrow will open a menu in which the respective function can be selected directly Default setting is Values by pressing the button shortly you can switch to Fades and pressing the button again to Delays Pressing on the arrow will open a menu in which the respective function can be selected directly randMA Hardware keyboard or grandMA light ultra light and Micro Soft TOUCH Keyboard Views Groups Presets Sequences Effect groups Forms or Macros can directly be named within the respective pool Cue names can be adjusted in the EDIT menu in the Tracking or EXECUTOR Sheet If the Scroll Lock function is activated all entries on the keyboard will be entered directly to the comandline Scroll Lock LED on keyboard is lit By pushing Scroll Lock briefly you can toggle this function ON or OFF MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de GORDI Input range 000 to TO grandMA Mouse or grandMA light and ultra light and Micro Trackball When using a mouse on the Micro you always have to connect an external keyboard too The most effective way of working with the grandMA is to use the touchscreen and the encoders which are located next to the respective displays The only means to change the size of windows work within the Tracking Sheet or edit forms
314. lue will be output without regard to the level of the GRANDMASTER If a Fixture was modified in this window the Fixture s name will be displayed on a blue background in the Fixture Sheet These changes can also be set while patching Fixtures 2 5 Selecting DM X addresses for Fixtures With the lt lt lt key you can switch to the previous Fixture With the gt gt gt key you can switch to the next Fixt ure With the X key you can close the window 3 4 7 AUTO SORT Function in the FIXTURE Window Pressing the Auto Cols key dark background will move the function column for which the value is currently being changed automatically to the left Selecting Presets or functions in the Preset Window 3 7 Create Presets will move the respective column in the Fixture Window to the left Pressing the Auto Rows key dark background will move up those fixtures selected via groups or directly by fixture key and numeric keypad 3 4 8 SORT Function in the FIXTURE Window Pressing the SORT key will update the sorting see below in the Fixture Window 3 4 9 Options in the FIXTURE Window Touch the touch screen on the left corner of the title bar yellow dot Or Right click with the mouse on the headline bar The NEW FIXTURE SHEET OPTIONS window will open If pressing the Sorting amp Readout button displayed with a green font Layer Display By pressing the respective function the following values will be displayed
315. ly to Load from default default all Exec default LVU 5 1 3 Changing Button and Fader Functions press ASSIGN press small executor window or executor button press FUNCTION press SETTINGS When touch on the FADER symbol key a selection will appear where you can assign the respective function to the Fader by another touch Master The Fader controls all programmed dimmer values of this Sequence Swap With the Fader HTP channels in the sequence can be faded in All HTP dimmers stored in this cue with value 0 are set to 0 in spite of HTP modus and used by other sequences with values higher than 0 It is only possible to use the SWAP or Master fader FADE With the Fader the fade in time between cues can be set manually when using Chasers Speed Chaser speed can be set with the Fader Xfade With the Fader you can manually crossfade all parameters in to the next cue of the sequence XF A If Split Crossfade is active you can fade out the Cue that is currently playing back when pushing the fa der upwards or downwards If Split Crossfade is not active you can fade out to the darkening Dimmer channels of the next Cue when pushing the fader upwards or downwards XF B If Split Crossfade is active you can use the Fader to fade in the next Cue when pushing the fader upwards or downwards If Split Crossfade is not active you can fade out to the next Cue and to the brightening Dimmer chann
316. m Select these tracks and press the SORT key The selected tracks will be sorted and displayed at the very top of the track display If you have selected all or no tracks and press SORT they are sorted into their natural order e g the order in which they appear on the console The sorting of tracks is part of the show and is stored with the show It is only a display function and not affect playback functionality Adding Events Graphically with the mouse Choose the ADD mouse tool The cursor will show an arrow with a large Click anywhere in a track At the position you clicked with the mouse a new event will appear To edit this new event right click on it With encoders and keys Set the current time with the time encoder first one to where you want to add the event Use the track encoder second one to select the track on which you want to add the event Press the ADD HERE key At the given position a new event will appear and now you are ready to edit the event When you are adding events on an executor command track the timecode editor will try and predict the most likely command at that particular point in the track For example if you have an executor with a sequence containing 3 steps and you simply add one event after the other it is assuming GOTO STEP1 GOTO STEP2 GOTO STEP3 OFF Or if you are adding a new event after a FLASH UP ON command it will predict the new event as FLASH UP OFF
317. mal Highlight function 213 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA Pocket PC rocr LOOX GMA Remote qx 10 42 GD Loops seq he Effects Name Trig Fade Outfa 1 Cue GO 2 Cue GO 3 Cue GO 4 Cue GO 5 Cue GO 6 Cue GO Tom Logged In B EE 214 Change Function Executer Run short Changes the function of the three right buttons if CHANGE FUNCTION lights green press one of the buttons and select a new function After the second press on CHANGE FUNCTION the chosen functions will be executed Buttons with functions differing from the default setting have a blue background The modified setting can be saved with AS A DEFAULT FOR ALL as new default setting short the chosen functions will be executed set master with fader or cursor Makros Macros can only be started or stopped Creating or modifying macros has to be performed on the console Use the cursor to scroll in the Sheet if only some of multiple macros are displayed MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Pocket PC GMA Remote Fixture Layer HAI AAOS E ms i EA Pocket PC rocr LOOX GMA Remote qx 1 54 GD Groupmasters Patch Note on the console FULL ACCESS may NOT be opened in the SETUP Only LIVE ACCES is available with the PDA
318. mber of fixtures on which the preset is applied to panne ce con Red the small figure is the button number i Hy Greyarea Nolamps selected or the preset is not available for the selected lamps Gobo1 5 5 Gobol 1 gt gt i Violet i Blacktrame Thepresetalso contains values trom another preset an embedded preset _ Purple numeral over preset name Shows the number of selected lamps that were activated with the preset Blue numeral over the preset name Shows the number of the lamps that were activated with the preset when lamps are selected at the same time that were not activated with this preset White black points on bottom edge The preset contains toreign values e g dimmer values in a PANIIT mene east preset The white points signal active foreign values in the relevant parameters 1 field PAN 2nd field TILT 3rd field DIM etc see Chapter f PRESETS Colors used for the COMMAND LINE Black Command was executed Red Command was not executed An entry was missing or a command was not possible because e g a triggered button was empty Green Macro was executed Blue Time code was executed Colors used for the VIEW BUTTONS yelow here the screen dumps of several monitors are saved Le withthis button you can also switch other monitors Oange tnesaved screen dump only refers to this monitor 7777y Brown with greentext tns View is currently shown on the monitor 227 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 68
319. mers Stage Setup Edit Show press SETUP FIXTURE SCHEDULE Full Access In the Full Access menu you can define the number of Scanner and Dimmer channels and assign DM X addresses Furthermore the stage can be adapted and Scanners and Dimmers be positioned accordingly Only in the Full Access menu can you modify the complete Show If using the console in the M ulti User mode Fades Wheel Ate Addie F etup x Full you can access this menu only from a console 2 2 All Access T Adjustments Lights Misc Access 5 When adapting a Show a copy will be used the modifications will only be available when they are saved Touchscreen Calibration Backlight E E IF F senne Be Mra Accessing this menu will take a few seconds as all Fixtures approx 300 will be loaded from the hard disk Gewion eae Access gt ue f and Time p ose Gloup Create ml ae d Language p Ti E er aa anes Faw Pen Goosenecks Parame ekg fader Wheel E x Update 1024 Manual _ Additive A Software p SETUP menu on the MICRO Live Live Access acs There are certain limitations when it comes to modifying a Show These modifications will be executed immediately In the M ulti User mode the Show data can be adapted by multiple users simultaneously In the Live Access menu you can e g assign DM X addresses Furthermore the stage can be adapted and Scanners and Dimmers be position
320. mporary update or downgrade of the connected grandMA slave automatically If a 4096 channel master is connected to a 2048 channel slave the grandM A slave will take over the 4096 channels and process them in all conditions even when the connection is broken regardless of what the original installed channel count Rebooting the slave will restore the installed channel count immediately In a Full Tracking Backup situation where the master is defective this may cause a loss of show data as only DM X channels 1 to 2048 are processed on smaller 2048 channel systems Therefore please make sure that the channel upgrade is being implemented on the slave 16 3 3 Using a PC as master or slave console Though the grandMA Offline Editor software cannot be used to actively control DM X channels as the DM X Ethernet protocol is permanently disabled it still can be used in a master slave connection with real grandMA consoles Because of the limitations of the PC hardware in combination with Windows operation systems the grandMA Off line Editor must be seen as weakest part of the EtherNet chain therefore it may only be operated as slave console You may use this setup with a PC as slave to easily transfer show file data to other grandMA consoles whatever type they are especially when they are used on a distributed network 11 30 11 30 11 15 6 10 6 10 6 10 1 5 21 25 aranom o grandMA replay unit
321. n ALL Restores selection after ODD EVEN NEXT PREVIOUS CLEAR Progressively clear the programmer CLEAR_ACTIVE Clear the values in the programmer CLEAR_ALL Totally clear programmer at once CLEAR SELECTION Clear the current selection DEF_GO Go forward for default executor DEF_GO Go back for default executor DEF_PAUSE Pause the default executor ESC Escape from input or menu EVEN Select even devices inside current selection NEXT Select next device inside current selection ODD Select odd devices inside current selection OOPS Oops mad a mistake gt Undo PREVIOUS Select previous device inside current selection VALUE Switch back from fade or delay to value mode UPDATE Update data of active object Active objects create stage output The DEFAULT keyword The command line has a DEFAULT keyword Whenever you start a new command line with numeric values this default keyword will be used Assume that the default keyword is CHANNEL When you type in grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 1 ENTER In the command line will appear CHANNEL 1 ENTER If the command line is empty the current default keyword is shown by a LED in the physical key b the command line window The following keywords can be the default keyword CHANNEL PAGE FIXTURE MACRO GROUP PRESET SEQU VIEW CUE EFFECT EXEC The default keyword is also used by operational keywords Assuming that the default
322. n entered for X the value 0 will be taken IFOUTPUT selection ENTER IFOUTPUT X THRU Y ENTER If no value had been entered for X the value FULL will be taken If only one value had been entered this value will be selected Basically only values will be looked for entries above 100 will yield no result grand MA INSERT INSERT source objects AT destination ENTER Example INSERT GROUP 10 THRU 15 20 AT 1 ENTER Insert is working ONLY with SORTABLE objects Sortable objects are PRESET GROUP M ACRO VIEW EFFECT FORM TIM ECODE SEQUENCE Insert will try to make sufficient free space at the given destination by moving non empty objects INVERT INVERT selection ENTER NVERT is inverting the selected status of devices Example1 Fixtures 1 through 5 are already selected INVERT FIXTURE 1 THRU 10 ENTER Fixtures 6 through 10 are selected Example2 All even fixtures of GROUP X are already selected INVERT GROUP X ENTER All odd fixtures of GROUP X are selected Special case INVERT ENTER The selected status of all devices that have ACTIVE channels in the programmer is inverted LABEL LABEL object list NEW NAM E ENTER All objects in the object list will be renamed to NEW NAME Directly entering the new name is only possible with the PC keyboard If the name is not given directly within the command you will be prompted for it If more than one object is to
323. n installation of the grandMA WYSIWYG drivers and the connection grandMA WYSIWYG LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de DMX Sheet Delete Window J fil bes 2IBL 65 ae 97 P B 129 2 10 DMX Output Window Create a DM X Output Window DM X using a TFT Display 3 1 Creating windows Open Options Menu In this window each patched channel can be displayed showing the value it is currently outputing By briefly pressing the respective keys A H dark background all DM X ports DM X channels will be displayed in this window if needed scroll through the window using the Encoder next to the Display The first DM X channel of this row is displayed here If you position the mouse pointer on a cell the DM X channel possibly already patched channels with their fixture types and functions will be displayed in the lower part of the window In the DM X sheet you can also change the DM X Patch Change patch Press button Move LED lights and click on a channel with left mouse button hold left mouse button down and move the fixture to an empty space You can only move the complete fixture therefore you need enough space in a continuous row at the new address Unpatch Press button Delete LED lights and select a channel with mouse or touch All channels of the fixture will be d
324. nce and Software Updates The software of the grandMA family is in a process of constant expansion and improvement Due to the control via menus and display softkeys it is possible to realise the feedback of our customers and technical advances in our software updates The hardware is only the basis and offers sufficient capacity to guarantee that its owner will always participate in the fascinating technical developments 14 3 4 Peripherals Peripheral units such as a wireless remote control are still in the development process A 3D visualisation software is available 14 3 5 Capacity grandMA replay unit controls 2048 parameter 4096 parameteras option via ethernet dimmers and attributes of 8 or 16 bit with softpatch to 4096 DM X addresses Up to 16384 parameter with NSPs A freely configurable monitor offers flexible operation and precise adaptation to any individual working mode Playback works on the basis of dipless crossfade either in Tracking or Non Tracking mode The internal harddisk allows for virtually unlimited storage capacity of presets memories cues and effects 14 3 6 Front Panel Layout 5 Faders as Executor Effect or Group Faders each with 3 directly assigned buttons 5 Executor Buttons for direct retrieval of Sequences Chases and other functions 14 3 7 Setup Menu and Start Configuration Basic configuration available on harddisk Fixture library with more than 280 multifunctional fixtures
325. nces will create only one undo on the stack Working with undos can give you security during your programming but for performance reasons on very large shows it can be switched off see SETUP UNDO menu ON As starting keyword every object that follows after the ON will be switched ON without changing the current step ON target object list FADE X DELAY Y ENTER If fade or delay are given they overwrite the pre programmed times Target type Operation EXEC Switch on executor EFFECT Switch on effect fading in in last direction PAGE Does On onall its executors SPEEDM ASTER Does On on all chasers using this speed master executor assigned to a speed master SUBMASTER Knock in all channels involved in this group CHANNEL FIXTURE and GROUP Knock in all given devices PRESET X Preset Type Knock in all channels of current selection of that preset type Knock in means to activate the programmer for a channel with its current value This function can also be used to make snapshots of running programs As staring keyword the given page will become the current page PAGE T X ENTER T Type of page in range 1 3 Type 1 means Dimmer pages Type 2 means Fader executor pages Type 3 means Button executor pages X For dimmer pages in range 1 amount dimmers divided by 20 For executor pages in range 1 64 PAGE X ENTER Will select fader and button executor page together As target fo
326. nd then or later updating to version 5 xxx This operation would destroy the operating system If so please contact the hotline PLEASE OBSERVE The following consoles with serial numbers equal or higher may only be operated with the software 5 560 Down dating to a lower version will cause errors in the software grandMA S N 904 and higher grandMA Light S N 698 and higher grandMA Ultra Light S N 428 and higher 185 Replay Unit S N 103 and higher grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 ere pone a il l tree EXECUTOR FADERS 186 14 Layout and Controls grandMA replay unit 14 1 Introduction The grandMA Replay Unit is a small rack mount controller unit that performs nearly all of the functions of the Award winning grandMA console At 19 x 17 x 5 it requires a very little space while offering 100 compatibility with the larger consoles The grandMA Replay Unit is designed to perform as a stand alone show controller on exhibitions in theme parks or other venues In conjunction with one of the grandMA consoles it also becomes a very powerful backup system capable of running an entire show in full tracking backup mode despite its reduced hardware Floppy Key Quick and easy loading of a show from floppy disk This key complies with the following steps on the grandM A Backup Load Floppy If monitor and mouse are connected you can follow the i
327. nder Desk Config the IP address and the Subnet of the console will be displayed If the SubNet is not identical this has to be adjusted For further information please contact you network administrator Gateway For further information please contact you network administrator With the Backlight button you can switch the background lighting on and off In the Output table all available DM X outputs of the DM X converter are displayed In the Input table all available DM X inputs of the DM X converter are displayed DM X input four pages earlier In the tables you can adjust the name patch for every DM X output or input In the xDM X column you can assign a number for every DM X output or input Each DM X output or input will be assigned by this number If you press the Save button the changes are transferred to the converter By pressing the X button you close the menu 2 9 5 WYSIWYG To visualize the show every desk also onPC and offline can connect with WYSIWYG visualization Open the DMX amp NSP Configuration in the TOOLS menu Open the Configuration menu with the WYSIWYG Config button Set the mode onto ENABLED Enter an ID number the same number has to be set in the WYSIWYG configuration The button has to be on Enabled if Standalone green in the DMX via Ethernet in TOOLS DMX Configuration menu otherwise no DMX signal is issued outside a session There is an extra manual available for more information o
328. ndow has been closed The whole operation can take some minutes You can only save 1 show to a floppy if needed use YES to save the same show on a second floppy or finish the operation with NO in the end remove floppy from the drive 11 7 Loading a Show from Floppy disk press BACKUP press Floppy DISK press LOAD Show insert the floppy containing the Show press OK operation can take some minutes The Show is being loaded inthe end remove floppy from the drive as otherwise the console will not boot on the next restart In order to avoid loading all users plus their respective profiles when loading a Show you can choose one of the following options accept all user profiles EVERYTHING do not accept any user profile NOTHING accept only the user who had created the Show DISK CREATOR This way you can relieve the memory space and the processor In case the users on the floppy are identical with those already stored on the console the request will be skipped Warning You can only load shows that were created with versions 3 2 or later If you have to convert shows created with an earlier version please contact the hotline see below 11 8 Loading a Demo Show press BACKUP press Demo Show press LOAD Show select the desired show using the Encoder and load it by pressing on the Encoder 179 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7
329. ned as e g Go Go Pause Flash etc Manual setting of times for Executor buttons Socket for console lamp 12V 5W i i View Effect Goto AAA Page Macro Preset me FS EE Seq Cue Exec Fe FO e Channel Fixture Group Command Window BE e tm FEE E JE e BEBB Fee e ad E me Down 1 7 4COMMAND WINDOW Micro This menu contains most of the Functions of a big grandMA desk Pressing the Background button the Command Window can temporary be removed from the screen Commands are still waiting for completion NOTE Working with the REPLAY UNIT the COMMAND WINDOW is very usefull Start COM MAND WINDOW F7 fuctionkey on the external keyboard 1 8 Replay Unit see Chapter 14 11 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Select Feature Pan Tilt Dimmer Ciojojoji Gobo2 Color1 Color2 Color Mix ColorPicker Beam1 Focus Speed vs apo e FO g 12 1 9 General Operation Touch screen Keys can directly be selected In charts individual cells can be selected By using the Lasso function on the touch screen you can also select several cells You can simultaneously select individual but also several Fixtures or Channels by clicking and dragging with the mouse on touch screen Directly activating title bars of windows or opening options for the individual window by touching the corner icon Encod
330. ned within a Group uss Edit key LED on and a key in the Effect Pool The EDIT EFFECT menu will appear in the right TFT display 6 2 Editing Effect Groups When choosing an Effect Group from the Effect Pool respective keys will be displayed above the Encoders Pressing the EDIT key for this Effect Group will open the EDIT EFFECT menu Or Push Edit key LED on and a key in the Effect Pool The EDIT EFFECT menu will appear in the right TFT display 6 2 1 Editing Effects In the title bar the Effect Group to be modified will be displayed with its number and name In the second line the column functions are listed Sel Selection Displays the numbers of Fixtures or Dimmers assigned to this Effect If the Fixtures or Dimmers assignments are to be modified for an Effect it has to be selected this will be indicated by a red background Pressing the SHOW SELECTION key once will select the assigned Fixtures and Dimmers displayed in yellow Select those Fixtures and or Dimmers will be displayed in yellow that are to be assigned to this Effect Now ress the TAKE SELECTION key once The new number of Fixtures and Dimmers will now be inserted and adopted If an generic Effect Group is to be created thats one without any selection which can then be used with any selection do not select any Fixtures or Dimmers but press the TAKE SELECTION key once The cell will now display a Zero The key of this Effect Group will
331. ned xDM X slots PATHPORT Node Configuration next page The outputs can be distinguished by these numbers Select an address for the DM X output In the right table one line is displayed for each Node The selected DM X output will be indicated by a green background If an output is indicated by a red background this means that it is already assigned and cannot be used If you press the Identify by Backlight button the background lighting of the Display will blink Pressing the Save button will save the changes Press the X button Now the converter for this DM X port is configured and the menu will be closed If additional ports are to be assigned repeat all steps as indicated After all settings have been made press the SAVE button in the DM X OUTPUT CONFIGURATION menu The changes made will be saved then On the assigned Ethernet DM X converter Active will be displayed for the assigned DM X outputs and inputs PATHPORT Node Configuration First choose a DM X converter to be adjusted in the table By pressing the Edit Nodes button open the menu for this DMX converter The data will be read from the Ethernet DM X converter and be displayed Aside from the name a deliberate name for this node can be chosen IP here you can set the IP address When pressing the Save button you have to start the Ethernet DM X converter transmission by pressing OK in the opened window The converter will reboot and set the new IP address U
332. ng 14 3 20 Operating system Operating system for industrial applications named VXWORKS no DOS no WINDOWS Fast cold boot time approx 1 minute Software update via download from Internet Off Line Editor available 14 3 21 Hardware Pentium Processor with min 450 MHz Processor Speed and 256M Byte RAM 12 MByte non volatile Flash Disk for Operating System System Software and Instal lation Data Built in Hard Disk for Show Data Library etc Integrated 3 5 Floppy Drive for easy software updating and external storage of Show Data Reset Keys on front and rear housing Built in UPS Un interruptable Power Supply to withstand main power failures up to 10 minutes Professional protection against electromagnetic interference in compliance with all relevant European EMC regulations 14 3 22 Weight and Dimensions Robust Steel Housing 485 x 430 x 140 mm Weight 24 25 Ib 11 kg 190 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH MA Network Consoles Remote Station Z Change IP My Station Name SS Prioritiy Normal Invitation SAVE YOUR SHOW BEFORE CHANGING THE IP Local Station 15 Potentialities of Network connections In the grandMA family there are multiple networking possibilities In the following description we will use the abbreviation grandMA or u
333. ng the n U show afterwards on the Replay Unit LJ Executor Fader Page Up Key no 1 This key has 2 functions Switching pages for the Executor Faders Page up Confirm key no 1 the respective command appears as running text on the display Executor Fader Page Down Key no 2 This key has 2 functions Switching pages for the Executor Faders Page down Confirm key no 2 the respective command appears as running text on the display Executor Key Page Up Key no 3 This key has 2 functions Switching pages for the Executor Keys Page up Confirm key no 3 the respective command appears as running text on the display Executor Key Page Down Key no 4 This key has 2 functions Switching pages for the Executor Keys Page down Confirm key no 4 the respective command appears as running text on the display Display Pop up messages will appear on the display of the TFT monitor which have to be confirmed as on the grandM A NOTE If these messages are not being respectively confirmed you might not be able to continue in the process If monitor and mouse are connected you can also confirm the messages with these tools Power Supply 1 5 5 Battery aa A yout EERE 187 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 14 2 General Instructions 14 2 1 Differences between Replay Unit and the grandMA or grandMA light The Software is identic
334. nges while sequence is running Dimmer value light grey default value of the fixtures Dimmer value cyan entered value or value that has been changed in this cue Dimmer value magenta tracked value Dimmer value green value has been reduced Dimmer value blue Dimmer value white with red manual activation or fader Encoder movement background Dimmer value white with not selected but changed manually selection deleted with dark red background CLEAR a k ae a tel a Me i KW Ws Lk Dimmer value white bold not selected but changed manually activation deleted with CLEAR Background blue green Background black empty DMX channel is not patched dash DM X channel is patched no values will be output by the current Colors used for the screen display in the Group Sheet Color or symbol T e a a greyarea UQfoUpwithSeveralfixtures aaa grey area with group with several blue frame fixtures are selected blue area group consists of one fixture Colors used for the screen display in the Group Master 24 230 Color or symbol echts zweierl ll Text white starting with a sign name of the group master Text pink starting with a sign For this group master the NEGATIV INHIBIT option has been selected Pink bar blinking LED The motoriyed fader has been blocked when adjusting it and has not reached the given value lt if the pink bar is on zero only the dark red background can be seen Yellow bar shows the position of the group
335. nit for any grandMA grandMA light grandMA ultra light grandMA RPU grandM A Offline and grandMA 3D as they are all equipped with the same software options and only differ in their hardware Offline and 3D however cannot create any DM X The PDA remote control is not a unit in the above sense and will not be explained The micro can only enter into a network connection with the 3D grandM Avideo and WYSIWYG NOTE Connect to a network only with minimum 50 free memory If in the network there is a device having a transmission rate of more than 10M bit the whole network will be reduced to that transmission rate grandMA plus grandMA 3D PC 2 grandMAs connected Backup system or Single user grandMAs connected Multi User system grandMA 3D PC with one or two NSPs as a complete console with DMX output grandMA Micro with grandMA 3D PC For visualization purposes on a PC 15 1 Preparing the network settings pres TOOLS Pressing the MA Network Configuration button in the TOOLS menu will open this menu Save Show before changing the IP adress The change it just click on the IP address this will open a window containing the current IP address that can be changed directly This IP address cannot be used on different consoles within the network Simply alter the individual IP address of each unit to unique numbers within your network M ake sure that the first three number blocks in this case 192 168 and 0 are identical for
336. ns of the Trackball not for grandMA light and Ultra light Pan Tilt Trackball button on LED is on Trackball controls Pan and Tilt OFF Trackball button off LED is off Trackball has no function Pan Tilt Trackball button on LED is on Trackball controls Pan and Tilt Mouse Trackball button off LED is off Trackball controls the mouse using the Prev SET and Next keys you can operate the appropriate mouse buttons Pan Tilt Trackball button on LED is on Trackball controls Pan and Tilt Mouse OFF Trackball button LED blinking Trackball controls the mouse using the Prev SET and Next keys you can operate the appropriate mouse buttons Trackball button off LED off Trackball has no function RESET DEFAULTS key Will reset all changes back to factory settings Encoder labelling for figures within the Cue Timing column Use SAVE TO GLOBAL USER PROFILE in the logged in user s profile to save changed DEFAULT settings in the TOOLS menu You can reload these individual DEFAULT settings with RESTORE FROM GLOBAL USER PROFILE 2 14 Setting Sound Signals The sound signal is used for triggering Chasers and Sequences In other words this is an electronic graphic equalizer In order to slowly balance any fluctuations of the audio signal a specific compressor function has been integrated You will find an integrated adjustable HOLD OFF function This function will prevent any double triggers for example w
337. nstructions in chapter 11 1 Saving or loading a SHOW Without these you would proceed as follows Confirm if you wish to save the actual show on the internal harddisk in advance by pressing the page keys key no 1 to 3 Key no 1 Save actual show on harddisk before loading show from floppy Key no 2 Do not save on harddisk before loading show from floppy Key no 3 Cancels the actual load task Without a floppy disk inserted you will get an error message on the display Confirm with key no 1 This procedure is also valid for many other Pop Up menus of the grandM A Floppy Drive The floppy drive will take all 3 5 1 44M B HD disks and will serve to save shows or single fixtures from the library Off Key The Off Key has the same function as the Off Key on the grandM A Together with the Executor Buttons or the appearing menu on the monitor you can switch off active executors You can switch off the executor by simultaneously pressing the Off Key and the respective Executor Button 5 6 OFF menu Executor Fader There are 5 Executor Faders available These five faders correspond to the faders no 1 to 5 on the grandMA Faders no 6 to 20 Faders 6 to 10 on the grandM A light are not available This becomes especially important when programming the show on the grandMA and running the show afterwards with the Replay Unit These faders are not motorized so that the actual values have to be grabbed
338. o EXECUTOR faders The left part of the menu shows all Effect Groups that are playing back via Cues Pressing the OFF key on the right side of CUELIST all these Effect Groups will be switched off The lower part of the menu shows all Effect Group calls performed since the last Cue was stored including their respective playback parameters When storing the next Cue all calls in this Sheet will also be stored It is also possible to modify individual calls To do so select the respective call will be displayed with a blue frame The setting will be adopted displayed above the Encoders and can be adjusted with them You can delete a complete call by making a right mouse click into the NAME column If you only want to delete a single parameter make a right mouse click on the parameter 6 7 Creating and Storing Virtual Forms EDIT FORMS 6 7 1 Creating Virtual Forms From this menu you can create two dimensional forms for use with PAN TILT parameters When creating Forms the movements can directly be output to the Fixtures The created Forms will automatically be stored in the Form Pool Calling up this menu 6 1 1 Creating an Effect Group Item 3 6 2 1 Editing Effects item Table Press the PREDEFINES key once A window will open where several prepared Forms will be displayed Select one of these Forms this Form will now be displayed on the the black window LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Wa
339. o OFF you can save the Show immediately set Ennumerate to ON you can save the Show immediately plus a consecutive number will be added to the current name If the ENUM ERATE button is on ON in the BACKUP menu under QUICK SAVE every saving procedure saves a new copy of the show with AUTO SAVE this happens automatically In this way several 100 versions of the show can quickly burden the hard disk select your Archive Medium hard disk on the console file server external memory to be set using File Server in Archive M edia 11 1 Saving the Current Show on the internal harddisk press BACKUP press HARD DISK save Show SAVE Show As Enter a name for the show and confirm with ENTER The show will be saved under the new name SAVE Show the Show is saved immediately with the current name SAVE Show Enumerate the Show is saved immediately and a consecutive number will be added to the current name 177 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Select Show For Partial Show Read Director 12 02 06 04 14 46 02 06 04 09 33 02 06 04 08 33 Select Show File to Delete Backup Menu Floppy Disk LOAD Show SAVE Show Hard fd Disk Demo Shows read only p FORMAT Disk F Content S Display SAVE Show s Show Info Erien a Partial Show Read 178 11 2 Loading a Show from the internal harddisk press BACKUP
340. o take when the 2x AT command is used grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Reset to Defaults Ex Procrammas Playback Executor Sheet Sheet Misc g g Timing Defaults Sorting Fontsize 2 Basic Fade On Off Time Default is Block ot 8s Os Sequence a Numbers Big gt gt Master Basic Outfade GOTO amp GO Chase Speed Ch I Sheet S ti Enabled _ Cue Timing 1s00 annel Et creens exten Sara a Numbers Big Se uated Snap Delay MIB Delay Chase Fade j We HSE Lobe Fader Sheet Keyboard Tri MIB Fad Readout ae tigger ade jeadoul GO 1s sec MN en Sheet Keyboard Readout Dot Zero Crossfade Single Digit Permanent z Preset Value Entry _ m ig Colours p gt nenne Trackball Default At ze foei Pan Tilt 100 Off Cue Timing Basic Fade Basic Outfade Snap Delay Trigger 8s Infade Os GO 46 LIGH Playback Timing The duration set for the OFF Time will be used when switching off Executors OFF key GOTO amp GO If a specific time is set when calling up a Cue using the GOTO or GO function the Cue will be called up with this duration If Cue Timing was set the Cue will be called up with the duration programmed in this Cue You can overwrite the Goto Default duration at any time 4 2 3 Default Sequence Master Sequence Here you can enter a Default time for MIB DE
341. odd FIXTURES and CHANNELS EVEN SELECTION Selects all even FIXTURES and CHANNELS INVERT SELECTION Allows to invert the selection If several fixtures are activated values in red but only some of those fixtures are currently selected fixture name in yellow you can deselect those fixtures and reselect all other fixtures will active values by pushing the INVERT SELECTION Key and ENTER DELETE Delete key MOVE MOVE key COPY COPY key BACKUP BACKUP key SETUP SETUP key TOOLS TOOLS key PREVIOUS PREV key NEXT NEXT key TRACKBALL SPEED Toggles the TRACKBALL between coarse and fine ENCODER SPEED Toggles the ENCODER between coarse and fine further toggling is achieved by pressing on the ENCODER REPORT Creates a report INFO Opens the INFO window of the required sequence LOCK Locks sequences or a single cue in a sequence executors effects forms groups presets worlds and macros editing i snot possible UNLOCK Unlocks the above items editing is possible HIGHLIGHT HIGHLIGHT button has Highlight function SOLO HIGHLIGHT button has SOLO function TRACKBALL TILT ONLY Trackball will only change the Tilt value as long as the Quikey is active pressed down TRACKBAL PAN ONLY Trackball will only change the Pan value as long as the Quikey is active pressed down SHUFFLE VALUE Will exchange the values at random between the selected fixtures SHUFFLE SELECT ORDER Will mix up the selection order at ran
342. of a Sequence can be displayed and modified Create a Tracking Sheet 3 1 Creating windows Touch the left corner of the title bar you can open the TRACKING SHEET OPTIONS window Display Layer Choose the values which will be displayed in th eTracking sheet identical with Display Layer in Fixtuer and Channel Sheet Sorting amp Reading Choose the type of value identical with Display Layer in Fixtuer and Channel Sheet With the FONT SIZE key you can switch the font size used in this window between LARGE and SMALL By pressing the key DEC or HEX you can switch the display of values between percent decimal or hexadecimal values The button LAYER CONTROL ON opens the control bar at the bottom of the tracking sheett Pressing the requested button switches the display to these values Attribute M ask All attributes in the EXCLUDED column will be not shown in the TRACKING SHEET when the button MASK is activated A Click on the attribute moves it to the other column Excluded to Included and vice versa For example Click on PAN in EXCLUDED moves the attribut in the INCLUDED column the attribut will be shown in CONTENT SHEET when MASK is activated Select Sequence Slelect the sequence by clicking on the requested sequence name In this window you can watch the progress of the sequence the currently playing back Cue will be displayed by a yellow background Colour codes used in the tracksheet Text CYAN New value
343. of separate Chaser steps Select the Cue to be modified in the Names column red cell Press the Edit 7 key LED in Edit key will blink All values of the Cue will now be played back on stage and displayed active red in the Channel amp Fixture sheets This cue can now be modified by either direct access or by presets 3 4 Direct Access to Fixtures in the FIXT URE SHEET 3 5 Direct Access to Dimmer Channels in the CHANNEL SHEET and 3 7 Creating and calling up Presets If the Cue is not to be seen on stage activate the Blind function by pressing the BLIND key integrated LED is on Press the UPDATE key once Choose OK in the window that has just opened The changed Cue is now stored Press the CLEAR key twice Cue values will be deleted in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window For modifying further Cues select the respective Cue Cue will be displayed on a green background Repeat all steps as described with the first cue and store with STORE 4 3 4 Copying Cues 4 3 5 Moving Cues 4 3 6 Deleting and renumbering Cues 101 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 UPDATE UPNATC marqa rad fields inte dastinatinn bw Dein Na amis Nama Sau K E peal aT N Trockaq Up a N Preset Filter ON Save og datauit 102 4 3 7 Inserting LOOPs 4 3 8 Inserting Command Line Commands Changing times for one or more Cues The Time Scaling function described in chap 4 3 3 can also be u
344. of the fixture from the Library By selecting it you can change the name directly using the keyboard Shortname Here you can enter an abbreviation or short name Manufacturer Manufacturer s name from the Library Comment Enter a comment here Date If you see Original here this fixture is one from the MA Library If a self created fixture is used you ll find the date off creation here Type Toggle between mirror or moving head Fixture When using moving head Fixtures the FIXTURE SHEET will show a square left of the PAN value indicating the current head position MIB Delay To set a DELAY time for the M OVE IN BLACK function for this fixture If Default is displayed the set value from the DEFAULT menu is used 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu Ged A j Fikira MIB Fade To set a FADE time for the M OVE IN BLACK function for this fixture If Default is displayed the set value ri from the DEFAULT menu is used 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu ENA BeamAngle M ax Beamwidth in degree Zoom and Iris function corresponds to this value au Feature Pies le Power For the 3D view see 3D instructions Lumen For the 3D view see 3D instructions Weight For the 3D view see 3D instructions If you select a fixture the individual functions of this fixture will be displayed in the lower part of the Displays No Listing of the individual DM X channels If a number is displayed in red and with an asterisk this channel ha
345. of the sheet Modulator In this column the different modulators can be discerned by their numbers Table The assigned effect for the modulator will be displayed by its name Assignment siehe item Table previous page From The starting point for the automatic modification in terms of percentage 125 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Edit Eff 43 Eff 43 Table Dir Size Modulator Base Oiiset Rate Grp wing AE o gt o Input Offset Input Range 360 00 to 36 cu 0 00 THRU 360 00 126 To The end point for the automatic modification in terms of percentage Phase Here an angle for moving individual modulators can be set Rate Display of the set ratio between the speed for this individual M odulator as to that of the whole Effect Group Assignment item Rate below Base You can also set an average value for each Effect using the BASE VALUE option The set value will overwrite all previously modified values of this function and by this will control all Fixtures Dimmers evenly The value can be set to between 0 and 100 Before modifying the BASE VALUE select the Effect first Press the BASE VALUE key once green background Now you can set an average value using the Encoder below Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the value to 50 default value Pressing the Encoder a second time the value will be deleted and set to NONE no BASE VAL
346. on the view toggles between COM MAND 1 and For some inputs you have to change the views Press the above button to toggle between the both COM M AND windows The command line stays in both windows If an input of a number is required the software switches automatically to COMMAND 1 For example DELETE CUE i i 50 ENTER Command 2 automatically switches Command 1 Shortcuts If you use a hardware keyboard with the remote software on the PDA you can use shortcuts for better access p The shortcuts corresponds to the shortcuts of the grandM A onPC software picture left displays a part of ool grandM A onPC screen shortcuts are written in brackets Ctl F10 Ct F11 Ct F 12 tP Inthe button menu J inthe Toolbar choose Shortcuts choose Enable and close menu Activate Shortcuts in the toolbar button has light background NOTE with activated short cuts the PAN TILT values are not adjustable by the hardware buttons Deactivate the short cuts dark background and adjust values as usual 209 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Command Time To set the Fade Delay times after having selected Fixture and Feature enter in the following sequence Fade Delay numeric value time dimension must have a red background ENTER Backspace to delete the last entry in the CommandLine Hours A Escape to delete the CommandLine blue back
347. on the window will close discarding any modifications when pressing CANCEL Dir direction In this column an arrow indicates in which direction the Effect will be executed To reverse the direction select the cell and press the Encoder to the right of the display once Size In this column each Effect is displayed with a separate value The set value increases or decreases the size of the selected parameter The maximum limit for size modifications that can be set is from 200 to 200 Before modifying the value of a size select the Effect first Press the SIZE key once green background Now you can set a different size using the Encoder below Clicking the Encoder once will automatically set the size to 100 Clicking the Encoder a second time will increase the value to 200 and at the third time will reset it 0 You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value 3 4 1 ALIGN function Modulator In this column you can assign an individual Modulator to each individual Size effect Using a Mo dulator the effect size can automatically be altered Think of it as and effect on the aplication of an effect to a parameter To assign a Modulator for this effect select this cell and press the Encoder on the right side of the Display The SELECT MODULATOR window will open where you can now go to NEW MODULTOR by turning the Encoder and clicking it to select this option A new modulator will now be generated in the lower part
348. on the encoder on the right side of the display Activation is confirmed by YES MIB can only be used in cells where a is displayed Trig The trigger for the Cue GO button SOUND TIME or FOLLOW If the TIMES key on the title bar of the edit window is pressed Fade FADE time Outfade Duration of the fade time on Dimmer channels which are reducing in value Delay CUE will be called up delayed by the time set only possible for the FADE functions ee E we Wate 0 Outdelay Outfade will called up delayed by the time set EEN a e p o onea ee eae Snap Duration of the DELAY Fade Duration of the individual FADE time min and max Delay Duration of the individual DELAY time min and max If the LOOPS key on the title bar of the edit key is pressed LOOP Will initiate a jump after the cue that includes the loop statement has finished LOOPDELAY The length of time or the number of occurences of a LOOP will be displayed LINK The Command Line Order to be triggered will be displayed LI DEL The delay value for the execution of the Command Line Order will be displayed If the EFFECTS key on the title bar is pressed EFFECTS Display of the effects calls A second sheet will appear in the lower part of the display NO Number of the Effect NAME Name of the Effect 93 grand IA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Seq 8 Seq 8 Editor E
349. only internal data from the converter will be displayed For SubSwitch the DM X converter SubNet number can be changed This change will overwrite the settings in the converter In the Output table the available DM X outputs of the Ethernet DM X converters will be displayed In the Input table the available DM X inputs of the Ethernet DM X converters will be displayed DM X input two pages earlier In the tables you can adjust the SubNet and Channel addresses for every DM X output or input This change will overwrite the settings in the Ethernet DM X converter By pressing the Reset to Local Control button the Ethernet DM X converter will be reset to its standard setting Defaults Pressing the Save button will save the modifications By pressing the X button you will leave this menu 2 9 5 PathPort DM X ETHERNET CONFIGURATION You can call up this menu by pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column if the PathPort protocol has been selected Up to 64 DM X outputs can be triggered via the PathPort nodes The IP address has to be adapted to the PathPorts Ethernet DM X converter something you can also do via the grandMA PATHPORT Node Configuration next page If PathPort Ethernet DM X converter s are connected they will be looked for when you call up this menu and they are displayed in the table only if the first 3 digits of the IP address of grandMA and PathPort Ethernet DM X grand MA converter are identical e
350. oppy in advance or make a backup Take care that the maximum number of channels that the console can handle will not be exceeded press BACKUP choose the Medium internal disk Hard Disk external memory FILE SERVER or removable disk FLOPPY DISK press INITIALIZE the SELECT SHOW for PARTIAL SHOW READ will open select the show you want to load elements from and confirm by pressing on the Encoder Mind the limitations number of parameters In the DEVICE MATCHING TABLE the current Setup green background and the Setup of the imported Show grey background will now be displayed Fixtures appearing in the same line have the same ID number here the user has to decide whether to keep the current fixture or to take the imported fixture It is possible that the settings of fixtures of the same type will change position in the Stage view defaults Effects Cues etc will however not be changed And it can happen that for fixtures of different types programs change if e g some imported fixture s features a Cue refers to are missing select VIEW you can select fixtures in all views with ALL all fixtures of the current Show on the left and of the imported Show on the right are displayed 181 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Choose Wizzard No New Devices Default Add Unmatched Devices Harmless Use Old Devices Dangerous Partial Show Read Data
351. or in order to do so press on the right arrow and select it using the Encoder confirm by pressing on the Encoder or select the menu by pressing on the text button LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn gt www malighting de eMail info malighting de Tae pA select MODULATOR PROPERTIES using the left Encoder below the Screen chose an effect or a setting and dt ianae ZUULUU to ziu confirm by pressing on he Encoder on the side of the Screen NONE no effect selected PWM Impulse Width Modulation RANDOM Random fade ins of individual channels of the selected function TABLE here specific effects have a special background identical to TABLE in EDIT EFFECT FORM here forms that were previously defined and are in the FORM pool memory have a special background MODULATOR SIZE here you can enter the size of the effect in the graphics 100 are entered open the Calculator using the Encoder below the Screen enter the value und confirm with ENTER MODULATOR SPEED here you can enter the effect speed in BeatsPerM inute open the Calculator using the Encoder below the Screen enter the value und confirm with ENTER MODULATOR PHASE here you can enter the angle for shifting the modulator Mim Stray wii open the Calculator using the Encoder below the Screen enter the value und confirm with ENTER All entries are executed immediately and can be controlled from the STAGE view
352. or this CUE set the following parameters via the encoders Trigger Call of the CUE by GO SOUND or FOLLOW i e after previous cue in the sequence has completed or automatically after an amount of time Fade CUE will be played back with the set time this is only possible with FADE functions 2 3 Single Channel specific Adjustments for the Current Show point 10 and 2 5 EDITING FIXTURES modify point 9 Delay CUE will be called up delayed by the time set only possible for the FADE functions Snap Delay The Snap values of the CUE will be played back after the set period of time only with SNAP functions Pressing the In Fades button will switch it over to Out Fades Out Fade Dimmer channels which reduce their level in the next Cue will be faded with the set period of time Out Delay delays the outfading Cues can be stored on EXECUTOR faders or EXECUTOR button Define the assignment position of the Cue by pressing the EXECUTOR button once When storing to an EXECUTOR FADER press a button above or below the fader once The CUE is now assigned to this EXECUTOR button or EXECUTOR fader and stored in the Sequence Pool This way it is possible to assign the same Cue more often than once 5 1 ASSIGN menu Assignment to EXECUTOR Repeat all steps to create the next Cue Pressing the CLEAR key once will delete the selection twice will delete the active values and reset all values then 87
353. order will determine what the box will look like Example if you select the fixtures in the order 1 through 10 pressing ALIGN once will have the result displayed in the graphics on the left The order 10 through 1 will result in a mirrored version An irregular selection will yield an irregular graphics ALIGN key pressed once LED is on When changing the activated values the value of the first selected Channel Fixture will be taken as the starting FE thes ier value will not be changed while the value of the last selected Channel Fixture value will be the one modified most and all values in between will be distributed evenly g 1x Align Dimm valu ALIGN key pressed twice LED is on When changing the activated values the value of the last selected Channel Fixture will be taken as the starting value will not be changed while the value of the first selected Channel Fixture will be the one modified mgg and all values in between will be distributed evenly grand A Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Fader Sheet Output Fz se eS Te r 8 e g 4x Align Dimm value sortec ie 24 49 72 97 97 72 48 24 Fixture Preset amp Va sorted by Numbers ID F C Name Pan Tilt Channel Preset amp sorted by Numbe f FF gt f 62 ALIGN key pressed 3 times LED is on When changing the activate
354. oses 2 9 2 Configuring the internal DMX ports 1 A 8 H By pressing a button in the PROTOCOL column you can set a protocol for the appropriate DM X port A H referred to the respective Ethernet DM X converter for the transmissions By pressing a button in the CONFIGURATION column you can call up the appropriate menu for this DM X output next pages If the button is on enabled if Idle or Playback a DM X output via Ethernet is on if the unit is not in a session Idle An exception is here the Playback Session in this case the Slave stays on In a Master Slave configuration Full Tracking and Multi User Session the Slaves switch itselv to Disable off If a Master fails the Slave with the higher priority will automatically be switched to Enable This way the DMX will now be created by the former Slave now Master If two units are switched to Enable the data may will overlap This has to be avoided under all cicrumstances By pressing on this button it will switch to disabled now a DM X output via Ethernet is no longer possible next pages 2 9 3 DMX CONFIGURATION at Micro Open this menu with TOOLS It is a compressed versionof the TOOLS menus of the big grandM As With the menu Ethernet Configuration Setup you can change the IP address and the name of the desk With START SESSION the Micro connects with grandMA 3D The Micro can not be connected to NSPs and other grandMAs 2 9 4 AR
355. ou have always the choice to do it the old fashion way Dealing with huge amounts of data will make you want to use improved ways of programming and even an automatic effect synthesizer 1 1 4 Flexible Setup configuration Because of the grandM A s flexibility you will never lose direct access and control View Macro keys allow to visualise current information at anytime User profiles allow for differing window configurations to be recalled from previous shows to talyor the console for the particular type of show Live Event theater Synchronised playback nightclub industrial etc 1 1 5 Hardware and Interfaces 1 2 The built in Hard Disk Drive offers virtually unlimited storage capacity The built in flashdisk not on the ultra light on which the software is on the HDD contains the board s software and makes the grandMA independent from any external PC General Comments This manual describes the possibilities that the grandMA has in store for you Step by step you will be guided through the logical aspects of working with this console You will soon find out that operating the grandMA is simple and straight forward in view of the vast variety of features and options available Once you are familiar with the basics you will realise that you can easily try out new fuctions as all procedures and operational modes are clearly structured Consequently this manual starts with a general introduction followed by basic settings
356. ou stop or pau se the show Your actions and pre recorded items already in the show will be live on stage You can repeat the recording process step by step to add more and more details to your show b Fully automatic recording with internal synchronisation Basically the same as with external sync time is running continuously but you where to start and where to stop c Semi automatic manual recording In this mode time is not running although your show is in recording mode Between each executor command that you want to be recorded you can set the recording time manually with an encoder or by direct absolute input simply press the first encoder This is probably the best way of editing for the experienced user who already has a time table in front of him Even fader commands can be recorded this way Starting to record Automatic recording is started by pressing the record symbol in the timecode control bar the red symbol The depending on the sync setting in the options menu you will record with internal or external synchronisation Automatic Recording can also be started from the command line in a similar way to recording a macro STORE TIM ECODE X ENTER or STORE and press a key in the timecode pool Manual recording is started by pressing the MANUAL RECORD key in the timecode editor Stop recording Recording is stopped when you PAUSE or STOP the timecode show Automatic recording with internal sync will also be interrup
357. ove from this cue press the REM OVE key If the executor contains more than one cue you will have to be specific about which cue you want to Store 4 2 Programming Sequences 89 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 SEQUENCE m STORE SEQUENCE TE 90 You can also remove specific parts of a complete sequence by entering STORE SEQUENCE Sequence number CUE 1 THRU number of last Cue ENTER A window will open in which you confirm your operation by pressing the REMOVE key This syntax also applies for OVERWRITE and M ERGE Caution In NON TRACKING mode only Dimmer channels of the first copied Cue are taken account of For the following Cues the Dimmer values are 0 and will have to be reprogrammed manually 4 2 Programming Sequences Sequence is the generic term for multiple of cues with the option of various Fade and Delay times per channel and cue Sequences can be stored either on an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button Store the first Cue first step of a sequence either on an EXECUTOR fader or an EXECUTOR button 4 1 Creating Cues Create the second Cue next step of the sequence as before When storing the second Cue use the same EXECUTOR fader or EXECUTOR button Now the STORE window will appear In order to create a Sequence more than one Cue press the CREATE SECOND CUE key The Cue will now be stored in this Sequence as th
358. pects the fixtures and channels shall be sorted when setting up new windows You can switch to the next option by clicking on the respective keys Sheet Fontsize With the FONTSIZES column you can define the type size of new windows Sheet Readout Preset for the output of numbers in the OUTPUT CHANNEL and PATCH windows M isc Function of BLACKOUT key PUSH serves as push key key TOGGLE will remain active when pressed DISABLED switches the blackout function off Function of the GRANDM ASTER FADER ENABLED Fader active DISABLED Fader inactive Highlight is SOLO The button HIGHLIGHT has SOLO function see page 74 Highlight Normal The button HIGHLIGHT has HIGHLIGHT function KEYBOARD GERM AN ENGLISH Switch option for country specific keyboards KEYBOARD Dot Zero Switching the key sequence on the numeric keyboard to Zero Dot The key caps can be exchanged without any problems 1 7 2 Layout and Controls grandMA item 19 or 1 7 1 3 Layout and Controls grandMA ultra light item 21 MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 60 160 480 iK 3K 6K 2K cee CARE I ABD SRL cath IP cab cal HOLD f 450 GAIN DE BPH l Triggermonitor BPM OFF With the Preset Color key three different presets for the color scheme of displaying preset keys can be called up Functio
359. phical position If you know your position you can enter it in the LOCATION MANUAL mode if moving around frequently e g when travelling on a ship it is advisable to determine your current position by a GPS receiver and let the values be inserted automatically Button display Location Manual fix entry of values Set position for the automatic control of 9 3 Agenda M enu sunrise and sunset calculation Clicking on the respective keys will open a window where the position can be set Information regarding the respective position can be looked up in a software program that can be downloaded from the internet at www djuga net winglobe html or Button display Location Auto values are automatically used by a connected GPS receiver Pressing the button will open the GPS Info menu In this menu you can modify the settings for a NMEA GPS receiver connected to the serial port This receiver will then determine the position of the grandM A This can be especially useful e g on ships cruising on the oceans For best satellite reception check for an unhindered view to the sky when setting up your equipment If the key is set to Enabled the clock will automatically switch between summer and winter time Pressing the key deactivates this function Disabled Pressing the respective key in the Begin End field will open a window where you can set the beginning and the end of the summer time Pressing this key will open a sheet where the calculat
360. possible in one line when separated by a semi colon 9 1 3 Editing Macros Press the EDIT key once Select a Macro from the MACRO Pool Or Press the EDIT key once Press the MACRO key once enter the M acro number and confirm with ENTER The EDIT MACRO window will open In the LINE column the individual commands are numbered Inthe COMMAND column all stored commands are displayed one by one For each command the time between steps where the macro was recorded is displayed in the DELAY column This times can be edited or ignored for playback purposes Pressing the ADD LINE key will insert a step in front of the chosen position Now you can enter one or two commands separated by a semi colon Now you can enter a command using the text keyboard If you want to use a Delay time when performing a command click in the cell enter a time using the keyboard and confirm with ENTER To delete a command select one of the lines and press the DELETE LINE S key To modify a command select one and press the EDIT LINE key Now you can enter a new command f you want to modify the Delay time click into the cell enter a different time using the keyboard and confirm with ENTER Pressing the EDIT M ACRO NAM E will open the EDIT NAME window Now you can enter a new name using the keyboard and confirm this with ENTER If the TIMED MARCRO key is switched on the calls of this M acro will be executed with the set DELAY tim
361. prompted for it If executor is not given default executor will be used MACRO As starting keyword given macros will be executed MOVE source objects AT destination objects ENTER Source objects a range list of objects which are all of type X Destination objects a range list of objects which are all of type Y Object types X and Y must be equal or compatible see COPY If object type is sortable MOVE object_a AT object_b will exchange objects If object type in not sortable object_b will be overwritten with object_a then the original object_a will be deleted Sortable objects are PRESET GROUP M ACRO VIEW EFFECT FORM TIMECODE SEQUENCE Nonsortable objects are EXEC CUE PAGE VIEW BTN DM XBTN MIDIBTN TOUCHBITN The following objects can not be moved CHANNEL FIXTURE DM X FEATURE FADER MACRO range list ENTER NEXT Macro numbers in the range list must be in the interval 1 999 as target for the following commands ASSIGN A macro can be assigned to a VIEWBTN COPY Copy one macro to another DELETE Delete a macro EDIT Open edit menu for macro INSERT M OVEChange visible number of macro STOREStart to record a macro from live actions M acro recording is indicated by a flashing macro key Macro recording is stopped with the command STORE MACRO ENTER Macros can be timed A timed macro plays back with the same timing as it was recorded Non timed macros execute completely at once Create a s
362. q 3 6 Encoder for moving scrolling the respective even ar 3 e KA window contents 17 Go Go Pause button Will only fs 16 ffect the default sequence A default Fn 7 Viewpool key for opening a window on the plete eq 12 ht Ae 143 ag TFT display with all the created VIEWS in the Saa ky ie y zi how Th th Il irectl tH AFE on MEE an en Be erae uR atest bar in the small EXECUTOR window displayed selecting the required view 8 Background key If on the TFT display Views Iba Tifa n ue above Se 13 BER HE Bi A you can use this key to bring up or hide the as e g Go Go Pause Flash etc z menu 19 Manual setting of times for Executor Na 9 Keyboard key to bring up the Soft Keyboard buttons on the TFT display 20 Choosing Groups Executors etc in 10 Manual setting of time for Presets combination using the numeric keypad T T Encoder for setting the attribute values e g 21 Numeric keypad Gobo Pan Tilt times etc 22 intensity wheel 12 Keysto directly execute functions like Go Go etc for arbitrary executors locking executors SELECT key 13 Page flipping for Channel fader Executor fa der and Executor buttons 23 Cursor keys NEXT PREV Groupwise Calling up of scanner or dimmer channels one after the other 24 PAN TILT key changing over the Differences to the grandMA The software for the grandMA light and ultra light and the grandM A is nearly identical 4 funct
363. r Failure 5 PreRoll 142 PREDEFINES 130 PRESET 173 PRESET calling up a 74 75 Preset Control 66 Preset Control Bar 59 Preset creating a 74 Preset creating a automatically 41 Preset deleting a 78 Preset group 28 Preset Options 89 PRESETS 32 33 Presets automatically 41 Presets embedded 77 Presets move 75 Presets Selective 74 Presets Universal 74 Presets Update 76 103 PREV 9 58 PREVIEW 92 PREVIOUS 154 174 PRIORITY OPTIONS 110 Products 205 Profile 30 34 Profiles deleting 34 Prop 44 pulldown menu 12 PULSE WIDTH 125 PUSH 44 PWM 123 Q Quick Reference 15 QUIKEY 54 152 154 QUIKEY activating a 154 188 QUIKEY assigning a 154 188 R RANDOM 123 RANDOMLY 100 Range Name 33 Rate 106 126 RATE FACTOR 115 READOUT 66 Realease Store 88 Reference Command 159 REMOTE 204 Remote Control 140 Remote Control by DMX IN 150 Remote Control by MIDI 151 Remote Control vial Touchboard 149 Remote Network 196 Remotes as stored use commandline 46 renumbering Cues 98 Report store and print 104 RESET 15 REVERS 100 Roll after 142 Roll pre 142 ROTATION 131 Rotation X Y Z 21 RPM 34 RUN 100 RUNNING EFFECTS 130 S Safety Instructions 6 SAVE Show 177 SAVE Show As 177 Scanner DM X adresses 53 SEC 46 SELECT 8 174 selected sequence 8 Selected Sequence 91 selected sequence 115 Selecting 16 Selection 124 Selective Copying 80 Selektives Kopieren 81
364. r and buttons Press the DELETE key once to delete Pages LED is on Press the PAGE key once LED is on Enter the page number on the keypad and confirm with ENTER A window will open here confirm the deleting operation with the DELETE key If there are programmed Macros or Timecode Shows in which the moved or deleted Pages were to be used these assignments may no longer work 119 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Nureing fogranrs gt 5 6 OFF menu RUNNING PROGRAMS Pressing the OFF key twice will open the RUNNING PROGRAMS window All active chasers sequences effect groups timecode shows and Macros are displayed here CHASES ALL OFF Switches off alll active CHASERS SEQUENCES ALL OFF Switches off alll active SEQUENCES EFFECTS ALL OFF Switches off alll active EFFECTS TIMECODE ALL OFF Switches off all active TIMECODE SHOWS MACROS ALL OFF Switches off all active MACROS Pressing the DETAILS key will open the View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu 6 6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu CURRENT PAGE OFF Switches off alll Executors of the current Page ALL FADERS OFF Switches off all active EXECUTOR Faders ALL BUTTONS OFF Switches off alll active EXECUTOR buttons EVERYTHING OFF Switches off alll EXECUTORS CLOSE Will close this window You can also switch off Executors or Pages directly e g OFF key EXECUTOR button 3 TIME
365. r each option 1 5 Faders or 1 5 Buttons Sequences or Chasers there is a default that can be stored Pressing the Load from default key will load the stored default settings and use them for this Executor Pressing the Apply to all Exec will overwrite all Fader or Button Executors The prerequisite is however an 107 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 x DR zs Create A Window F S Xx Pools Presets Other PLAYBACK Fader and Buttons P a Erects Meequence EEan M aa To expand ist operational options and for a better access to Faders and Buttons Special Shows programmed e g a ae F 7 on a grandma can now be controlled from the smaller consoles having only 10 Executor Faders and 20 Executor Fader Bitmap Timecode 2 Dimmer Chat Bu ttons BMX kams ii Seas For internal or external monitors especially consoles with one or no monitor like e g the Replay Unit can now Fixture Groups Worlds 4 Color peg be used more effectively Fixture Desk You can now operate Faders and Buttons using your finger on a TouchScreen or the M ouse C t Macros 5 Beam Status x A i i i Sepac The virtual Faders and Buttons can be set and expanded like the mechanical ones in the Assign menu Content MAtricks 6 Focus Info Compact eg Z Control View Options eai Pags 8 Shapers oom Press the yellow Button in the upper left corner to open
366. r the following operational commands COPY Copy one page to another DELETE Delete a page MOVE Move a page to a different location As target for all execution commands The page will redirect the given commands to all its executors OOPS grand MA not Micro OOPS I made a mistake Undo OOPS progressively performs If the command line is not empty a backspace in the command line If the undo stack is not empty an undo operation Undos are created for programming actions such as storing a cue You can not do an undo for playback actions such as starting an executor The undo stack contains the last 10 programming operations therefore you can PAUSE As starting keyword every object that follows after the PAUSE will be paused PAUSE target object list ENTER Target type Operation EXEC Pause an executor EFFECT Pause an effect PAGE Pauses all executors on the page SPEEDM ASTER Pauses all chasers using this speed master executor assigned to a speed master SUBM ASTER Park all channels involved in this group CHANNEL FIXTURE andGROUP Park all given devices PRESET X Preset Type Park all channels of current selection of that preset type Park means to freeze the output for a channel with its current value Parked channels are shown with a bright blue background in the sheets Although a channel is parked it can still be used normally for programming purposes PRESET As st
367. randMA software is very flexible and can correct possible differences in the current hardware 16 3 1 Connecting consoles of different types The master console always demands the slave s to behave like the master hardware This means a full grandMA master forces a grandMA light slave to be a full grandMA temporarily This results in phantom executor faders and buttons as the grandMA light or grandMA replay unit has a reduced hardware platform Switching executor pages will then renumber the executors as given by the first executor on the master console When the connection is either manually or automatically by a user definable timeout broken the slave console can be switched to M aster mode with maintaining the setup and configuration of the lost master For example a grandM A master connected to a grandMA light slave will force the light to operate like a grandMA even when the connection is lost and the grandMA light is forced to solo mode The table shows what master slave connections are possible and how many and which executor faders and buttons are available on the slave during Tracking Backup and in solo mode afterwards Please note that the slave s assignment of executor faders and buttons restores to the hardware default after the console is once re booted 16 3 2 Connecting consoles with different DMX channel count In a Full Tracking Backup system the DM X channel count of the master console demands a te
368. re in the list there is always one hidden administrator You can not delete or change this administrator His user name is ADMIN and he is using the DEFAULT user profile Login becomes enabled if at least one user is in the visible user list The presence of the ADMIN user destroys any real security On the other hand you will never really loose access to your desk 2 16 4 Deleting an User To delete a user you need to have administrator privilege level Go to TOOLS menu Go to USER CONFIGURATION Select the user you want to delete Press the DELETE USER key The user will disappear If he was the only one to use a certain user profile this profile will also be deleted Please note that you can not delete yourself from the list MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 gt D 97297 Waldbittelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING sword Rights Ss Pro Administrator DEFAULT Administrator DEFAULT J Set User Rights De gt Edit Presets Edit General Edit Worlds Edit Setup Administrator me enfln Tint 2 16 5 User Rights Only a user with Administrator privilege level can change the rights of a user apart from his or her own and create new users A newly created user is always allotted the Administrator privilege level first To restrict rights the following privilege levels can be issued Call up Tools Setup U
369. record a crossfade and have a look at the outcome You will see that the global crossfade setting CROSSFADE PERM ANENT RELOAD affects the recording In the first case a pattern of XGoUp XgoDn XGoUp Xend is recorded while in the second case only XGoUps are recorded Nevertheless you can change the global crossfade mode afterwards without affecting the playback of your recorded timecode show If you edit a crossfade manually be aware that the crossfade fader movement alone does not do anything Although faders are moving no crossfade is started You have to place the crossfade commands on the command track to make the crossfade work Accordingly if you want to move a crossfade in time you have to move both the fader events on the fader track and the crossfade commands on the command track At first glance this procedure of recording a crossfade may seem to be complicated but it has a lot of advantages The crossfade commands are displayed in text mode making crossfades more readable Crossfades relate to absolute cue numbers like gotos Crossfades are not destroyed by running fader data reduction You can jump into the middle of a crossfade or run backwards into a crossfade and it will be correctly initialised This will happen quite often when using external time code 8 1 7 Time Code im onPC CD Player im onPC In the onPC you find a CD Player in the OPTIONS menue click with the right mouse button on the yellow dot
370. referably using the Encoders as with the mouse you run the risk of changing the stage setting just like that Undo unwanted changes using OOPS except with MICRO WIZZARD in the SETUP mode Here you can arrange fixtures in geometrical figures e g square circle arc You can however position each and every fixture manually see above but this function saves you a lot of precious time A special highlight is the Calibration mode that you can use to transfer the actual fixture position to the console The SETUP menu may not be opened Open STAGE and choose SETUP mode Select fixtures using the mouse or the touch screen or enter the ID number area Inthe WIZZARD choose the desired function ARRANGE IN MATRIX Select those fixtures to be embedded into the matrix the number should be the sum from horizontal and vertical lines as otherwise no complete square will result Enter the number of horizontal ROWS and vertical COLUM NS Enter the horizontal and vertical distances of the fixtures the resulting total value may however may not exceed the stage size Confirm using the OK button MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de i Wee use POSITION Single to offset the formation on 3 axes without changing the form itself ARRANGE IN CIRCLE Select fixtures Set starting and end angles between 0 and 360 or more
371. rements 16 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way such as power supply cord or plug is damaged liquid has been 2 Follow all instructions Keep the user s manual for later use spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus the apparatus has been exposed to rain or 3 Follow all cautions and warnings indicated on the unit moisture does not operate normally or has been dropped Besides others you run the risk of suffering an electric shock 17 All service work should be exclusively performed by qualified service technicians 5 Do not use the unit near water Do not expose it to a humid 18 Do not use any high power walkie talkies or cellular phones near the unit environment Do not spill any liquid over the unit 19 1f one of the following conditions occurs please disconnect the mains plug and call your dealer or technical support Power cord or mains plug is damaged or worn Liquid penetrated the unit 4 Disconnect the mains plug before cleaning the unit don t use any liquid or spray cleanser Clean with a dry cloth 6 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time 7 Do not block or cover any ventilation slots in the housing they The unit was exposed to rain or high ambient humidity guarantee the reliable functioning of the unit and protect it against The unit does not function properly even w
372. res Select New dark blue and shortly press the Encoder right to the Display The Create New Fixtures or Channels window will open Now choose From Library Proceed as indicated 3 pages earlier Creating patching and positioning groups Fixture Layer Name a D che Dt x with Scanners Dimmers r ag ee Add Exchanging fixtures Boas Select the fixtures to be exchanged in the Type column dark blue You can also select several or all Amount Multi Patch Fixtures Lines Create fixtures o ey pach Shortly press the Encoder right to the Display The Choose Fixturetype window will open Select a fixture that was already present in the show by turning the Encoder and accept it by shortly Multipatch pressing on the Encoder The fixture still has to be patched or SAN Select From Library for a new fixture and shortly press on the Encoder Proceed as indicated 3 pages earlier Creating patching and positioning groups with Scanners Dimmers Fixture Multipatch assigning one DMX channel for multiple fixtures dimmers Makes sense if several fixtures are always to be triggered at the same time but cannot be dimmed individually To do so you make a arbitrary number of copies of a fixture select the fixture that you want to copy press Create Multipatch Sie ee re Pp io in the entry window enter the number of fixtures to be triggered by the same DM X channel Dim 1 Muitp Sy In
373. rizontal first t Rotate Left MOUSE FRAME if the button is activated text turns green you can draw a blue frame on the grid This frame forms the target for the commands CLEAN REM OVE and FILL If the button is not active text is grey you can fill the grid using the FILL command or you can deliberately position individual fixtures on a free cell TAKE SELECTION the selected fixtures will be transferred into the layout and you can position them using the WIZZARD command ADD SELECTION when there are already fixtures positioned in the layout the selected fixtures will be added CLEAN FRAME fixtures within the blue frame drawn with the active M OUSE FRAM E will be taken out of the layout and bunkered as red squares adjacent to the grid REMOVE FRAME fixtures within the blue frame drawn with the active M OUSE FRAM E will be deleted from the layout but can reintegrated again into the layout using the ADD SELECTION command Positioning fixtures within the layout The order in which fixtures are arranged will influence how the effect will appear later The default setting is Left Right Top Bottom and Wrap Off with this setting the stage output will correspond to what is displayed in the Preview window Changes applied to this setting will not appear in the Preview window of the Bitmap Editor so that it is advisable to check them in the STAG view LEFT RIGHT RIGHT LEFT places the
374. rs marked with are not available for the Micro 2 16 1 Locking the Desk Locking the desk isa method to temporarily protect your desk against misuse from inexperienced users It is not suitable for permanent protection Locking the desk does not affect the output All programs that are running continue to do so But the surface of the desk is inaccessible even moving the grand master fader will be ignored Activating Desk Lock Press CTRL PAUSE on the PC Keyboard All touchscreens will show DESK LOCKED Desk is locked Deactivating Desk Lock Press CTRL PAUSE on the PC Keyboard again All touchscreens will restore in the original screens Desk is unlocked CAUTION Due to the fact that the grand master fader is not motorised master dimming may jump to an unwanted level upon deactivation of desk lock So have a look at it before you deactivate the desk lock For the grandM A ultra light this is also valid for all faders 49 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Current User Profile User Profile List 50 2 16 2 Concept of User Profiles The desk has a list of users Each user can have his own user profile but he can also share a profile with other users A user profile includes views quikey arrangement and playback settings Part of each user profile is global and independent of the currently loaded show This part is used to
375. s GLOBAL EFFECTS Effects saved in this sequence will use all channels even if they overlap with other sequences lower graphics For LTP Executors you can choose Off On Overwritten additionally When all functions of this Executor have been overwritten by other Executors this one will switch off Defaults Options Pressing the SAVE AS DEFAULT key will save the current settings as default settings Pressing the LOAD FROM DEFAULT key will load the saved default settings and use them for this Executor LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Exec 22 Group 12 line3 Special Master Effect Bitmap Effect View All Groupmasters Function ASSIGN 5 1 5 Assigning Group Masters Group masters are Faders only assigned to one group previously defined Group masters do not have an influence on the effects produced by the GrandM aster select group in GROUP Pool press empty EXECUTOR FADER button or open ASSIGN Menu of the related Executor press FUNCTION press GROUP MASTER select group Changing Group Names By pushing the key Name the name of the group assigned to the executor can be changed by using the keyboard or Push the ASSIGN key 2x LED is on Push the executor button where the name of the group should be changed A window appears where
376. s Sie been modified Break If one cell contains a Yes you can assign a different DM X address from the next channel onwards To change the setting select a cell and press the Encoder Now select Yes and press the Encoder one more time Attribut Listing of the individual functions Press Encoder and choose function Type Coarse stands for a coarse channel and Fine for a fine channel No Break Attribute Ty je COLOR A E AR EX Snap FADE SNAP function for the respective channel 2 3 DM X List Single Channel specific Adjustments for Bernie an fiyan imwa INN Padi Ail the Current Show Vn Inv In this column you can invert the respective channel Linas Default This value is called up if the Fixture or Channel is not controlled by CUE Sequence Preset or a direct ra access Can be changed with the left Encoder n We Danak Atib yot Highlight This value is called up if these fixtures are selected and the HIGHLIGHT key is pressed Can be m T Eo changed with the second Encoder i _ H Stage No function assigned yet Z 0 i E i Eei MIB Fade Allows you to set a FADE time for the M OVE IN BLACK function for this Fixture Can be changed with i a a the right Encoder f o EE Profile In this column you can assign a profile to the channel 2 8 Creating assigning and deleting Profiles Ellie Time For the 3D view see 3D instructions a React to Dimmer depen
377. s 99 COS 123 crash file 220 Create 20 CREATE GROUPS 42 CREATE MATRIX LAYOUT 84 Create Preset Preference 42 CREATE PRESETS 42 CREATE SINGLE GROUPS 42 Crossfade 46 CUE 165 Cue 86 Cue copying a 97 Cue deleting a 78 98 Cue Destinations 102 Cue executing a 105 Cue including a 90 Cue load 91 Cue merging a 89 Cue moving a 96 Cue Only 97 117 Cue Options 89 Cue overwriting a 89 Cue removing a 89 Cue renumbering a 98 Cue Update 76 103 Cue updating a 102 CURRENT PAGE OFF 120 Current Settings 107 110 D Date 30 Deactivate 64 DEF _GO 166 DEFAULT 26 45 59 70 DEFAULTS M enu Settings in the 45 Defined 63 Defining DM X Addresses for Fixtures 53 DELAY 17 154 166 Delay 93 DELAY times in the CHANNEL window 71 DELAY times in the FIXTURE window 63 Delayed Output 39 DELETE 55 154 166 Delete Point 35 Desk Lamp 44 Desk Locking the 49 DESK STATUS 54 Dim Path 95 DIMM ER CHANNELS accessing directly 69 Dimmer channels assigning colors 25 Dimmer creating a 18 Dimmer editing a 18 Dimmer Group calling up a 57 111 Dimmer Group creating a 57 111 Dimmer Option 73 Dimmer patching a 18 Dir direction 125 Direct DM X access 41 Discrete Values 34 display language 45 Display Panel Adjusting the Viewing of the 5 DMX 4 27 DM X Addresses 65 DM X Channels assigning 150 DMX Cofg b Micro 38 DM X hub 39 DM XIN Remote Control by 150 DMX input 37
378. s a dark background press the PULSE WIDTH key once key has a green background Now the pulse width can be modified using the Encoder below The pulse width can be set to between 0 and 100 Pressing the Encoder once shortly will automatically set the width to 25 50 or 75 You can also use the ALIGN function to set this value 3 4 1 ALIGN function The values set for the respective Effects will be displayed in the WIDTH column Press and hold the Encoder and turn to the right so that the focus blue cell frame with red background will be moved to the right When moving the focus beyond the right border further columns will be displayed WIDTH BASE RANDOM Random fade ins of individual channels of the selected function The number of channels to be faded in can be set SIN Sinus function COS Co sinus function LIN Saw tooth ascending LIN Saw tooth descending TRIANGLE Triangle function PHASE1 PHASE2 PHASE3 Normally used to create rainbow color effects on fixtures with color mixing Each of the phases is exactly out of phase with the other This allows for an even and offset application across 3 parameters By pressing the USER DEFINED key turns dark gray user created two dimensional forms can be selected for the PAN TILT parameters If a form is to be created or modified press the NEW or EDIT key to open the EDIT FORMS menu 6 7 Creating and storing virtual forms Pressing the SELECT key will adopt the functi
379. s into one AT command Clearing individual fades SELECTION AT FADE ENTER Works very much like b but no value for the fade is given Setting default in amp outfade No selection present FADE X X ENTER The next cue will be stored with X X seconds basic fade and outfade for all non snap channels as target for the following operational commands ASSIGN SEQUENCE GROUP and EFFECT objects can be assigned with As in amp outfade when storing a cue STORE List of Cues FADE X Y ENTER The given cues will be stored with a basic fade and outfade of X Y seconds for all non snap channels Switching to fade display mode MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de FADE ENTER All sheets wich are set to AUTO display mode will display fades instead of values This effect is only temporary All sheets will switch back to value mode upon ending of the next command line operation FADER Format Meaning FADER X THRU Y Fader X to Y of current page FADER P X THRU Q Y Fader X of page P to fader Y of pageQ FADER X THRU Y PAGE P THRU Q Fader X to Y of page P to Q Fader number X Y must be in the range of 1 20 Page numbers P Q must be in the range of 1 64 Only one command is implemented for the fader keyword FADER list of faders AT value list ENTER This command will set the motorized faders to the given values
380. s of hard keys Some keys have more than one function due to space considerations Some hard keys have an alternative function at the second or even the third push These keys are Hard key First press Second press Third press ASSIGN ASSIGN LABEL CHANNEL CHANNEL DMX EXEC EXEC FADER GOTO GOTO LOAD IF IFOUTPUT IF MOVE MOVE INSERT PRESET PRESET FEATURE TIME FADE DELAY VALUE VIEW VIEW VIEW KEY EFFECT EFFECT Call up an effect view GROUP GROUP Call up a submaster view PAGE PAGE Call up a total page view 156 10 1 4 M essages Sometimes the command line asks you a question upon the execution of a command It can also inform you about something that went wrong with your command If such a message or a question window appears on the display use the NEXT and PREVIOUS hard keys to select the appropriate answer the key with the thick blue border and then hit ENTER Also ESC can be used for simple messages or warnings If there is a more complex question and you hit ESC the action is considered to be CANCELED Every command line action that succeeds will appear in the history of all command line windows 10 1 5 Command line window Of course you want to be able to see the commands that you give to your console Open a command line window on the screen There you can see what you enter and what you have entered previously 10 1 6 Using the PC keyboard Some users may find it convenient to use the PC keyboard for command line input Op
381. s of the latest update To renew the Fixtures Library insert the optional available FIXTURE UPDATE floppy and press the Update Fixture Library from Floppy button This may last a few minutes After processing the note Fixture Library Up date done appears Additionally here is a possiblity to import older fixtures made with version 3 2 3 3 Update via network for that the new software has to be loaded onto the console grandM A grandM A Light grandMA Ultra Light grandM A MICRO NSP OFFLINE Editor and grandM A Replay Unit connected via a network can be updated among themselves Proceed very carefully This operation may be carried out by qualified grandMA users only Futhermore this operation requires an impeccable network not overloaded at this moment IN NO CASE MAY THE CONSOLES HAVE THE SAME IP NUMBERS THIS WOULD DESTROY THE OPERATING SYSTEM Updating the software is only possible if the first three number groups of the grandM As IP addresses are identical e g 192 168 177 X press SETUP press UPDATE SOFTWARE select a console from the table If a console is not being displayed it has a software version that cannot be updated via network you have to do that individually using a floppy press UPDATE CONSOLE or cancel the operation with CANCEL WARNING As of version 5 0 the selected console will receive the software version of the very console the update was started from i e it is not possible to
382. s or values that have changed in this cue Text MAGENTA Tracked values these will not change in the next Cue and are not stored Text GREEN Downfading dimmer values Text RED Blocked values Button TIME FADE DELAY times will be displayed If the FIX key is pressed dark background all selected Fixture parameters will be displayed first in the Sheet If the key is not pressed indicated by a CHA the Sheet will display all functions regardless of their LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de selections When selecting presets the Fixtures Dimmers will be sorted accordingly in the Tracking Sheet re If the M ASK key is pressed the INCLUDED EXCLUDED functions will be activated in the OPTIONS menu Tracking Sheet Options If the SORT key is pressed dark appearance the Fixtures Dimmers will be sorted by selection and parameter When selecting groups or presets the Fixtures Dimmers will be sorted accordingly in the Tracking Sheet If the LINK DEFAULT key of the title bar is pressed the default sequence will automatically be transferred to the EXECUTOR window when changing the default sequence Assigning the Default sequence 1 9 Layout and Delete Controls items 9 and 10 If the AUTO SCROLL key is pressed the Sheet will be automatically moved upwards downwards when working Clear Cue Only with larger Sequences Fadetime Using the
383. se the SOFTNESS value the Effect will be faded in and out more softly SOFTNESS 127 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 grand MA can be used for PWM RANDOM and CHASE Effects Using the right FADE TIM E Encoder you can now globally set a fade in and fade out time for this Effect Group When switching the Effect Group on or off this Fade Time will be faded in or out with the set duration Pressing the EDIT key will call up the Edit menu for this effect 6 2 Editing Effects Pressing the LIST key will open the VIEW ALL RUNNING EFFECTS window where you have an overview on all currently active Effect Groups 6 6 View ALL RUNNING EFFECTS menu 6 4 Customizing an Effect Group The global settings like e g Bounce BPM Intensity Speed etc are automatically stored in the Effect Group You can customize the individual sequences of the Effect Groups by using the respective keys Speed Scale The current ratio of the SPEED setting will be displayed on the key Pressing this key will open the SPEED SCALE menu Pressing a Key will re adjust the Speed setting With MUL BY 2 or MULBY 4 the SPEED setting will by multiplied by 2 or 4 with DIV BY 2 4 or 8 the SPEED setting will be divided by 2 4 or 8 Pressing the 1 1 key will recall the default setting again Speed Group The key will display the currently assigned SPEED group Pressing this key will open the SPEED GROUP menu By pressing a
384. sed for Chasers 4 5 Updatings Cues When executing sequences Cues can be modified and stored directly Playback the Cue to be modified M odify the Cue by either direct access or via presets UPDATE key LED is on 3 4 Direct Access to Fixtures in the FIXTURE SHEET 3 5 Direct Access to Dimmer Channels and 3 7 Creating and calling up Presets Press the Update key once The UPDATE window will open By pressing this key you can toggle between only original contents and add new contents Only original contents Upon updating the cue only the changes on fixtures channels which have already been used in this cue will be stored Add new contents Upon updating the cue all changes will be stored regardless at to whether those fixtures channels have already been used in this cue By pressing this key you can toggle between only last called Executor and all possible Executors Only last called Executor The Cue Destinations chart only shows the last played back cue All possible Executors The Cue Destinations chart shows all currently playing back cues on all executors Tracking or Cue Only Update A tracking update may affect cues in the future while a cue only update does not affect them Pressing the Update Cue key will update that cue being displayed with a red background You can select another cue using the encoder Pressing the Update All Cues
385. selected and the display switches to Yes When creating groups groups will be created only for these Scanners or Dimmers By pressing the CREATE GROUPS button one ODD button will be created for each Scanner type with which you can select all odd numbered Scanners simultaneously One EVEN button to select all even numbered Scanners and an ALL button to select all of the two By pressing the CREATE SINGLE GROUPS button you can create a single button for each Scanner type in the GROUP window 2 11 3 Clone Fixture Copying Fixture data globally cloning Press Clone button green background to open the Clone Fixture Data menu You can clone copy all data of one or more fixtures globally In this all Preset Group Cue and Effect data are cloned from the first fixture s From Fixtures to the target fixture s To Fixtures If you select the same number of fixtures on each side the data of the first will be transferred to the first of the second to the second etc Select the fixture s that you want to clone Fixture Sheet If you want to clone several fixtures you have to observe the sequence in which you select them Pressing the left Take Selection button will display the fixtures in the left table From Fixtures MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Select Fixture Layer Name Select New Device Layer newnewdimmer tes
386. sequence unlock_seq_ number of the sequence cue number or area of the Cue or Insert the functions LOCK UNLOCK as Quikeys Press LOCK or UNLOCK and choose the sequence in the sequence pool MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 4 3 Editing Sequences EDIT During editing procedures you can change all values of cues add values or delete them The X FADE and DELAY times can be altered and the trigger of cues via GO key X FADER SOUND or TIME can be defined Apart from what is indicated in this chapter there are three other ways of editing 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 Overwriting expanding removing Cues 4 3 4 Update Cues or Presets 5 3 EXECUTOR window O Press the EDIT key LED is on The sequence may not be saved see 4 2 6 Select the sequence with the respective EXECUTOR button Or Left click with the mouse into the small window above the EXECUTOR Fader or use the touchscreen 49 The EDIT menu appears on the right TFT display showing a listing of the individual cues contained in the selected sequence You will find the addressed EXECUTOR fader or button in the headline giving the number of the PAGE and the sequence name The second line will give you the functions of the columns No Number of Cue NAME Name of Cue MIB Activate MIB Move In Black function individually for each cue Activate it by selecting a cell and shortly pressing
387. ser amp Profiles Select the desired RIGHTS field with the encoder Pressing the encoder opens the selection menu of the available rights DESIGNER Ths user cannot execute any changes solely the views can be switched over Since no playback functions can be executed either Fader Go button etc are disabled the show must be started first by a user with higher rights If the user logs in with DESIGNER privilege he or she takes over the desk with these settings PLAYBACK The user can use all playback functions and load shows He or she can change playback parameters but has no access to ther functions that change the show Even if playback settings were changed these are not permanently saved EDIT PRESETS The user can create additional presets otherwise no other programming tasks are possible EDIT GENERAL The user has access to all functions with the exception of User Management and software update functions and Worlds EDIT WORLDS The user can create and change Worlds EDIT SETUPS The user has in addition the right to execute changes in the SETUP mode e g in the library ADMINISTRATOR Along with all other functions User M anagement and Update of Desk Software are enabled Some grandM A operators may find it helpful to create an user with playback rights only for their own personal use After they have finished programming they log in as this playback user so they can be sure that the
388. show DELETE DONE next to STATUS You can start the console by pressing the ESC key twice Press 5 Update firmware with display If you press 5 on the keyboard you can renew the Firmware for the second built in Computer Motorola In order to update the software insert the current update disk labeled LAST DISK You have to confirm the update process by pressing o VERY IMPORTANT this is the letter o not the number 0 As soon as the update is completed the display will show UPDATE DONE next to STATUS You can start the console by pressing the ESC key twice Press 6 Update grandMA In order to update the software insert the current update disk labeled LAST DISK You have to confirm the update process by pressing o Shortly after you will be asked for DISK 1 Now insert this disk and confirm by pressing o VERY IMPORTANT this is the letter o not the number 0 The disk will be read might take a little while Following that you will be asked for DISK 2 Insert disk 2 and confirm again with o VERY IMPORTANT this is the letter o not the number 0 this will take a little longer now As soon as the update process is completed the display shows UPDATE DONE PLEASE REBOOT next to STATUS Now please reboot the console by using the combination CTRL ALT DEL or the RESET key on the rear of the console IMPORTANT Avoid downdating the console to version 4 3 6X a
389. ssigning Special Masters Press the ASSIGN key once LED is on Press an EXECUTOR FADER button to which a Special Master is to be assigned to Press FUNCTION f the SPECIAL MASTER key is pressed all CHASER SPEED M asters will be displayed Select which SPEED is to be assigned The following window will appear above the assigned Executor fader The name of the Speed Group The speed With the top button you can enter a speed directly By pressing the button at least twice you can set the speed With the button below the fader you can double the speed With the bottom button you can halve the speed The speed of the Speed Group can be adjusted by using the Fader If SOUND BPM is selected you can adjust the given BPM value in the Sound menu using the fader 2 14 Sound Signal Settings The Sound M enu will open by touching the lower part of this window not the headline or If SOUND HOLD is selected you can adjust the given HOLD value in the Sound menu using the fader 2 14 Sound Signal Settings The Sound M enu will open by touching the lower part of this window not the headline The name of the fader function The speed With the top button you can enter a speed directly By pressing the button at least twice you can set the speed With the button below the fader you can double the speed With the bottom button you can halve the speed You can adjust the BPM HOLD value with the fader GRANDMASTER this
390. ssion remains the M aster If the Masters fails the Slave 2nd unit will automatically become the M aster When there are more than 2 consoles coincidence will decide so you should assign priorities If there are more the 2 unit e g 1st unit grandM A priority Normal 2nd unit grandMA light priority Nor mal 3rd unit grandMA RPU priority Low When the Master fails the 2nd unit grandMA light will automatically become the M aster die RPU will remain Slave In the left table click on Session The right table will now show all units of the Session Under Status the current priority will be displayed In this case for the Light only Slave will be displayed the same priority as for the Master For the RPU Slave will be 193 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 MA Network Connections Sessions Stations in Session grandMA No Name IP i Name Status IP Vers D Unconnected 1 gtandMA Master 192 168 0 111 3 940 1 I 192 168 0111 3 940 2 light Slave 192 168 0 145 3 940 3 RPU Slave 192 168 0 1 01 3 940 Rtandainnr x lt MSintinns in potent Session LID Session Name Showfile Statue Vers Type i fullsize tendal 192 168 0 114 5 534 GHA My Station My Scssion IP Address FRESE Name Hams Prioritiy Parsword Invitation Style Mee Station My Session Choose an Action Join Take Over Other Session s Other
391. store and load default Views Setup and Default settings Encoder and Trackball sensitivity and Wheel function 2 12 Settings in the Setup menu Furthermore Cue Timing Executor Defaults Sheet Sorting Sheet Fontsize Sheet Readout M isc Preset Colours Attribute Grouping and Store Options 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu Each show contains a full set of local user profiles These local user profiles can be stored as default in the global parts and they can be loaded from there When saving a show on floppy disk all users registered to this console will also be saved with all default settings When loading a show from floppy disk to another console all users including all default settings will automatically be transferred to the new console Individual users can use these profiles for a particular show or for other shows in which this console is used 2 16 3 Creating a new User To create a new user you need to have administrator privilege level Goto Tools menu and User Setup Press the New in User List and type name and password Select and confirm Rigths and Profile by turning and pressing the encoder Change the rights privilege level for the new user By default the new user utilizes the DEFAULT user profile If the user utilizes a different or an independent user profile it will change his user profile If you create a new user profile in this way it is initialised with the default profile Beside the users which a
392. t Fixture Fixture Sheet Stage window Group Group pool World pool Sequence Sequence pool Executor Executor Sheet Tracking Sheet Page Channel Pages Fader Pages Button Pages Macro Macro pool Preset all preset windows will be opened one after the other View View pool Effect Effect pool Bitmap Effect Pool Timecode pool By pressing the ESC key you can close the temporary windows at any time 55 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 3 2 Storing VIEWS MACRO 9 VIEW The soft VIEW keys running down the righthand side of the touchscreens and external displays can be assigned with views ED The physical keys located beside the touch screens can be used for direct access to the VIEW soft keys on the screens What can a soft key be used for You can store one or more displays on it You can store all currently created windows on all screens and both external monitors on it or You can store a Macro 9 1 Creating Macros Organize a display or monitor 3 1 CREATING A WINDOW Press the STORE key once STORE LED is on STORE Pressa VIEW key ora VIEW soft key once The SELECT VIEW window will open Enter a name for the VIEW using the keyboard The new name will be displayed in the top line By pressing the keys 1 5 selected key will turn dark grey you can select the display to be stored Pressing the key ALL SCREENS will store ALL displays on one view key With the OK or ENTER key you can complete
393. t an Effect Group in the Effect Pool by selecting it Press the STORE button once Press the EXECUTOR button to which the call is to be saved The Effect Group call will be saved in the Cue with all settings mentioned above If this Cue is called up the Effect Group will be started When calling up Effect Groups its size speed and softness can be faded in or out If in the Effect Group a FADE TIME is set the intensity and speed or softness of the Effect Group will automatically be faded in or out when this Group is started In the Executor Sheet or in Edit Sequence press the EFFECT button will be displayed dark grey The window will be divided into two halves The upper part will display the Cue the lower part the calls of the individual Effect Groups for the selected Cue including the respective parameters Select a Cue in which calls or parameters of Effect Groups are to be modified selected Cue will be displayed with a blue frame and a magenta background The lower chart displays all calls of Effect Groups from this Cue Select an individual call to be modified will be displayed with a blue frame In the right display the setting will be adopted and displayed above the Encoders and can be customized at will If intensity speed or softness are to be faded in or out with the set Fade Time when the Effect Group is called up make one right mouse click into the cells behind the value in column F Fade The column will show a
394. t destination gt At give value Channel Progressively clear programmer Deactivate programmer Total clear of programmer Clear selection Copy lt source gt at lt destination gt Cue Go forward for default executor Go back for default executor Pause for default executor Enter delay mode or give delay time Delete lt destination gt DM X address Remote DM X button Edit lt destination gt Effect Escape close dialogs Even selection with ALL ODD Executor Enter fade mode or give fade time Fader access executor faders Middle button of executor section Lower button of executor section Upper button of executor section Single feature like PAN Fixing executors Fixture Downflash executor End of Downflash Upflash executor 157 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 FLASH_UP_OFF FLASH_UP_O CONSOLE End of Upflash FORM FO CONSOLE Form used by effects FULL FU FULL Full equals 100 GO GO GO Go forward GO GO GO Go backwards GOTO GOT GOTO Goto lt cue gt GROUP G GROUP Group IF IF 2x IF If logical AND for selections IFOUTPUT IFO IF If Output create selection from output INFO INF Exe key Info Window INSERT l 2 x MOVE Insert lt source gt at lt destination gt INVERT INV QUIKEY Invert lt destination gt inverting selection LABEL LA 2 x ASSIGN Label lt destination gt Name give a name LEARN L LEARN Learn change speed of running programs LOAD LO
395. t is generated PAUSE PAUSE Show is stopped output is generated for current time PLAY GO Show is running RECORD STORE Show is recording JUMP BACK lt lt lt Show jumps to the next breakpoint before current time JUMP FORWARD gt gt gt Show jumps to the next breakpoint after the current time If a show is generating output the corresponding key in the timecode pool will show the current time In case of recording this key is also blinking red with the note REC External Internal Sync PLAY and RECORD on the sync setting in the options menu for their behaviour If sync is set to internal time runs continuously based on the internal time base If sync is set to SM PTE the current time of the timecode show depends on the SMPTE input signal If MIDI is set MTC Midi Timecode will be used In the headline of the timecode pool you will find a SM PTE input indicator Regardless of the shows using SM PTE it will always display the current SM PTE input signal together with the SM PTE frame format If a show is using SM PTE external synchronisation the local time within the show can differ from the external SM PTE Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 time By using the timecode offset in the options menu you can set up a time offset which is subtracted from the external SM PTE time Shows which are using internal sync can have a user definable repeat These settings are also found in
396. t mouse key will open the ASSIGN menu 5 1 ASSIGN menu The current section from the Cue Sheet will also be displayed Sequence The Outfade time of the last Cue will be displayed by a blue bar in the upper cell The Infade time of the cue will be displayed in the second cell The next Cue will be displayed in the next cell below Chaser The speed will be displayed in the upper cell The Fade time in percentage will be displayed in the second cell and also as a green bar Whilst the Chaser is not activated you will find the type of activation in the bottom line During execution the number of Cues that have completed will be displayed on the left while on the right side you will see the total number of all Cues which is also being displayed graphically by a bar The individual Fader and Button functions are displayed here On the left side the function of the fader is displayed The yellow status indicator will give you the current fa der level The function for the button above the fader is displayed at the top The function of the button below the Fader is displayed in the middle cell The function of the lower button below the Fader is displayed in the lower cell 5 3 EXECUTOR Sheet In the EXECUTOR sheet you can see the sequence assigned to a FADER or BUTTON while allowing you to perform modications to cues and cue data 3 1 Creating a window Touch the left corner of the title bar you can open the EXECUTOR SHEET OPTIONS w
397. tart Options Loops P Name Restart with Track first cue From Last Normal i Size of Executor i l Priority Options B 3 ss ll ae L oma Effects Default Button and Fader Assignment Default Options Master Edit Load from Save as Apply to Load from Save as N bi default default all Exec default defaut One PRIVATE EFFECTS Eingebundener Effekt Andere laufende Sequenz ere GLOBAL EFFECTS Eingebundener Effekt Andere laufende Sequ inz rw 110 overwrite all other dimmer channels of those Cues that were also called up in LTP mode HTP Executors remain unchanged Kill Protect If Kill Protect is activated the button has a dark background the sequence is not switched off by the Kill command of another sequence Move in Black Options MIB Always key pressed Cues in which fixture intensity changes from zero and also change other parameters _ for example a different position color or gobo etc will have these values preset so that live changes will not be seen on stage You can also set a FADE or DELAY time for these channels 2 13 Settings in the Defaults M enu Playback Timing MIB Never key pressed Cues which have separatly activated cues MIB fuctions are completely switched off 4 3 Edit Sequences Auto PrePos key pressed The automatic prepositioning system will perform a move in black upon executor start Therefore all non dimmer channels come up wit
398. tdevice USITT ASCII Show Import Auto Create Groups X Select Fixture Types No Qty Name Select Wis HAC 500 M4 V 139 2 15 DM8 3m2 STAGE LIGHT 300 Create Groups All Odd Even only Create single Groups only Insert Disk with SHOW ALQ What happens 1 Your current Show will be saved 2 A NEW Show will be created 3 Your Default User Settings will be loaded Please Change the Show Name AsciiShow before You Save the NEW Show Import Show File USITT ASCII Format Export Show File USITT ASCII Format Presets Groups Clone b Effects amp MAtrickg USITT ASCII Show Filg EX a Presets gt Groups PS Clone gt Effects amp USITT ASCH Show File Select the fixture s to which you want to clone the data Fixture Sheet If you want to clone several fixtures you have to observe the sequence in which you select them Pressing the left Take Selection button will display the fixtures in the right table To Fixtures By pressing the gt gt gt Clone lt lt lt button you can clone all data Attention All target fixture data created sofar will be overwritten deleted 2 11 4 Auto Create Effects Press Auto Create Effects button green background to open the Auto Create Effects menu By pressing the Create Built in Dafault Effects menu you can create preset effects that will then be availab
399. te its normal function and the SOLO function can only be activated using the Quikey 3 7 Creating and calling up Presets There are certain values for the functions of fixtures which will be needed again and again for example the values for individual colours of the color wheel These values can be programmed as presets in the respective PRESET window and then be reselected If you have presets for the fixtures be created automatically CREATE PRESETS these pre recorded presets will be available in the respective windows 2 11 Creating Presets automatically Create a window for all presets you want to use select them from preset pools Inthe GROUP window select those fixtures for which you want to create a Preset by a touch or mouse click fixtures have to be displayed in yellow in the FIXTURE window Select the Preset group for which you want to create a Preset on the display using the Touchscreen or by a left mouse click on the title bar For example In the Preset window PAN TILT Values and positions can be changed by Encoders all functions and the assignment will be displayed on the right display above the encoders Trackball only PAN TILT if activated Level Wheel only for dimmer values Middle mouse key left click on a value in the FIXTURE or CHANNEL window drag the mouse while holding the middle mouse key will change the value Switch on the Trackball by pressing the TRACKBALL ON button the in
400. ted Press OFF key 1x LED is on Click on the Fixture key in the Group Window or on the Fixture Name in the Fixture Sheet You can also deactivate parameter values of individual fixtures Output will be set to Default or to an outputing cue value Press OFF key 1x LED is on e dala tA Click on the activated value in the Fixture Sheet seewsereeme You can also delete activated values of entire function groups of selected fixtures Output will be set to Default Pan Tilt of activated cue value SL300 1 tS ct Press OFF key 1x LED is on eT Z iia 141 o a key for the respective function on the Preset Control Bar or click on that function within the Fixture Special feature in Multi User mode SL300 1 SL300 2 SL306 W if multiple users having different user profiles on different consoles or PDAs are connected wihin one session go aae a w the program will assign the changing of values to the very user who had actually made that specific change That EEEE means commands like CLEAR or STORE will only refer to the changes of the respective user without affecting the 3L200 AEE programming work of another user H sorted by Pan Tilt Changes will be indicated by different colors in the Fixture Channel and Fader sheet Fan F A zi red background these values were set by the user of this console only these values will be stored OOPSed __ sSL3082_ Tas 144 SL300 3 143 etc
401. ted Console r Update Change Show Same f Console Name and IP Version ask Processor 1 50 Version Info Update Software from Floppy Floppy Update Libraries from Floppy hal 12 Update Software You can only download the update from our HOM EPAGE www malighting de using an IBM compatible PC After the download execute the file It is a self extracting archive You will be asked to insert some empty floppy disks into drive A press OK and your update disks will be created Do not update the grandMA right before running a show Updating the software is a serious thing MA Lighting can not always guarantee that your old show will play back correctly after an update Update by floppy disk press SETUP UPDATE SOFTWARE If is should not be possible to enter this menu e g because a previous update had not been completed properly you can open it using the F4 key on the keyboard press Update Software from Floppy when asked to insert the floppy and confirm with OK 183 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 ATTENTION PLEASE Deactivate Anti Virus or Firewalls Those can affect proper operation 184 Before changing disks make sure that the green LED on the floppy drive is off The update can last up to 10 minutes After updating it is possible to do a reset By pressing the soft key VERSION INFO you can read about new functionality and fixed bug
402. ted if you enter a new time Recording is NOT stopped when you close the timecode editor So be aware of what is being recorded otherwise you will discover a huge timecode show at some later point After recording particularly if you have recorded fader movements it is a good idea to use the DO FADER DATA REDUCTION in the options menu This keeps your show slim and easier to edit The fader data reduction process guarantees that the compressed signal will not differ more than 1 frame in time and 1 in value from the original Usually recorded fader events will be reduced to 20 or less of the original amount The Length of the Show During recording the length of the show is automatically extended if needed This also happens if you manually add events after the current length see manual editing The length of a show becomes very important if you plan to use internal sync and repeat In combination with the when reaching the end setting to be found in options menu it is worth taking into consideration how long your show should be The length of the timecode show can be changed in the options menu 8 1 5 Manual Editing of a Timecode Show Editing is only enabled if the timecode show is NOT write protected options menu Track Management A timecode show consists of TRACKS A TRACK has a Specific function At the moment only EXECUTOR TRACKS are implemented but in the future it is conceivable to have tracks implimented for su
403. tegrated LED must be on Now you can control the selected fixtures via the trackball PAN TILT Changed active values will be displayed in the OUT PUT window by a red background colour There are two types of Presets Selective Can only be used for those Scanners for which it was saved Will be indicated by a red triangle in the left upper corner of the saved Preset button Universal Can be used for all Scanners of the same type even if not all will be saved Additionally you can store presets including several functions on one key These presets can be created in any preset group Preset Filter ON only the functions Attributes of this Preset group will be stored into this preset with Preset Filter OFF all currently active functions will be stored into this Preset Foreign values that are stored in a preset are indicated through a white point on the bottom edge of the preset button Each white point corresponds to a certain foreign value according to the relevant position The points correspond from left to right to the following parameters PAN TILT DIMMER GOBO COLOR BEAM FOCUS CONTROL SHAPERS VIDEO analog to the numerals in the preset windows PN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Icons small grand MA Icons big Icons off MOVE SET MANUAL FADE Example this PAN TILT preset onl
404. ter and press the Encoder Now select No and press the Encoder one more time If GRANDM ASTER FADER is switched off this will be indicated by a No in the respective cell Func Pan Func Tilt Select one or more cells under Func Pan or Func Tilt and press the Encoder Now select Invert and press the Encoder one more time If a function is inverted this will be indicated by a Invert in in the respective cell DMX Pan DMX Tilt Here you can invert the DMX signals for Pan and Tilt functions the signals are only inverted in the DM X Out put not for the visualizer this means that movements in the visualizer and on stange will differ Select one or more cells under DM X Pan or DM X Tilt and press the Encoder Now select Invert and press the Encoder one more time If a function is inverted this will be indicated by a Invert in in the respective cel Changing from PAN to TILT and vice versa Select one or more cells under Swap and press the Encoder Now select Yes and press the Encoder one more time If PAN and TILT are changed this will be indicated by a Yes in in the respective cell This is where the useful PAN TILT trackball orientation can be set LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de Change Color Standard Name Red Orange Yello
405. ters in the Fixture Sheet Parked fixtures functions or parameters can be released again either individually or together Press GO key 1x LED is on Click on fixture or fixture key in the Group window or click on fixture in the Fixture Sheet or Click on the functions within the Preset Control Bar or directly on the parameters in the Fixture Sheet MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH ot e 3 4 3 FADE and DELAY times in the FIXTURE window Wis ee Name Pa Den tet Gobo ime i Color tf Face Additionally to the standard Basic FADE and DELAY times individual durations can also be set for the indivi p Dim G1 G1 Rot C1 Frost dual parameters in the FIXTURE window You will need these settings when creating Cues in order to be able to work with different FADE or DELAY times for individual parameters Press the Values Fades Delays key as displayed above in the Fades picture Dimmer Gobo J Color a oder a ee R io Glee R TIME When you press the TIME key once the fixture sheet will switch to FADE time mode The second time the fixture sheet will switch to DELAY time mode Pan Tilt If in the windows options Automatic has not been selected the display will not switch over The currently selected FADE or DELAY function will be displayed only for the Encoder
406. the options menu Pre Roll amp After Roll Dropout Elimination Due to the fact that SMPTE is an analogue signal fluctuations can occur Very often there are temporary errors in the recorded SM PTE signal which are called dropouts Assuch misleading small errors should of course not affect the board it filters out these errors automatically Therefore the desk is filtering out these errors This filter is controlled by two values PRE ROLL and AFTER ROLL PRE ROLL defines the time that a signal must be error free before it is accepted by the console A small pre roll means that your console reacts faster to incoming SM PTE signals AFTER ROLL defines the time that a signal must be continuously in error or missing before it is assumed to be off During the after roll time the console continues the show using its internal time base A small after roll means that your console stops faster after the SM PTE signal has stopped but that it is also reacting faster to errors in the SM PTE signal The settings for pre roll and after roll can be found in the context menu of the timecode pool This can be accessed by right clicking on the headline of the Timecode pool The names for pre roll and after roll have a historical significance At the beginning of the timecode era the huge tapes in the machines which contained timecode and audio signals where really visibly rolling Manually Changing the Current Time If the show is playing back or recordin
407. the Content Window or Press the yellow dot inthe CONTENTSHEET on the left side of the title bar The OPTION Menu opens Display Layer identical with OPTIONS in Fixture Fader Channel Sheet Sorting amp Readout identical with OPTIONS in Fixture Fader Channel Sheet Setting identical with OPTIONS in Fixture Fader Channel Sheet Attribute Mask only in COM PACT CONTENT SHEET All attributes in the EXCLUDED column will be not shown in the CONTENT SHEET when the button M ASK is activated T Attribute Mask Attribute Sort l Display Type No Page Name Layer areg E CECE ae Fader 14 1 Seq 2 ome Fader 16 1 Seq1 Se a 122 A Click on the attribute moves it to the other column Excluded to Included and vice versa For example Click on PAN in EXCLUDED moves the attribut in the INCLUDED column the attribut will be shown in CONTENT SHEET when MASK is activated Attribute Sort only in COM PACT CONTENT SHEET Sort the vertical order of the attrubutes Select the attribut e has dark blue background and move with UP or DOWN Select Sequence A view with all stored sequences is shown Select the required sequence by turning the encoder and press the encoder to open the sequence or Select the required sequence by touching the sequence on the display In the CONTENT SHEET now the required sequence appears LIGH PN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D
408. the fixtures list you will now find the copies below the fixture In the TYPE column you will find Multipatch Dim 2 Dim 2 _1fA 2 Dummies for the copies And you can position the fixtures to use them in the Stage window or on the grandMA Type ID Ch ID Fix Patch Dim 1 Dim 2 Fixtures and Channels in Layer i _ Dim _ WfA 1 _Multip SNE 1 4 101 Dim 2 1fA 2 3D Note After a M ultipatch you ll find no DM X addresses for the dummies as these will automatically be given the same DM X address name and ID as the original fixture It is not possible to enter the same address for different fixtures in the Layer Sheet In the fixtures Settings menu the same addresses have also to be entered see manual of the fixture manufacturer 23 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Fixture Layer lt lt gt gt gt Name Qty ID Cha ID Fix front01 10 1 01 back01 10 dimmer01 blinder dimmerneu New Name SL300 2 SL300 3 SL300 Create Multipatch SL300 4 SL300 at L300 5 SL300 SL300 6 SL300 SL300 7 SL300 Patch L300 8 L300 Sheets p SL300 9 SL300 PE SL300 10 SL300 Attribute New Setup p nter Channel ID Input Range 1 00 to 9999 00 Fixtures and Channels in Layer KKK Type ID Ch ID Fix Patch Mast Func Pan Func Till Swap DMX Pan DMX Tilt SL 11 A101 No 300 1 Invert L300 12 ATI Invert Invert 5L300 13 A1
409. the function of the Grandmaster Faders is not active for this fixture 2 2 5 Switching the Master GRANDM ASTER FADER off one page earlier Pan Tilt Swap If a cell contains a Yes here the function will be inverted or completely exchanged 2 2 5 Inverting or changing PAN or TILT 2 4 Adjustments in the ATTRIBUTE SETUP menu In the Attribute Setup menu you can change the names of Preset and Features Groups Furthermore you can create or adapt new Features Groups Furthermore you can define which attributes will be activated together or individually But first a short explanation about the differences between Presets Features and Attributes Attribute Attributes are individual functions of Fixtures like Gobol Focus Iris Pan Tilt Feature Features are groups in which several Attributes are combined In the Fixture Sheet the first line will display all Features available Below the individual Features the respective Attributes are displayed Presets In a preset the value of one or more Attributes can be stored Presets are divided in different Preset Groups Gobo Colour Features are allocated to the individual Preset Groups By pressing a FEATURE key with the function in this case Dimmer you can select the different Feature Groups for the Preset Group selected to change the individual Attributes using the Encoder Here the individual Attributes are displayed that can be changed with the respective Encoder 2 4 1
410. the mouse into the small window above the EXECUTOR Fader The EDIT menu appears on the right TFT display giving a listing of the individual cues The selected EXECUTOR fader or button is now listed in the headline giving the page number and the name of the sequence In the second line the column functions are indicated No The number of the individual Cues NAME Name of the Cue MIB Activate MIB Move In Black function individually for each cue Activate it by selecting a cell and shortly pressing on the encoder on the right side of the display Activation is confirmed by YES MIB can only be used in cells where a is displayed TRIGGER Has no effect on a Chaser If the TIMES key on the title bar is pressed FADE Has no effect on Chaser OUTFADE Has no effect on Chaser SNAP Has no effect on Chaser 99 eT ee b gt b OO Ue lhe LL e idi grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 IFADE Has no effect on Chaser DELAY Has no effect on Chaser If the LOOPS key on the title bar is pressed LOOP Will initiate a jump after the cue that includes the loop statement has finished LOOPDELAY The length of time or the number of occurences of a LOOP will be displayed LINK The Command Line Command to be triggered will be displayed LI DEL The delay value for the execution of the command will be displayed If the EFFECTS key on the title bar is pressed EFF
411. this is the letter o not the number 0 After deletion is completed the display will show DELETE DONE next to STATUS You can start the console by pressing the ESC key two times Press 3 Delete old grandMA shows Upon every update a new folder for the shows will automatically be created to cleanup the harddrive on the harddisk During every update the console will save all old shows converted to suite the new system software in the youngest folder From the time of the update all new created shows will be automatically saved in this folder too In order to delete shows from an older system version from the harddisk press 3 on the keyboard You will see a list with all shows in all system versions existing on this harddisk By pressing one of the displayed keys a b c the respective shows will be deleted You have to confirm the delete process by pressing o VERY IMPORTANT this is the letter o not the number 0 After deletion is completed the display will show DELETE DONE next to STATUS You can start the console by pressing the ESC key twice Press 4 Delete current show If you press 4 on the keyboard the current show this show will be automatically loaded upon power up of the console will be deleted You have to confirm the delete process by pressing o VERY IMPORTANT this is the letter o not the number 0 After the deletion is completed the display will
412. though is the mouse or the Trackball if the mouse function is on With the left key Keys can directly be selected Individual cells in charts can be selected Several cells in charts can be selected simultaneously by clicking holding and dragging them Fixtures or Channels can be selected Title bars of windows can be activated or options for the individual window can directly be called up With the middle key The values of selected Fixtures or Channels can be adjusted With the right key The options for this window can be opened by clicking on the title bar The options can be opened by clicking on an individual Fixture or Channel OOPS Function By pressing the OOPS key you can undo step back the last 20 operations Holding the OOPS key opens a window showing the 10 last entries on the right TFT display Pressing the UNDO key will cancel the first entry on top of the list 2 12 OOPS Function Options Note Please switch off the Oops function in loud environments as otherwise the built in harddisk may not function properly Entry window Calculator Open by pressing on one of the 4 Encoders below the display or clicking on the Buttons above the Encoders Or Click into a cell indicated by the Focus colored frame and or blue background and press on the Encoder on the right side of the display In this window you can enter values or times and recalculate them Presets can be called up for the selecte
413. time settings for a cue 1 BASIC X FADE and SNAP DELAY With STORE a basic fade time can be set for all typical fader channels whereas SNAP DELAY will only work for channels marked as snap channels in the Patch menu 2 TIME key for individual durations per channel Exec 1 11 Seq 1 Seq 1 Playback Options Auto Swop Fix Protect jo Protect Button and Fader Assignment Function Normal trigger A B Xfade Move in Black Options MB MIB Auto always never PrePos Restart Opti L PEN R a oe With TIME the status windows can be switched to the FADE or DELAY layer where individual fade and delay times lt first cue i From Last Normal can be set for each channel These durations will be stored in the cues and will overrule any basic duration 22a Priority Options 1 10 7 CREATE LIST F 2 J iG 5 Private When storing a cue to an Executor already containing a cue the grandM A offers the option to create a second cue Noma fEiects li hich h and start a cue list which may be replayed as a Chaser or sequence later on Derou ukon anei Eae nent iki a _Master Edit d In the ASSIGN menu you can preset the Cue list as tracking or non tracking respectively ee Eyt Eoee hrom Save as None TRACKING CUELIST typically for moving light control or theatre applications When working with a tra
414. to decimal or hexadecimal display For further names and values repeat these two steps using the next lines respectively Examples Here are some examples for standard functions e g Dimmer variable functions e g Strobe Pan Rotation and functions with fix values Gobo Colors You can sign on different fixtures for a trial of course or havea look at the given names and settings and use them for your own fixtures Standard function Closed will be displayed if the set value is O Open if on 255 Between 1 and 254 only the value will be displayed Variable function Discrete Values The set value will be displayed Furthermore a value indication will bedisplayed together with Degrees as unit In this case 270 to 270 would be displayed For Strobe Hz and for Gobo_Rotate RPM would appear here Fixed values Open will be displayed if the set value is O Red between 8 and 24 and additionally a color will be displayed on the side This color can be set in the Extra column Sames applies for the other colors Between the given values e g here 1 7 the color would be displaced by Open and the color be inserted for Red Only after reaching the value 8 would the color be displayed completely for Red 2 8 Creating Assigning and Deleting Profiles see also TOOLS Menu In the PROFILE TOOL menu you can create individual profiles The profiles creat
415. to Patch None or _ Create Full Access Add Line 2 2 Men Full Access oder Live Access press Fixture Layer Here you can create Scanner and Dimmer groups These groups can be modified later without any problems e g increase number change the lamp type etc Additionally you have an overview over the number of all signed on lamps and their ID numbers for Channel and Fixture e 2 2 1 Creating groups with Scanners Dimmers Fixture Layer Press the Add Line key Fixture Layer must be active i e header dark blue A window will open where you can enter a name for the group and must confirm this action Now the Create New Fixtures or Channels window will open When opened for the first time only From Library will be displayed here and is already selected indicated by its blue background When selecting From Library the library window will open By turning the Encoder you can only choose a lamp type blue bar Pressing the Encoder will accept the chosen lamp type and close the window To load a lamp type from floppy press the Floppy button Now the Scanners present on the floppy will be displayed and can be selected and loaded For conveniently localizing scanners fixtures the list can be sorted by name manufacturer or date Example Sort alphabetically Make a right mouse click on NAME Clicking once will sort the list A Z on the second click Z A or
416. tom WRAP AROUND If On has been selected the size of the Channels will be adjusted automatically when the number of Channels Fixture Sheet Options Included Excluded Display laver changes ee os mmm NAME FIELD Tilt G1 Rot Sorting amp ON The Fixture names will be displayed Dim c1 ut OFF The Fixture names will not be displayed Frost d COLUMNS Focus Settings Here you can enter the number of columns on display 1 60 Atti NOTE If you choose too many columns it will not be possible to display the values in the cells completely Mask ATTRIBUTE MASK With the MASK function you can choose parameters to be displayed in the CompFixture Sheet One touch on the parameter in the INCLUDE column will transfer this parameter to the EXCLUDED column and it will not be displayed in the Sheet any longer Vice versa you can beam a parameter from the EXCLUDED column to the INCLUDED Fixture Sheet Options column me aa oy ATTRIBUTE SORT THe Up oo With the SORT function you can change the position of the parameters on select Parameter blue line Focus Bown pating change position with UP or DOWN Attribute Es __ 3 4 1 The ALIGN Function The ALIGN function allows you to apply ratios to ranges of parameters Four different modes are available ALIGN key pressed once LED is on The values will be distributed between the first and last selected fixture i e not the ID numbers but the selection
417. tons of a selected page 108 Al MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGHTING Exec 1 11 Seq 1 Seq 1 Button and Fader Assignment l Bop Protect Kill Protect Loops Normal Size of Executor 2 3 4 5 Default Button and Fader Assignment Master Load from Save as Apply to default default all Exec None X Function Name Edit identical number of Fader and Button assignments 5 1 4 Playback Options The Settings key must be pressed dark background If you press the Auto start key background dark gray the Sequence or Chaser will be automatically started when pushing the Master Fader upwards item 6 If the Auto stop key is pressed dark gray background the sequence or Chaser will automatically be switched off when pushing the master fader downwards to the lower stop If Auto start is active dark background and Auto Stop is not active the fader gets the function Auto On this means that when the fader is moved up wards from 0 position simultanously the function On is activated and the sequence is reactivated If the Auto Fix key is pressed dark background and the Sequence or Chaser is started this Executor will be locked to that position w
418. tools for the control of intelligent fixtures and many are now the standard of the industry Of course there have been quite a few improvements as controlling hundreds of channels requires intelligent solutions to time consuming operations but essentially the grandMA is still an MA console easy to operate yet very powerful 1 1 1Displays The first remarkable feature of the grandMA are the contrast rich full color TFT touch screens integrated into a panel with adjustable viewing angle Optionally supported are two external monitors They allow for clear and precise contro along with multiple visual represenations of group and preset operations interactive output displays and different ways of cue listing Colors and gobos can directly be selected by labeled preset keys and allow for a fast and accurate control while the encoders can be used anytime for fine tuning By way of presets stored positions can quickly be adjusted to changed arrangements 1 1 2 Motorfaders How can a console like the grandMA with just 20 faders 10 on the grandMA light and M icro possibly claim to control 4000 and more channels It s not a trick it s motorised faders They automatically capture the actual values as soon as you switch over from one program library to another Further special features are explained in the respective chapters following 1 1 3 Programming features and data input At first the flexibility of the grandMA may surprise but y
419. tor CUE X SEQU Y Cue X of sequence Y SEQU Y CUE X Same as above CUE EXECZ Current active cue of running executor Z In case of STORE New cue at the end in executor Z CUE X EXEC Z Cue X of executor Z X Cue number in format A B with intervals 0 3999 0 999 B is optional CUE 0 is invalid but CUE 0 5 is valid Y Sequence number in interval 1 999 Z Executor number in format PAGE INDEX with intervals 1 64 1 60 or in format INDEX with interval 1 60 using current page Either X or Y Z can be range lists Range lists with X and Y Z are not allowed Therefore CUE 1 THRU 10 SEQU 1 is valid CUE 1 TRUE 10 SEQU 1 THRU 5 is invalid As starting keyword CUE ENTER CUE becomes the DEFAULT KEYWORD CUE range list ENTER Select devices included in cue s CUE range list AT see AT Apply values to devices included in cue s As target for the following operational commands AT Extract data from cue COPY Copy one cue to another DELETE Delete a cue EDIT Edit a cue IF Select devices which are Part of the cue IFOUTPUT Search for stage output of cue INVERT Invert selection of cue LABEL Change name of cue MOVE Move cue to another position 165 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 PREVIEW Preview cue as target for the following executing commands ON activates content of cue in programmer OFF deactivate content of cue in programmer PAUSE PAR
420. tored on an EXECUTOR button or EXECUTOR Fader If cues are created using Presets a modication of this Preset will automatically update all cues which use this Preset Thus time consuming checking and correction of individual Cues becomes unnecessary We recommend to use the Preset functions as often as possible EXECUTOR buttons or Faders can have multiple assignments for created sequences EXECUTOR Faders and buttons are organised in PAGES You can work on all PAGES simultaneously Changing pages only effects what you currently have physical access to NOT what is currently playing back When using motor faders those motor faders will move reflect the status of the current PAGE With the EXECUTOR buttons it is possible to call up the Cues Sequences and Chasers 5 1 3 Buttons and Faders For dimmer channels the respective MASTER FADER Group fader and the Grandmaster have to be pushed up EXECUTOR buttons do not have a Master and are therefore are activated immediately When dimmer values are playback via Cues or Sequences assigned to EXECUTOR buttons priority issues may arrise then trying to control these same dimmer values from other EXECUTOR button and faders without first switching off the relevent EXECUTOR buttons In practical terms this means that to work with Dimmers as on a convenetional console HTP 86 dimmer channels have to be assigned to the Executor Faders MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297
421. ts are not exposed to mechanic stress 1 5 3 Transportation Case During transport take care that the touchscreens are not exposed to mechanical stress Flightcases not provided by MA Lighting have to be designed in a way that under no circumstances pressure can be exerted on the TFT displays 1 5 4 Panel grandMA only If the mechanical parts of the display panel have not been moved for a period of time more than 24 hours typically you may feel a stronger resistance when adjusting the angle This is normal and related to the mechanics of the pannel 1 5 5 Battery not on the ultra light and Micro In case of power failure the console offers with fully charged battery an emergency backup of at least 12 minutes In case of a power failure the console will automatically switch off after approximately another 3 minutes or another 12 minutes when ee is pressed If this occurs the console will automatically save all ata When switching off the unit via built in power switch all current show data is saved automatically In case of an automatic shut down after a power failure described above the unit must be running for at least 10 minutes in order to guarantee a proper SAVE procedure the next time the unit is switched off By ignoring this advice the harddisk may be be damaged The battery needs approximately 4 8 hours for a full recharge Only then the battery is able again to bridge another power failure of up to 12 minutes
422. ty Menu 14 grandMA replay unit 14 1 Introduction 14 2 General Instructions 14 3 Specification and Technical Data 15 Network connections 15 2 Preparing a Session 15 3 Creating a Session 15 4 Full Tracking 15 5 Multi User 15 6 Playback 15 7 Worlds Welten 15 8 Remote Network Monitor 16 Full Tracking Backup 16 1 Why using a backup system 16 2 grandM A with show backup 16 3 Setting up a Network System 16 4 Network Backup system 17 Channel expansion with NSP 17 1 NDP Configuration 17 2 2 Port Configuration 18 PDA Remote Control FAQ Service Timetable Special functions Color Code Index NOTE 181 183 185 186 186 188 188 191 192 193 194 194 194 195 196 197 197 197 198 199 202 203 204 205 218 222 223 224 229 All text marked with does not apply to the grandMA MICRO All buttons marked with are located in the grandma MICRO s COMMAND WINDOW only 1 Introduction 1 1 General Information Combining an approved concept of operation an outstanding product design and first class quality with a host of new ideas and the latest technology this new console offer ulitmate control on larger shows The grangMA range combines the best in mechanical design with a flexible and powerful software platform MA users will feel very familiar with grandM A from the very beginning The basic operation modes well known from the Scancommander have been well proven in the field as powerful
423. u can call it up by pressing the KEYBOARD key In the upper left cell the entered text will be displayed Using the touch screen you can select individual keys Pressing RETURN will accept your entry COMMAND WINDOW On the grand MA grandMA light and the ultra light you can open the Command Window using function key F7 On the MICRO you ll find a dedicated COMMAND button This window contains the most important buttons here displayed as Softkeys on the grand MA granMA light and ultra light the buttons can be used as alternative means of entry on the MICRO you can only use the Command Window i LIGHTING MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldb ttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de grandMA the DVD As an addition to this manual a free DVD is available The DVD contain a guide to take your first steps with the grandMA Please contact your local deale and order the DVD s 1 10Quick Reference After many years of experience we have lost our illusions about any user to be willing to read an entire manual before playing with a new toy But here are some tips which may help you to find your way around 1 10 1 Basics The grandMA is a highly specialised computer with up to 5 monitors M any functions will work as you are used to from your PC or MAC Main supply 90 230V The mouse in its drawer grandMA only or trackball on the grandMA light amp grandMA ultra light Ultrali
424. ubselection from the current selection If you have selected more than one fixture and then say NEXT only the first fixture stays selected and the others become temporarly deselected The next time you say NEXT only the 2 fixture within the current selection is really selected and so on The ALL command will clear this subselection Continue EDIT UPDATE procedure with NEXT object See EDIT Cursor Right in open dialog windows In all temporary dialog windows and message boxes you can use the NEXT key to move the input focus in that window to the right Together with PREVIOUS and ENTER you can for example choose the appropriate answer in a message box MIDI_BTN NEXT A MIDI_BTN midi button is a remote function triggert by incoming midi note on note off signals The MIDI_ BTN simulates an executor keypress therefore it is working only in combination with an assigned executor MIDI_ BTNs can be seen under TOOLS REM OTE MIDI menu Calling a MIDI_BTN manually If no device is selected NEXT will bring the fixture having the lowest ID into the selection on the next NEXT the fixture with the next ID in order will be selected With PREVIOUS the selecting direction will be reversed Proceeding from the fixture with the highest ID on the next NEXT the selection will jump to the dimmer with the lowest ID MIDI_ BTN X ENTER ODD Linking a MIDI_BTN to an executor STORE MIDI_BTN X EXEC FADEREBUTTON1 2 3 Y Z ENT
425. uence Master Sequence When creating sequences Cues can directly be stored on a Selected Sequence Press the SELECT key once LED is on a Select the respective EXECUTOR which shall be the Selected Sequence by pressing the respective EXECUTOR button once The headline of the small EXECUTOR window will be green To create the first Cue of the Selected Sequence 4 1 Creating Cues Push STORE key 1x LED flashes Push ENTER key 1x the created cue is now stored in the Master Sequence If no EXECUTOR button has been selected before storing and you confirm with ENTER the stored Cue will always be added to the current Selected Sequence In the Selected Sequence Cues can be played back directly Press the GOTO key once LED is on Enter the Cue number on the numeric keypad and confirm with ENTER The Cue will be played back with the set duration 2 13 Settings in the DEFAULTS menu When played back Cues directly you can enter a FADE or DELAY time using the TIME key After having entered the Cue number press the TIME key for the FADE time once and enter the period of time using the numeric keypad or press the TIME key once more for the DELAY time enter the duration using the numeric keypad and confirm with enter The Cue will be played back with the entered times The Cue will always be played back as if the Sequence was run from the very beginning That means all previous steps will be accounted for with regards to the track
426. ures and dimmer channels can be stored in groups max 999 groups Makes selecting of group of lamps very easy and quick The same Imap can be member of several groups 3 3 1Creating fixture or dimmer groups Create a GROUP window on one of the TFT touchscreens 3 1 Creating a Window Use the touch screen or make a left mouse click on the individual Fixture within the FIXTURE SHEET or click on the Dimmer channels in the CHANNEL or FADER SHEET The Fixtures and or dimmer channels that make up a group can be recalled one at a time in sequence The order in which they are recalled is same as the order in which they were selected when the group was originally stored When selecting Fixtures or Channels for a group make use of their order so that you can step through them individually using the NEXT PREV key Or Press the FIXTURE key for a fixture group or the CHANNEL key for dimmer groups LED is on Pressing the ENTER key will lock the Fixture or Channel in the Command Line Enter the number of first fixture or dimmer channel using the numeric keypad Now you can select the next fixture or dimmer channel to be selected by using the key The THRU key on the numeric keypad will select a range All fixtures and dimmer channels from to including the last number entered Using the key the fixture dimmer channel with the number you input will not be selected The selection can be confirmed with ENTER The s
427. utor Button 21 60 the additional executors can only be triggered from the Command Line This is the easier way to use shows created on the grandM A on smaller consoles By setting the soft key Executor Layout to Wide agrandMA light ultralight oder RPU will use the same executor numbering as the big brother grandMA does Therefore the first button executor has number 21 Please have in mind that in wide mode the printed labels on the consoles surface are wrong The advantage of wide mode is that all executors can be accessed by the command line This is useful when porting shows from a grandMA into a smaller console By clicking this key four calibrating keys numbered 1 to 4 will be displayed on the respective TFT display Touch the keys using your finger or the supplied pen special pen with soft rubber core The display will automatically switch back after the last key is touched The touchscreen is now calibrated and the settings will automatically be stored grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 MAC 2000 PERF MAC 200 Clone Fixture Data X Encoder 2 Fede Morand SETUP Menu grandMA Light UltraLight IDC IDF Name Type C MAC 2000 PERF MAC 2001 MAC 2000 PERF MAC 2001 MAC 2000 PERI MAC 2001 Presets MAC 2000 PERF MAC 2001 MAC 2000 PERF MAC 2001 MAC 2000 PERF MAC 200 Groups MAC 2000 PERF MAC 2001 b Clone gt
428. w Light Green Fixture Types l i jortName Manufacturer ot ure NONAME eature let___Droplet__XILVER e Flov Space Flov Studio Due ME Channels of Fixture 7 Attribute Type Snap Inv I COLORMIX1 Coarse es COLORMIX2 Coarse Yes COLORMIX3 Coarse _ Yes _ 8 eJ aign Action selection BE 06 f led 7 507 i x ColorPicker t t m RGB L 44 28 61 CHYEL 56 72 441 HSB 275 50 561 Assigning colors for Dimmer channels In the STAGE window or for the grandMA 3D this is where colors can be assigned for the individual Dimmer channels color filter foils Select one or more cells under Color and press the Encoder The Change Color menu will open In this menu you can choose between different color tables Lee Rosco etc Above each color the currently selected color table is displayed here Standard By shortly pressing the key you can switch to another color table Pressing the arrow will open a menu in which all tables are displayed and can be selected directly Having decided for an individual table you can choose a color using the Encoder and accept it by pressing the Encoder once If a color has been assigned this will be displayed in the respective cell Close menu with X RGB Lamps and LED Beamer without dimmer For this types of lamps grandMA can create an virtual dimmer This means that the
429. w between Huge very big Big and Small This window can be deleted by pressing the DELETE WINDOW key 1 A T E i tie ta ot x Pressing the X key will close the Option Window These settings will all be stored when VIEWS are stored 3 2 Storing VIEWS Eneoutoy Sequence Programme Output 0 0 Auto Oty MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de LIGH If the Settings button is pressed displayed with text in green Using the respective button you can display the following items Physical Values in P T degrees can be displayed Display Color Mix CMY can be displayed Display Wheels Gobos can be displayed Show Cue Colors ON Colors of tracked blocked values are shown OFF Colors of tracked blocked values are not shown Numbers are shown in yellow and fader bars in grey Programmer only The Fixture sheet will only show those fixtures and their features whose values were changed to change values not displayed press on the magenta PROGRAM MER ONLY button in the Layer Control bar so that the button turns grey to display the complete Fixture sheet Fixture Sheet Options Programmer Only d Display On Layer F Sorting amp Display Color Mix a Settings Off Show Cue Colors Display Display Wheels Filter Fixture Sheet Options Display Lay
430. white on turquoise white deleted value of preset background white square only fix PAN position of a moving head fixture 3 settings possible violet bar fix these attributes are currently used by an effect ID number green only fix ID number s are selected and can be moved in the Fixture Sheet only the sorting order of the sheet will be changed has no other eff ects violet bar these attributes has modulator values blue bar the channels are parked On the DM X output no changes will be output the last value will be kept internally however they can be changed and saved magenta bar these attributes has engine values e g from a effect blue background the fixture has been switched to No Master in the Dimmer Option or Fixture Options menu these fixtures will not react on the reagieren nicht auf den GrandM aster i e for GrandM aster on 0 they will react on changes made using the wheel or the Group master to which these fixtures belong violet background MODULATOR settings have been changed grey background the values has been changed by another user within one session this value will not be taken into account when saving and can only be modified after having selected the fixtures Colors used for the screen display in the Executer Fader olor or symbo white triangle shows the priority when overwriting in LTP mode title bar no triangle medium priority lig
431. will be explained on the next page You can select individual names using the left Encoder Range Name For these values the names Channel Values will be displayed The Start and End Ranges can be adjusted using the two Encoders in the middle AutoGen By choosing a cell and pressing the Encoder No will be indicated this means that the presets will be not automatically generated Visualize Here you can define what else is to be displayed in the Fixture Stage Sheet or grandMA 3D You can visualise either graphics for Gobos and colors or data plus units e g degrees for PAN TILT or RPM for Gobo rotation Range Visu These values will be displayed to indicate units e g with PAN TILT degrees e g Gobo rotation for a value of 1 20 1 RPM 20 RPM will be displayed Discrete values For the functions PAN and TILTthe maximal deflection is here setted important for Flip functions and grandMA 3D views E g Pan 90 270 corresponds a maximal deflection of 360 degrees whereas the middle is at 0 degrees asymetric deflection For Zoom and Iris the value range between 0 and 1 Extra With this you can define what Gobos or colors will be displayed Mode Here you can set an additional condition for displaying the name With Always you do not set a condition and the name will always be displayed If however a function Attribute is selected and a Range set this name will only be displayed if the value of
432. ws the number of Cues in the individual Sequences By pressing the key Edit you can customize the assigned Sequence or Effect Group in the EDIT menu 4 3 or 4 4 Editing Cues Sequences or Chasers 6 2 Editing Effect Groups 5 1 2 Changing Sequence Names By pushing the key Name the a sequence can be renamed using the keyboard or Push ASSIGN key 2x LED is on Push the executor button where the name of the sequence should be changed A window appears where you can now enter the new name 105 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Exec 1 11 Seq 1 Seg 1 Button and Fader Assignment Playback Options Choose Fader Function les Fix A B Normal Xfade trigger Auto Swop Function Protect Kill Protect Move in Black Options Cuelist Rate MB MIB Auto Xfade always never PrePos Swap Restart Options Loops XF A Restart with Track ying Name XF B first cue From Last pa 2 eee Off Priority Options 5 Private o ae hy Effects Default ORS ne Default Options Master Edit Load from Save as Apply to Load fom Save as N dAl default default all Exec default default pe Exec 2 18 Seq 4 Seq 4 Button and Fader Assignment Choose Button Function De Load from Save as App
433. xisting elements on the front of the unit Please note that you will only have 5 Executor Faders and 5 Executor Buttons available These Executors correspond with the first 5 Executors on the grandMA and grandMA light There is no access to any of the other Executors This becomes particularly important when programming the show on the grandM A but running the show afterwards on the Replay Unit 14 3 Specification and Technical Data 14 3 1 Integrated Harddisk and Diskdrive The harddisk does not only save a backup for the operating system but leaves enough space for countless shows with hundreds of sequences Shows can also be saved on disk for archive purposes or transfering to other grandMA consoles The floppy disk drive also allows you to update the software which can be downloaded from the MA Homepage www malighting de on the internet 188 14 3 2 Ethernet and other Options In addition to the 4 DM X output ports the hardware of the grandMA replay unit is designed to transmit larger numbers of channels via Ethernet ESTA is currently working on a standard protocol for this form of transmission which will guarantee a compatibility between units of dif ferent manufacturers similar to the DM X norm In addition to DM X input Sound SM PTE timecode it offers a printer port and a RS232 interface only for GPS receiver and a USP Port not active for faster communication with any kinds of peripheral units 14 3 3 System Maintena
434. xternal keyboard a mouse and an Trackerballhowever can be connected on the rear of the unit NOTE When using a mouse you always have to connect an external keyboard too 10 QUA Nm 12 Power switch Blackout key for Dimmer channels Grand Master for Dimmer channels TFT Display touch screen View Macro keys Encoder for moving scrolling the respective window contents Background key f on the TFT display Views are being overlayed by a menu ASSIGN EDIT you can use this key to bring up or hide the menu Keyboard key to bring up the Soft Keyboard on the TFT display MA key without function COMMAND key to bring up the Command menu Manual Time Setting for Presets LIGH MEN MA Lighting Technology GmbH Dachdeckerstr 16 D 97297 Waldbuttelbrunn www malighting de eMail info malighting de 13 14 17 20 21 Encoders To set the attribute values such as Gobo Pan Tilt times etc Keys To directly process Got Go etc for any Executor or to lock Executors Page change over For Channel faders Executor faders and Executor keys Playback buttons Can be defined as Go Go Pause Flash etc Executor faders Can be defined as M aster Swap Master X Fader etc List keys Faders will bring up small Executor windows for the EXECUTOR FADERS will bring up small Executor windows for the EXECUTOR BUTTONS Buttons Executor buttons can also be defi
435. xture Schedule Adjustments Misc Touchscreen Calibration Backlight je yes A Calibrate Brioht Defaults Touchscreen Options a r Live On Date nie Acce gt and Time Click amp Beep uto 3 Display aS oe MSnase Encoder amp Fader Movement ri Dimension Mete Screensaver Of py aa Gooseneci ki seal Parameters Executor Mode_ Peder Wheel ae Update 1024 al Manual Additive p 4 Software p ie Values t Align Off t 222 PF setup Menu MICRO Defa Reset to x 3 Defaults Promanunes Playback Executor Sheet Sheet Misc g g Timing Defaults Sorting Fontsize Basic Fade On Off Time Default is Ree Steet Seseersnatert Laat 8s Os Sequence _ Numbers Big x gt Master Basic Outfade GOTO amp GO Chase Speed Ch Sheet S t Enabled _ infade Cue Timing 1s00 ei i CRONAN 5 Highlight Numb Bi Snap Delay MIB Delay Chase Fade e J A Normal us g 100 Fader Sheet Keyboard Ti MIB Fad Readout Enen a rigger ade feadoul G0 1s sec Numbers Sheet kesad Readout Dot Zero Crossfade Single Rigi Permanent _ Preset Value Eni ia Colours p Remotes Trackball Default At SECIS Basic Fade 8s Basic Outfade Snap 0 Delay s DEFAULTS By pressing this key you will enter the DEFAULTS menu All general presets can be set in this
436. xtures you can choose individual groups If you had entered a value under Interleave 1st will be displayed for the first group on the right of Interleave Next Prev Using the lt or gt keys you can switch over to the next group When moving the selection the other fixtures will now be selected or Interleave Next Prev E g You want to select each fifth fixture of the whole selection and move this subselection Next Prev must be Off Switch it off by shortly pressing into the center of Next Prev to lt 2nd gt The display will switch to Off Then press gt under Settings next to Interleave until a 5 appears Now you have selected only the first sixth eleventh fixture By shortly pressing lt or gt next to Interleave Next Prev you can move the selection by one position up or down If you want to move several fixtures simultaneously you can define this under Groups 79 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 STORE Circular Copy J gt Filter gt T MA Dicks b Reset D Fixture Sheet Values amp Presets sq Name L1000AS L1000AS L1000AS fe 0 NS L1000AS VL1000AS VL1000AS L1000AS VL1000AS L1000AS 60 CO On Ino Sjo Pan Tilt Pan Tilt 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Dimmer Dim Open Closed
437. y contains values for dimmers and colors ALLOW EM BEDDED If the values contains a preset an Embedded Preset will be stored ONLY DIRECT Embedded Presets are not possible While holding down the STORE key make a preselection by pressing the appropriate button Universal Selective Preset Filter ON or OFF Release STORE key STORE LED comes on Select the required location in the PAN TILT window on the display by a simple touch or with left click of the mouse These Pan amp Tilt values are now stored in this location STORE LED is off Enter a name for the preset using the keyboard confirm with ENTER If you want to store more presets for the same fixtures and functions start again with step 3 3 7 5 Update Preset 3 7 1 Moving Preset Keys within the Window Press MOVE key 1x LED comes on Activate the key in the respective window by either using the touchscreen or a left mouse click on the key and drag a hand symbol appears to the required location within this window You can also insert preset keys Press M OVE key 2x LED flashes Activate the key in the respective preset window using the touchscreen or make a left mouse click and drag hand symbol appears to the desired location between two other keys The following keys will all be moved by one position to the right 3 7 2 Presets Options In the Preset Options menu you can define how Presets in the Preset Pool will appear Icons Off No icons
438. y used by the show 221 Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 SERVICE TIMETABLE In order to guarantee the legendary reliability of our products over along period of time you should mind the service lives of some hardware components These parts are heavily stressed in continuous duty and are subject to normal wear and tear By replacing these parts in time you can avoid malfunctions in time critical situations The replacement intervalls depend on the stress and environmental conditions lt the specifications listed below are based on our experience data Part Recommended replacement Delivery situation in Europe after Battery 4 years 2 3 workdays not UL and MICRO Hard disk 3 5 years 2 3 workdays should be in stock when using not MICRO several devices Touchscreen after mechanical damage 2 3 workdays Encoder 2 3 years 2 3 workdays M otor fader depending on env situation 2 3 workdays only grandMA and Light immediately if liquid has entered On malfunction clean slot with a Q tip Spare parts can be ordered from MA Lighting GmbH or Lightpower GmbH Dachdeckerstra e 16 An der Talle 26 D 97097 Waldb ttelbrunn D 33102 Paderborn info malighting de info lightpower de For your order please have the serial number of the device at hand 222 Installation follow safety instructions Simple installation by experienced amateur By electronic specialist having appropriate tools or M
439. y will not change anything in their newly completed show data of course they should save their show before they log in as playback user It is not necessary to save the whole desk after you have changed something in the User M anager AIl data of the User M anager is immediately saved when you leave the User M anager menu 2 16 6 Login Login is only enabled if at least one user appears in the user list TOOLS menu User Configuration Manual login Go to TOOLS menu Press LOGIN key Never push Login without knowing the password Otherwise you can only log in by ADMIN All touchscreens will show LOGIN and you have to enter a valid user name During LOGIN the surface of the desk is locked LOGIN does not affect playback All programs that are running continue to do so After a successful login the views of the corresponding user profile will appear on the screens Furthermore BY user s saved setup and default settings will automatically be loaded too grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 Chat Settings Views Displays Encoder amp Attribute Quikeys Grouping General Settings a Everything World Filter Used Global DEFAULT B Mm T 2 dd J No 3 No WORLD 1 2 16 9 Who is logged in at the moment Go to the Tools menu Look at the title bar of the window It says Tools M enue current user is NOTE IF POSSIB
440. you can now enter the new name or in Group Pool 3 3 Creating and calling up Fixtures and Dimmer GROUPS Submaster Options The Settings key must be pressed dark background If the POSITIVE ENABLE key is pressed this Group Master is the Master Fader for all dimmer channels of this group If a Group Master is set as INHIBIT Master NEGATIVE INHIBIT key is pressed for a group that includes Fixt ures or dimmer channels from other groups this INHIBIT Master must also be pushed up to be able to use the overlapping channels The INHIBIT Master has priority over other group masters and can also be used as Master Fader for all other Group Masters Group Overview Pressing the GROUP key twice will open an overview in the right display showing all assigned Group M asters In this overview every Group Master is displayed with a separate small window The top key contains the group name Clicking on this key will open the Page on which it is stored The display above the Fader shows HERE With the FULL key you can set the M aster to 100 With the OUT key you can set the Master to 0 The yellow status indicator next to the keys will give you the currently set value for the respective Fader Pressing the ALL FULL key in the title bar will set all group masters to 100 Pressing the CLOSE key will close this window 111 grand MA Hotline 49 5251 688865 99 Operating Manual grandMA Version 5 7 5 1 6A
441. zer this means that movements in the visualizer and on stange will differ DEFAULT This value will be output if no CUE Sequence Preset or Direct Access addresses the fixture or dimmer channel This setting can be used for PAN TILT so that a moving light can start being manipulated from a sensible and optimum position You can change values by selecting the cell and adjust it by using the right Encoder below the Display These values can be set by selecting the respective cell with a click n The HIGHLIGHT function is used to temporarly override a fixtures current settings making it easier to see on stage and speed up the procedure of programming positions of the selected fixtures The HIGHLIGHT values for individual DM X channels can be set by selecting the respective cell with a click A value can then be entered within the activated window You can adjust the value by using the second Encoder below the Display STAGE not yet available in version SNAP New values for this channel will ignore cue timing and will execute in 0 seconds Activate by a click on the cell Press the Encoder right of the Display Select Yes for SNAP or No for FADE and accept by pressing the Encoder one more time A YES in the respective cell will indicate that SNAP has been chosen for this channel The default for all DM X channels is to follow cue timing FADE A value can be changed slowly channel can fade This is only a pre setting for each

english - Alive Events

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents